HP PhotoSmart C500 User Manual
HP PhotoSmart C500 Digital Camera HP PhotoSmart C500 Digital Camera HP PhotoSmart C500 Digital Camera HP PhotoSmart C500 Digital Camera Userâs Guide Userâs Guide Userâs Guide Userâs Guide
T rademark and C opyright Information © Copyright 2000 Hewlett-Packard Company All rights are reserv ed. No part of this d ocument may be pho to copied, reprod uced, or translate d to another language with out the prior writte n conse nt of He wlett-Packard C ompa ny. The inf ormat ion cont ained in this d ocumen t is s u bject to chang e withou t noti ce. Hewlet t-Packar d s hall no t be li able fo r errors conta ined herei n or for cons equ enti al damag es in c onnec tion w ith t he fu rnish ing, perf ormanc e, or use of this m ateri al. HP , t he HP lo go, JetS end, the J etSend l ogo, Phot oSmart, a nd the Pho toSmar t logo are pro perty o f H ewlett-P ackard Compan y. Micro soft a nd Windo ws are registe red t radem arks of Micr osoft Cor porat ion. Digita, the Di gita logo, and Digit a Deskt op are tr ademarks o f Flashp oint T echnolog y, Inc. CompactFla sh, CF , and the CF l ogo are tr ademarks of SanDisk Cor poration . Mac, the Mac logo, and Macinto sh are regis tered tradema rks of Apple Co mputer, In c. Other bra nds and their p roducts a re trademar ks or regist ered tradema rks of their respective ho lders.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide i Ta b l e o f C o n t e n t s Chapter 1 - Introduction .............................................. ................................... ..................... .................................................. ................... 1 Chapter 2 - Getting Started ..................... .................. .................. ................. ......................... ............................. ................................... 3 Camera Parts ............. .......... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... .. .............. ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ......... 3 Setting Up Your Ca mera ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ..... ................ ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ......... 5 Attachin g the Wrist Strap and Lens Cover Leash . ............... ........... ..... .......... ................ ........... ..... ...... ......... ........... ................ .......... .............. 5 Installin g the Batteries ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ........ ... ................ ............... ........... ............... ........... ................ ... 7 Installin g the Main Bat teries ...... ...... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ................ .......... ....... ......... ............... ........... ................ .......... .............. 7 Installin g a New Coin Battery .............. .......... ................ ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ..... ................ ........... .......... ................ .......... ......... 8 Checking the Batt ery Level ........ ................ ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ................ ........ ........ ............... ........... .......... ................ ........... ...9 Charging the Ba tt eries ... ..... .......... ................ ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ................ .. .............. ............... ........... ................ .......... ............. 11 Installin g the Memory Card .......... ................ .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... ................ ...... .......... ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... .. 11 Checking the Mem ory Card St atus ................... ..... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ..... ........... ... .................. ............... ........... ................ ..13 Formatting a Memory Ca rd ............. .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ..... ........... ............... ...... .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ . 14 Camera Basics ..... ...... .......... ................ .......... ..... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ........ ............. ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ....... 15 Turning the Camera On and Off ...... ................ ........... ..... .......... ...... .......... ................ ............... .. ................... ................ ................ .......... ............ 15 Sleep Mode .............. ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ........... ............... ........ ............. ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ....... 16 Using the Camera Modes .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... .......... ................ .......... ................ .......... ................ ............. 17 Understand in g the Viewfinder Indicator Light ........... ................ ............... ........... ............... .............. ....... ........... ............... ................ ........... . 18
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide ii Table of Content s Using the Color LCD .... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ................ ... .................. .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ . 19 Overlay Bars .. ................ .......... ................ .......... ..... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... .. ............. ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... ....... 2 1 Soft Keys .... ............... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... .... ................. ........... ............... ........... ................ ............... .......23 Using the Camera Menus ..... .......... ..... ........... ..... ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ ..... ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... .......23 Setting the Date an d Time .... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ................ ............... ........... ... .................. ............... ........... ................ .......... ........... 24 Changing th e Lang uage .. .......... ................ .......... ..... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... .... ............ ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... .27 Changing th e Camera âs Name ..... ................ .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... ..... ........... ........... ..... ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... 28 Using an AC Power Adapter (recommended) .. ................ ........... ..... .......... ..... ........... ................ ........... ......... ................ ........... ............... ...... 29 Chapter 3 - Taking Photos ....................... .................. .................. ................. .................. ....... ........... ................................... ............... 30 Overview ........... ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ............. ........ ................ ................ ............... ........... ............... ........... ................ 30 Taking a Photo . ..... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ............ .............. ................ ............... ........... ................ ............... ...... 30 Checking the Camera St atus .... ................ .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ................ .......... .. ... ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... .......32 Using the Status LCD ............... ........... ..... .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... ................ ....... ......... ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... .32 Using the Color LCD ...... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ .. ................... ..................... .......... ................ ............ 33 Taking Stil l, Burst and Timela pse Photos ............. ........... ..... .......... ................ .......... ................ ..... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ...... 3 5 Taking Still P hotos .............. .......... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... .......... ........... .......... ........... ................ .......... ................ .......... ...... 35 Taking Burst Phot o s ................ ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ........ ................... .......... ................ .......... ................ .......... ...... 36 Taking Timelapse Photos .................... ........... ................ ............... ........... ..... .......... ............... ............ .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ 38
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide iii Table of Content s Adjusting the Camera Se ttings ............. ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ................ ..... ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... 42 Taking Black and W hit e Photos .............. ............... ................ ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ................ .......... ........... .......... ................ ........... 42 Changing th e Fla sh Setting ...... .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ..... ................ ................ ............... ........... ................ 43 Adjusting the Photo Quality ..... .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ........... .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ 45 Using the Zo om ......... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ............... .... ................. ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ...... 50 Using Macro Mode ... ........... ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ........... .. .................. ........... .......... ................ ........... ............... ...... 52 Using the Sel f-Timer .................... .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ................ .. ................... ............... ........... ............... ........... ................ 53 Setting the Exposure ............... ............... ........... ................ ............... ........... ............... ........ ............. ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ...... 56 Setting the White Ba lan ce ............... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ................ .. ................... ............... ........... ................ ............... ...... 58 Using Instant Review .......... ............... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ............. ... ................ ............... ........... ............... ........... ............... 60 Setting the Eye Start ..... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... 62 Setting Hand Held ................... ............... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ..... .......... ....... ................... ........... .......... ................ ........... ............... ...... 62 Setting the Counte r Reset ..... .......... ..... ........... ................ ............... ........... ............... ............. .............. .......... ................ .......... ................ .......... ...... 63 Setting Auto Sh utoff ........... .......... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........... . .............. ........... ............... ........... ................ .......... ........... 64 Setting the Beep ... ................ .......... ................ .......... ..... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........ ............. ................ .......... ................ .......... ................ ........... 65
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide iv Table of Content s Chapter 4 - Viewing Photos .................... ..................................................... ........................... ........................................................... 67 Overview ........... ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ............. ........ ................ ................ ............... ........... ............... ........... ................ 67 Using Review Mo de .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ............... ...... .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ........... 69 Selecting Photos ....... ........... ..... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ..... ........... ............... .... ................. ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ...... 69 Marking Phot os .............. ................ .......... ...... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... .............. ....... ................ .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ 70 Deleting Ph otos .... ..... ........... ............... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........ ............. ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ ............. 71 Protecting Photos .......... ........... ..... .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... ................ ............... ...... ................ ............... ........... ............... ........... ................ .7 2 Categorizin g Pho tos ..... ...... .......... ................ .......... ..... ........... ................ ............... ........... .. ............. ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ....... 73 Grouping Pho tos .. .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ............... ........... ........... ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... .75 Creating and Removing Groups ......... ..... ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ ................ ..... .......... ............... ............ .......... ........... 76 Adding Photos to a Group .......... ................ ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ................ ........ ............. .......... ................ ................ .......... ...... 78 Opening and Closing Groups ... ........... ................ ............... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... .. ... .......... ............... ........... ........... ................ 79 Expanding Burst and Timelapse Phot o s .. .......... ...... .......... ................ .......... ..... ........... ................ .... ........... ................ .......... ................ .......... 80 Searching for P hotos ......... .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ ............... ........... ... .................. .......... ................ .......... ................ .......... ....... 81 Using Play Mode .................... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ....... ......... ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ...... 84 Viewing Single Photo s . ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... .......... ........... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ...... 84 Zooming In on Yo ur Ph otos ....... ...... .......... ................ .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... .......... ........... ................ ............... ........... ................ 85 Viewing Burst, Timelapse, an d Grouped Photos ....... .......... ...... .......... ................ ............... ........... ....... .............. .......... ................ ................ 86 Creating a Slideshow ................... ................ .......... ..... ........... ................ ............... ........... ... ............ ........... ............... ........... ................ ............... ...... 87 Deleting Ph otos .... ..... ........... ............... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........ ............. ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... 89
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide v Table of Content s Using Your Telev ision ........... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ................ .......... ........... .......... ..................... ........... ............... ................ .......... 90 Selecting the Video Out put Format ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ..... .......... ................ ......... ................. ................ .......... ................ .......... 90 Connecting the Camera to a Television ........ ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ............. ... ............... ................ ........... ............... ....... 91 Viewing Photos on a Television ........ ................ ........... ..... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... .... . ................ ............... ...... ................ .......... ........... 92 Chapter 5 - Sharing and Prin tin g Photos ............ .................. ................................... .................. .... ............................... ............... 93 Connecting the Camera t o Your P C ... ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ................ ....... .............. ............... ...... ............... ........... ................ 93 System Requirements ............. ............... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ..... .......... ........... ..... ................ ............... ........... ................ ............... ...... 94 Installin g the Software ...... ............... ........... ..... .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... .............. ....... ................ ............... ........... ................ ............... ...... 95 Connecting the Camera ........ .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ... ............. ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... 95 Downloading Pho tos ... ...... .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ..... ................ .......... .......... ................ ................ .......... ...... 96 Printing Pho tos ..................... ............... ........... ............... ........... ................ ............... ....... .............. ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ........... 98 Connecting the Camera to Your Macinto sh ... ................ .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ ..... .......... ................ .......... ................ .......... 101 System Requirements ............. ............... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ..... .......... ........... ................ .......... ................ ............... ........... ............... 101 Installin g the Software ...... ............... ........... ..... .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... .............. ....... ................ ............... ........... ................ ............... ..... 101 Connecting the Camera ........ .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ... ............. ............... ........... ............... ................ ......... 102 Downloading Pho tos ... ...... .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ..... ................ .......... .......... ................ ................ .......... .... 103 Printing Pho tos ..................... ............... ........... ............... ........... ................ ............... ....... .............. ................ .......... ................ .......... ................ ......... 105
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide vi Table of Content s Printing Phot os Wi thout a Comp uter ............ ............... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ............ ... ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... .... 106 Using a Card Reader ... ................ ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ..... ................ ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ......... 1 06 Using a Digital Print Orde r Format (DP OF) File .. ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... .......... ................ ........... ............... ................ ......... 107 JetSending P hotos .. ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ........... ............. ........ .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ .......... ......... 109 Transmitti ng Photos Between Two Cameras .. ................ .......... ................ .......... ................ .......... ...... . ......... ................ .......... ................ ................ 112 Using Digita Scripts .......... ........... ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... .. .............. ................ .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ 1 14 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting and Ma intenance ................ ................................... ................................ .................................... 115 Problems and Solut ions . ................ .......... ..... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ............... .... ................. ..................... ........... ............... ................ ........... 1 15 Getting Assista nce ... .......... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ...... .......... .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ........... 116 HP Photo Smart on the Internet .... ................ .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... ................ ......... ................. .......... ................ ........... ............... ......116 Help ...... ................ .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ...... .................... .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... ...... 1 17 Contact in g HP Customer Care ....... ...... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ................ .......... ..... . .................... ................ ................ .......... ........... 117 HP Customer Care Online ..... ........... ..... .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... ..... ........... .............. ....... ............... ........... ................ ............... ...... 117 HP Customer Care by Phon e .... ...... .......... ..... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ............... ........ ............. ................ .......... ................ ........... 11 8 Mainten ance .............. .......... ................ .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ ....... ........ ........... .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... ......11 8
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide vii Table of Content s Appendix A - Sa fety, Regulatory, and Warranty Information ...... ...................................................... ......... ........ .............. 119 Safety Informatio n .. .......... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ....... ......... ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ......119 Regulatory Notices ...... .......... ...... .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ .......... ..... ... ............. ..................... ............... ........... ................ .......... ......... 120 U.S.A. .... ................ .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ .......... ................ ...... ............... ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... .... 120 Canada .......... ................ ........... ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ..... ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... ................ ......... 120 Hewlett-Packard Li mit ed Warranty Statement .............. .......... ..... ........... ............... ................ ........... .. .................. ........... ............... ...... ................ 12 1 Hewlett-Packard Year 2000 Warranty for Consumer Product s Distribut ed Thro ugh Aut horized Resellers .......................... 123 Appendix B - Refer ence .............................................. ................................... ....................... ................................................ ............. 124 Menu Stru cture ......... ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ................ .... ...... ........... ................ .......... ................ .......... ................ ............... 124 Record (Rec) Mode .............. .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... . ......... ........... ............... ........... ............... ................ .......... 124 Review (Rev) Mode .... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ............... ...... ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ..... 127 Play Mode ............... ..... ........... ............... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ... ............. ................ ............... ........... ............... ................ .......... 12 8 Icons ......... .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... ........ ........ ................ .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ..........129 Color LCD .... ................ ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ...... .......... ................ .......... ... ........ ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... .....129 Categories . ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ........... ............... ...... ..................... .......... ................ ............... ........... ............... 13 2 Status LCD ......... .......... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........ ........ ..... ................ .......... ................ ............... ........... ............... 133 Error Messages .............. .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ..... ........... ................ .............. ...... .......... ........... ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... .....13 4 Color LCD .... ................ ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ...... .......... ................ .......... ... ........ ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ..... 134 Status LCD ......... .......... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........ ........ ..... ................ .......... ................ ............... ........... ............... 134 Camera Specifica tions .... ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... ....... .............. ................ ............... ........... ................ .......... .......... 135
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâs Guide viii Table of Content s Glossary ..... .................................... ..................................................... ....................... .............................. ................................... ..............136 Index ............ ..................................................... ..................................................... .. ..................................................................... ............. 142
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 1 Chapter 1 - Introduction This guide c ompleme nts the Basics guide th at you recei ved with your HP PhotoSm art C500 Digital Came ra. It descri bes the camera âs ad vanced features, usi ng a step- by-step approa ch. The gui de is divided into th e follow ing sections: Chapte r Chapte r Chapte r Chapt er Title Title Title Title Description Description Description Description 1 Introdu ctio n How to use this guide . 2 Getting Started How to set up yo ur camer a, incl uding in stalli ng the bat teries , using an AC po wer ad apter , i nstall ing the me mory car d, sett ing the da te and t i me, c hangin g the la nguage, turnin g the ca mera on and of f, and u sing the c amera mo des, c olor LCD and me nus. 3 Taking Photos How to take S till, Bu rst a nd Timel apse p hotos, c heck th e cam era statu s, and a djust the cam era s ettings. 4 Viewing Phot os How to view ph ot os us in g Revi ew mod e, Pl ay mod e, or yo ur telev ision, and how to mark, categ orize , grou p, prot ect, an d delete photos. 5 Shari ng an d P rinti ng Photos How to send p hotos to anoth er camer a or a p rinte r, or pr int photos from a PC or Ma cintosh c omput er.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 2 6 Troubles hootin g and Mai ntena nce Soluti ons to probl ems, wh ere to fin d help using th e Interne t, th e softwa re Help, or HP C ustomer Care, and how to c lean th e camera. AS a f e t y , R e g u l a t o r y , and Warr anty Infor mation Batter y and A C power adapte r safe ty, ho w t he ca mera com plies with U.S. an d Canadi an reg ulations , and the exten t of the L imited Warran ty. B Referenc e Color LCD menu struct ures for Record, Review and Play mo des, icons used on the col or and s tatus LCDs, e rror mess ages disp layed on the c olor an d stat us LCDs , and came ra specif ications . Glossa ry Glos sary of ca mera p arts an d term inology.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 3 Chapter 2 - Getting Started This ch apter shows you how to set up your new H P PhotoS mart C 500 Dig ital Came ra, i ncluding in stalling t he batte rie s, using an AC po wer adapter, in sta ll i ng t he m emo ry c a rd, set ti ng t he da te a n d ti m e, ch a ngi ng t h e l an gu age, turnin g the ca mera on and of f, and us ing the c amera mo des, c olor L CD a nd menus . Camera Parts The follo wi ng ill ustr a tions sh ow the parts of th e HP Ph ot oS ma rt C500 Di gi tal C ame r a. T o view a gl ossa ry of camer a parts and term inology, see âGl ossaryâ on pa ge 136. Status L CD Shutter button Camera mode d ial Flash butt on Photo Quali ty button Share button On/off but ton To p To p To p To p Main battery compar tment door T ripo d mou nt Coin battery compartm en t cover Bottom Bottom Bottom Bottom
Camera Part s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 4 Side Side Side Side Self-tim er light Flash Lens Infrare d se n s or s Autom atic flash sensor Front Front Front Front Serial/USB compute r connection Video O u t AC p ow e r adapter connection Automatic focus and exposure sen sors Zoom control Memory card door latch Memory card do or Wrist strap atta chment Soft k eys Color L CD Back Back Back Back Color L CD on/off button 4-way arrow button Eye Start sensors Viewfi nder Overlay button Menu button Viewfind er i ndicator light
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 5 Setting Up Y our Camera Attaching the Wrist Strap and Lens Cover Leash The HP Ph otoS mart C500 D igital Camera c omes with a wrist strap a nd l ens cover leash. The wrist str ap and lens cover l eash ha s three l oops: 1. A short l oop to a ttach to the c amera. 2. A long thin l oop to a ttach to the l ens co ver. 3. The main wr ist strap loo p. 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 6 T o attach the wrist strap: T o attach the wrist strap: T o attach the wrist strap: T o attach the wrist strap: 1. Using th e wrist s trap and lens c over lea sh include d in th e box wit h your came ra, th read the sh ort l oop thro ugh the c amera a ttachm ent. Y ou might ne ed to u se a pencil to pul l the e nd of t he loop th roug h. 2. Pull th e strap and t he lens cover leas h thro ugh th e loop, and the n pull th e knot tig ht. T o attach th e lens cover leash : T o attach th e lens cover leash : T o attach th e lens cover leash : T o attach th e lens cover leash : 1. Remo ve the l ens cove r from the ca mera. 2. Thr e ad the lon g, thin loop thr ough the ho le in the le ns cove r. 3. Pull the lens c over t hrough th e loop , and th en pull the knot tight. 4. Replace t he lens cover on the camera . 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 7 Installing the Batteries The HP Ph otoSm art C500 D i gital Camera u ses t hree AA NiMH (Ni ck el Me tal Hy dride) b atteries . It a lso use s a coin battery fo r retai ning th e date a nd time i nformatio n. The ca mera comes with a co in bat tery (a lready in stalled), three NiMH ba tteries, and an NiMH batte ry charge r. Instal ling the Main Batteri es Caution: Use only A A NiMH batteries. Re place al l three batteries at the same time. Do not replace the bat teries individ ually. A lways fol low in struction s on the battery pack age w hen hand ling or disposi ng of ba tteries. T o install the main batteries: T o install the main batteries: T o install the main batteries: T o install the main batteries: 1. Ma k e sure t he camera powe r i s off off off off . 2. Open the ma in ba ttery co mpartme nt door b y slidi ng the la tch i n the direc tion of t he word O PEN. 3. Insert three batter ies, making s ure the /- elect rodes are faci ng the prop er direc tion (see the d iagram i nside the b attery compart ment) . 4. Close the main batter y compa rtment d oor. Main battery compa rtme nt door
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 8 Instal ling a New Coin Bat te ry When you buy the camera, a coin battery i s alrea dy insta lled. F ollow these directi ons if you need to insta ll a n ew coin batte ry. Caution: Use onl y a CR 2025 or equiva lent 3 volt c oin ba ttery. Always f ollow instruct ions on the bat tery pa ck age when han dlin g or di sposi ng of ba tte ries. T o inst all a coin battery: T o inst all a coin battery: T o inst all a coin battery: T o inst all a coin battery: 1. Ma k e sure t he camera powe r i s off off off off . 2. Remove the co in batt ery c ompart ment cov er by pla c in g the ed ge of a co in in the groo ve an d turni ng it coun ter-clo ckwis e until it stops. 3. Insert the coin ba ttery, so yo u see th e positiv e ( ) side f acing u p. 4. Repla ce the co in batt ery compa rtmen t cover and turn it clock wise until i t stops.
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 9 Checki ng th e B atter y L evel The battery i con on the cameraâs status L CD in dicates the c harge l evel for the main NiMH bat teries. There are t hree levels of batt ery char ge: fully c harged, partial ly charged , and em pty. Y ou can pu rchas e addition al NiMH batteries from H Pâs Shop ping V illag e at www.hpshoppin g.com www.hpsh opping.c om www.hpsh opping.c om www.hpsh opping.c om , o r from you r loca l ca mera or electron ics s tore. Batte ry life depen ds on sev era l f a ctors. These in cl u de: ⢠How often an d how long yo u use the color LCD. ⢠How ofte n you us e the fla sh and zoom. ⢠The numb er of photos you tak e. ⢠T emperatu re co ndition s (opera ting the camera at col der temp eratur es results in shorter battery l ife). T o preserve batter y life : ⢠When us in g th e ca me ra with a com p ut er or te lev isio n or when using th e col or L CD for exte nde d per io ds of ti m e, use an A C power adapt er that HP ha s app roved for use with the HP Phot oSmart C500 Digi tal Camera . ⢠Limit your use of the color L CD, except when usi ng an A C power adapter. ⢠Do not l eave b atteries in the charger for an exte nded period of time (su ch as sever al days).
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 10 T o check the main battery level: T o check the main battery level: T o check the main battery level: T o check the main battery level: ⢠Press the on/off on/off on/off on/off button to turn th e cam era on. The stat us L CD displ ays the b attery st atus icon. Note: If the batter ies are low when you firs t turn on the camera, t he camera beeps 5 ti mes, the empty battery icon flashes on the status L CD, the lens retracts, and the sta tus L CD goes bl ank as the c amera turns i tself off. T o check the c oin batt ery leve l: T o check the c oin batt ery leve l: T o check the c oin batt ery leve l: T o check the c oin batt ery leve l: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the co lor LCD on/o ff colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off button to turn the c olor L CD on . 3. If you do not see th e overlay bars , press the Overlay Overlay Overlay Overlay butt on to turn t hem on. 4. Press the Status Status Status Status button (right s oft key) to see the c amera status. The coi n battery i con appea rs on th e color L CD only if the battery lev el is low, or if th e re is no co in batt ery inst alled in the ca mera. 5. Press the Exit Exit Exit Exit button (right soft k ey) to exit the Sta tus sc reen. Fully c h ar ged Partia lly c harg ed Empt y On/off button Status L CD Battery st atu s icon Coin battery icon indica tes low charge or no batter y ins t alle d
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 11 Charging the Ba tterie s T o mak e sure your NiMH batt eri es ar e charged when you ne ed them, we recommend ch ar gin g t he m ov ern ig ht usi ng the bat tery charger included in the camera pack age. Once the bat teries ar e fully charged, remove them from the charge r. Note: The ba tteries re ach optimum charge c apaci ty for the firs t time a fter the y hav e been dr ained and ch arged four times. Installing the Memory Card The âfi lmâ used in the HP Photo Smart C 500 Di gital C ame ra is a remova ble, reu sabl e Compac tFlash memory card. T o ins tall the me mory card: T o ins tall the me mory card: T o ins tall the me mory card: T o ins tall the me mory card: 1. Slide th e memor y card doo r latch down to open th e memo ry card do or. Memory card door lat ch
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 12 2. If you are removin g an existin g card : Caution: Before you remove a memo ry card fro m the ca mera, mak e sure the memor y card a ccess li ght is off off off off (see the pic ture belo w). ⢠Press th e memo ry card re lease button to relea se the c ard fr om the slot. ⢠Remove the card. 3. Insert the new m emory card so t hat the fron t of the ca rd faces t he front of the camera and the e dge with pinh oles is plac ed in to the c amera f irst. 4. Gentl y push the memor y card all the way into the cam era un til it stops. 5. Close the memor y card do or. Tip: If you ca nnot close the m emory c ard door, you may no t have i nserted t he memor y card correctl y. CompactFlash memory card Memory card door Memory card access light Memory card release bu tton
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 13 Checkin g the Memo ry Card Stat us The mem ory card icon on the ca meraâs status L CD indicates the stat us of th e memo ry card. I f the re is not a memo ry card in stalle d in the cam era, th e memory ca rd icon has a flashing X ove r it, th e number of photos remai ning is 000, and a red light appe ars to the left of the viewfi nder. ⢠Press the on/off on/off on/off on/off button to turn the cam er a on. The s tatus L CD disp lays the m emory c ard st atus i con and the n umber of photos remain ing. T he St atus menu displays the me mory card i nserte d icon on the color L CD. (See âUsin g the Colo r LC Dâ on page 33 for more inform ation a bout the Stat us men u.) Memory card s tatus Photos re maining Memory card inserted
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 14 The numb er of photos a me mory car d can st ore depen ds on the memory cardâs storag e capa city and the sett ings t hat you choose for each photo . The number is a co nserva tive es timate, so you m ight find that you can t ak e more photo s than it in dicates . Y ou can also check the stat us of th e memo ry card usi ng the m emory card indica tor on the color LCD. For exampl e, yo u can see fr om th e indi cato r in t he graphic that the memory card is more than half full. F ormatting a Memory Card Most Compac tFlash memory cards are already fo rmatted wh en you buy them . But if you buy a memory ca rd th at has no t be en for matted , you need to for m at it bef ore you can use it in the camera . T o format a m emory card: T o format a m emory card: T o format a m emory card: T o format a m emory card: 1. Insert the memo ry card and turn the camer a on. T he ca mera ca n be in any m ode. If th e memor y card is not fo rmat ted, the co lor L CD disp lays a m essa ge ask ing i f you w ant to format the m emory card. 2. Press the Fo r m a t Fo r m a t Fo r m a t Fo r m a t butto n (left so ft k ey). The camera formats the memory card. Memory card indicator
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 15 Camera Basics T urning the Camera On and Off T o turn the camera power on: T o turn the camera power on: T o turn the camera power on: T o turn the camera power on: ⢠Press the on/off on/off on/off on/off button to turn th e came ra powe r on. The came ra lens automat icall y exten ds, and the st atus LCD displ ays the st atus of the came ra . Tip: Reme mber to remove the le ns cover before taking a pho to. T o remind you rself , alwa ys repla ce the l ens co ver with the l eash attachmen t poin ting up so tha t you see it w hen you look through the vi ewfinder. T o turn the camera power off: T o turn the camera power off: T o turn the camera power off: T o turn the camera power off: ⢠Press the on/off on/off on/off on/off button to turn the cam er a po wer off. The came ra lens aut omatic ally re tract s and th e status LCD goes blan k. On/off bu tton Stat u s LCD
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 16 Sleep Mode T o conserv e batter y power , the HP PhotoSm art C 500 Digi tal Ca mera a utomati cally â sleepsâ a fter a peri od of no activit y. Th is per i od of time di ffers d ependin g on the camera mode an d the p ower so urce . F or example, if yo u ar e using ba tter y pow er a nd you do n ot press any camer a bu tto ns fo r 30 sec on ds, th e color L CD turns its el f off a nd th e camera sleep s. The ca mera also tu rns itsel f off an d retrac ts the lens after 1 0 minut es with bat tery powe r, and after 30 minutes with A C adapter p ower. F or more info rmatio n abou t the sl eep and sh utoff ti mes, se e âSetti ng Auto Shutof fâ on page 64. T o âw ake upâ the came ra: T o âw ake upâ the came ra: T o âw ake upâ the came ra: T o âw ake upâ the came ra: ⢠Press a ny button.
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 17 Using the Came ra Modes The HP PhotoSmart C500 Di gital Camera has four modes. The camera mode de termine s which f eatures and me nu opti ons are a ctive. Use the camera mode dial camera mode dial camera mode dial camera mode dial to select the mo de. Mode Mode Mode Mode F unct ions Functions Functions Functions Rec (R ecord ) Rec (R ecord ) Rec (R ecord ) Rec (R ecord ) ⢠Take p hotos ⢠Preview p hotos on the c ameraâ s color L CD or a televi sion Rev (Re vie w) Rev (Re vie w) Rev (Re vie w) Rev (Re vie w) ⢠View thumbnai ls of your photo s ⢠Mark, c ategor ize, gro u p, pr otect, and delete ph otos ⢠View pho tos on th e came raâs color LCD o r a te levisio n ⢠Transmi t photo s via i nfrar ed Pla y Pla y Pla y Pla y ⢠View one p hoto at a time, usin g the enti re co lor LCD ⢠Play back Burst, Timela pse, and gr ouped ph oto se quences ⢠Create slide shows ⢠View pho tos on th e came raâs color LCD o r a te levisio n PC PC PC PC ⢠View photos on a compute r monitor when the ca mera is con nected to a computer ⢠Share, prin t, an d down load p hotos Camera mode dial
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 1 8 Understanding the Viewfinder Indicator Ligh t The ind icator li ght appea rs to th e left of the vie wfinder. The colo r of th e light chang es depe nding on th e c amera mo de and a t differen t stage s in th e phot ogr aphy pr ocess. I f the flashi ng ligh t indic ates a camera error , a mess age al so disp lays on t he stat us or co lor LCD. Light colo r Light colo r Light colo r Light co lo r Meaning Mea ning Mea ning Mea ning Red (flashing) ⢠Memory card p roblem ⢠No memory card ⢠Full memory card ⢠Interna l memo ry full (only for b urst ph otos) ⢠Batte ries l ow ⢠Camera er ror Red (soli d) ⢠Flash char ging Orange (flashing) ⢠Camer a initia lizing from Sl eep mod e Orange (solid) ⢠Auto Foc us faile d or p hoto un derexposu re wi ll occur (f lash off a nd insuffi cient li ght) ⢠Slow shut ter (not enough l ight or tripod needed) Green (flas hing) ⢠Sending a p hoto vi a JetSend Viewfi nd er indicator li ght
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 19 Using the Color L CD The col or L CD is lo cated on the ba ck of the HP Ph otoSma rt C5 00 Digital Camera. Use th e color L CD t o frame or view yo ur ph otos and to access the ca mera âs me nus. Y ou can adjust the br ightness of th e color L CD to suit light ing cond itions. For example, if you are us ing the came ra outsid e in bri ght sun l ight , you can make the color LCD brighter ( see below). The disp lay on the color L CD va ries w ith each camera m ode. The follow ing ta ble in dicates whethe r the color L CD i s on or of f in each mode, an d the def au lt displ ay. Green (soli d) ⢠Camera i s read y to take a photo (Auto E xposu re and Au to Focus have b een com pleted) ⢠Cont inuous A uto E x posure acti va ted Light colo r Light colo r Light colo r Light co lo r Meaning Mea ning Mea ning Mea ning Colo r LCD
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 20 Tip: The col or L CD uses a lot of battery power. If yo u ar e not using an AC p ower adap ter, you may want t o limit your use of the color LCD. T o adjust t he brig ht ness of the colo r L CD: T o adjust t he brig ht ness of the colo r L CD: T o adjust t he brig ht ness of the colo r L CD: T o adjust t he brig ht ness of the colo r L CD: 1. T urn the ca mera on and tu rn the came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences menu. L CD Brig htness is highlighted . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). Mode Mode Mode Mode Statu s Status Status Status Displ ay Display Display Display Rec (R ecord ) Rec (R ecord ) Rec (R ecord ) Rec (R ecord ) Off. You can turn the col or LCD o n by pressing the color L CD on/off color L CD on/off color L CD on/off color L CD on/off but ton . No displ ay unles s you tu rn the c olor LCD on. Rev (Re vie w) Rev (Re vie w) Rev (Re vie w) Rev (Re vie w) Turns on auto m aticall y. Turns off aut o matic all y aft er 30 seco nds if you are using battery power . Displa ys thumbna ils of ph otos stor ed on the memory card. Pla y Pla y Pla y Pla y Turns on auto m aticall y. Turns off aut o matic all y aft er 30 seco nds if you are using battery power . Displa ys photos st ored o n the me mory card us ing the enti re co lor LCD scr een. PC PC PC PC Off. No display. Soft k eys Menu button 4-way arrow button
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 21 5. Use the 4- way ar row button to adju st the color L CD brightness. A high er number gives a brighter display. 6. Press the Exi t Exi t Exit Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to ac tivate and save the new setting s, an d exit the menus. Tip: The brightness of the c olor L CD affects battery life; the brighter the co lor L CD, the mor e power i t uses. Y ou may want t o lower th e brightness leve l if you use the color LCD often. Overlay Ba rs Overla y bars app ear at the top and bo ttom of t h e colo r LC D. The y provid e you wit h infor m ation about th e cam era setting s, such as the type of p hoto (St ill, Bu rst or Timelapse ). The y also i ndicate the f unctions of the so ft k eys. The num ber of overl ay bars an d the informati on they provide vari es with each cam era mo de. In Rev (Revi ew) mo de, the low er ove rlay bar is alwa y s visible . In Rec (R ecor d) mode y ou can c h oo se wh e ther or no t to see the over lay bar s. In Play m ode yo u can c hoose to see b oth over lay bars, just th e lo wer bar, or neith er of the bars. Y ou can find inform ation a bout the icons that appear o n the ov erlay ba rs th rougho ut this guide. Color L CD on/off but to n Overlay button Overlay bars
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 22 T o t urn the overlay bar s on or o ff in Rec (Re cord) mode : T o t urn the overlay bar s on or o ff in Rec (Re cord) mode : T o t urn the overlay bar s on or o ff in Rec (Re cord) mode : T o t urn the overlay bar s on or o ff in Rec (Re cord) mode : 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Pr es s the color L C D on/off color L CD on/off color L CD on/off color L CD on/off button. By def a ult both the o verlay b ars ap pear . 3. Press the Over lay Overl ay Overl ay Overl ay button to t urn the overla y bars off and o n. T o turn the over lay bars on or o ff in Play mo de: T o turn the over lay bars on or o ff in Play mo de: T o turn the over lay bars on or o ff in Play mo de: T o turn the over lay bars on or o ff in Play mo de: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Pl ay Play Pl ay Play . By def a ult only the l ower o verlay b ar appe ars. 2. Press the Ov erla y Overl ay Overl ay Overl ay button once to turn of f the overlay ba r. Press the butt on agai n to se e both th e overlay b ars. Y o u ca n contin ue p ressing the Overlay Overlay Overlay Overlay butt on to toggle between the three options. Lower ov erlay bar No over l ay ba r s Both overla y bars
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 23 Soft K eys Soft k eys are butt ons tha t chan ge funct ion depe nding on the camera mode, s tat e, and men u opti on. Ea ch soft key fun ctio n i s labeled on the l ower over lay ba r, abov e the k ey that is use d to activat e the func tion. If the overlay bars a re off, you can st ill use the functi on by pr essing a sof t k ey. For example, if the camera is in Play mod e and the o verlay bar s are turn ed off, you ca n press the ce nter so ft k ey (the zoom bu tton ) once to turn the lowe r overla y bar on, a nd then a secon d time t o zoom in on the p hoto. Using the Came ra Menus The HP Ph otoSm art C500 D igital Ca mera men us display on the c olor L CD. Y ou can u se these me nus to adjust camera settings and use camera features. The menus vary with each camera mode . Use the colo r LCD and the control s on the back of the camera to acc ess the c ame ra menus and select th e menu options . Menu option s are descr ib ed in de tail th rougho ut this g uide. For a list of op tion s, see âM enu Str ucture â on pag e 1 24 in Appe ndix B. Soft k eys 4-way arrow but ton Menu button Soft k eys Menus display on the color L CD
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 24 T o use th e c ame r a men us : T o use th e c ame r a men us : T o use th e c ame r a men us : T o use th e c ame r a men us : 1. T urn the camera on and turn the cam era mode dial to the m ode yo u want t o use. 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the right an d left sides of the 4-wa y arrow button to select a menu. 4. Use the u p and down side s of th e 4-way a rrow butto n to s croll thr ough a menuâs op tions. 5. Press th e soft k eys to se lect or edit a menu o ption, or to ex it the cam era me nus. Note: Y ou must press the Exit Exit Exit Exit button t o save th e setting s and ex it the men us. If you change the camer a mode w hile you are selecti ng the menu optio ns, the camera does not save th e new s ettings. Y ou must exit all menu s before you can turn th e color L CD off. Setting the Date and Time Before you begi n takin g photos , set t he corre ct date a nd tim e. The ca mera s tores t he date and tim e with other informa tion a bout the photo , and di splays it in Rev (Re view) mo de. Wh en you turn your c amera on, th e color L CD prompts you to se t the da te and ti me und er an y of the fo llowing conditi ons: ⢠The firs t time yo u us e your ca mera. ⢠After re moving or rep lacin g the coi n batt ery whe n you ha ve no t insta lled th e NiMH b atteries and are not u sing an AC power adapt er. ⢠After l osing power in bot h the c oin and NiMH batterie s at th e same time . Y ou ca n also use the Preferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences camera me nu in Re c (Rec ord) mode to cha nge the d a te and time as nee ded.
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 25 T o se t the date and time when prompted by the co lor L CD: T o se t the date and time when prompted by the co lor L CD: T o se t the date and time when prompted by the co lor L CD: T o se t the date and time when prompted by the co lor L CD: 1. Sele ct a format f or the da te an d time: ⢠Press the Fo r m a t Fo r m a t Fo r m a t Fo r m a t butto n (left so ft k ey). ⢠Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to the f ormat you w ant. ⢠Press the Select Select Select Select button (left so ft k ey). Note: A camer a âs de faul t date a nd ti me for mats mat ch the camera âs l anguage . F or example, c amer as with th e langu ag e s et to English ha ve a de f a ult da te form a t of MM /D D/YY and a de f a ult ti me fo rm at o f 12 hours. Came ras with t h e lan guage set to Fr ench h ave a de faul t date for mat of DD/MM/Y Y and a def ault tim e format of 24 hours. 4-way arrow button Menu bu tton Soft k eys
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 26 2. Set th e date an d time: ⢠Use the u p and down s ides of th e 4-way a rrow bu tton to s elect a value f or th e hi ghli ghte d fi el d. ⢠Use the r ight si de of the 4-way arro w butt on to sav e the va lue in the current fi eld and to m ove to anot her fiel d. The field s are month , day, year, hour, mi nute, and in 12 hour format , AM or PM. 3. Wh en you ha v e finis hed, pr ess t he Exit Exit Exit Exit button ( right soft k ey). T o chan ge the date and time us ing the came ra menu: T o chan ge the date and time us ing the came ra menu: T o chan ge the date and time us ing the came ra menu: T o chan ge the date and time us ing the came ra menu: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Pr eferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences menu, then scroll down to Date & Ti me Date & Ti me Date & Ti me Date & Ti me . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. If you want to cha nge the da te and t ime form ats fro m the one s displa yed on th e col or LCD: ⢠Press the Fo r m a t Fo r m a t Fo r m a t Fo r m a t butto n (left so ft k ey). ⢠Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to the f ormat you w ant. ⢠Press the Select Select Select Select button (left so ft k ey).
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 27 6. Set th e date an d time: ⢠Use the u p and down s ides of th e 4-way a rrow bu tton to s elect a value f or th e hi ghli ghte d fi el d. ⢠Use the r ight si de of the 4-way arro w butt on to sav e the va lue in the curren t field and to move to an other fi eld. The f ields are m onth, day, year, hour, mi nute, and in 12 hour format , AM or PM. 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the men us. Changing the Language The HP Ph otoSm art C500 D igital Camera allow s you to c hange t he lan guage u sed for th e camer a menu s, overl ay bars, a nd def ault da te and ti me form ats. T o chan ge the langu age: T o chan ge the langu age: T o chan ge the langu age: T o chan ge the langu age: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Pr eferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences menu. 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to the l anguage you want t o use.
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 2 8 6. Press the Selec t Select Select Select button (left so ft k ey). A check mark app ears next to the s electe d langu age and the langu age immed iately ch anges. 7. When you have finish ed, press th e righ t soft k ey, which wil l be labeled Exit Exit Exit Exit in the l anguage selecte d . Changing the Cameraâs Name The cameraâ s defa ult name is HP C500. T he name ap pears in t he photo in formation only if yo u use the memory card i n anoth er cam era. F or example, if you and a fr iend both h ave HP P hotoSm art C5 00 Digit a l Cameras, yo u can share you r photos b y exch anging mem ory card s. Any ph otos th at you hav e tak en will displ ay on you r friendâ s camer a with your ca mera âs name in the photo i nform ation. T o chan ge the cameraâs name: T o chan ge the cameraâs name: T o chan ge the cameraâs name: T o chan ge the cameraâs name: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Pr eferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences men u, the n scro ll do w n to Camera Name Camera Name Camera Name Camera Name . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). ⢠Use the left soft k ey to toggle between capital l etters, l ower case lett ers, num ber s, and sp ecia l cha racte rs: A-capi tal le tters, a-lo wer case le t ters , 1- numbers , %-spe cial cha racte rs. ⢠Use the cent er soft k ey to add a space between letter s and cha racte rs.
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 29 ⢠Use the u p and down s ides of th e 4-way a rrow bu tton to s elect a let ter, numb er, o r special chara cter for t he camera nam e. ⢠Use the r ight si de of the 4-way arro w butt on to s ave the le tter, number, or speci al chara cter. 5. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus. Using an A C Power Adapter (recommended) T o preserve batt ery life, use a n A C power adapter that HP has ap proved f or use with the HP PhotoS mart C5 00 Digital Came ra. Use the adapter as your power sour ce when you co nnect you r ca mera to a com puter or a t elevisi on, o r when usi ng the c olor L CD for an exte nded pe riod of time. Note: An AC power ad apter p ro vides power to the c amera. It does n ot rec harge th e batt erie s. AC power adapter s are avail able fr o m www.hpsho pping.com www.hpsho pping.com www.hpsh opping.co m www.hpsho pping.com . F or A C power adapt er speci fications , refer to HPâs PhotoS mart W eb site at www.photosmart .com www.photosm art.com www.photosm art.com www.photosm art.com . T o connect an AC power adapter: T o connect an AC power adapter: T o connect an AC power adapter: T o connect an AC power adapter: 1. Plug t he adap ter i nto a p ower so urce (su ch as a wa ll out let or po wer stri p). 2. Connect t he round end of the ad apter cable t o the ca mera. Note: If you wa nt to us e battery p ower, remov e the A C adapter fro m the pow er source a nd the c amera. If the A C adapter is connecte d to the camera , even if it i s not con nected to a po wer so urce, the ca mera wi ll not use battery powe r. AC p ow e r ada pter conn ecti on
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 3 0 Chapter 3 - T aking Photos This ch apter describ es the p rocess of taking photos w ith your H P PhotoS mart C 500 Dig ital Came ra, in cludi ng how to tak e Still, B urst, and Timelaps e photo s, an d deta iled des cripti ons of adjust ing the camera setti ngs. If you want a quick ov erview, see the Basics guide that you received with your camera. There are thr ee setti ngs you c an use to tak e photos: Still , Bur st, a nd Time lapse. Tip: The Burst setting is id eal for t a king action p hotos. U se the T imelaps e setting for ob serving a s u bject ov er a longer pe riod of time. Overview Ta k i n g a P h o t o The HP Ph otoSm art C500 D igital Ca mera h as a 2-s tep Shutter Shutter S hutter Shutter but ton. When you pres s the Shut ter Shutter Shutter Shutter but ton 1 /2 way down, t he cam era adj usts the fo cus and exposur e of the photo. After th ese se ttings a re adju sted, a gr een ligh t appe ars to the left of the v iewfind er, in dicati ng that you can press th e Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter button all the way d own to ta k e the photo . Y ou may w ant to p ractic e to get used to t he timin g, be fore ta king im portan t photos. Still Still Still Still Use th is setti ng for taking a single color or bla ck and white p hoto. Burst Burst Burst Burst Use thi s setting for taking up to 4 photos i n rapid s u ccession . Timelapse Timelapse Timelapse Timelapse Use th is setti ng for taking s evera l phot os, with a set a mount of time (1 min ute to 24 hour s) betwee n photo s.
Overview HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 31 T o take a photo: T o take a photo: T o take a photo: T o take a photo: 1. Remo ve the l ens cove r. 2. T urn the camera on and turn the c amera mode di al to Rec Rec Rec Rec . The came ra is autom aticall y ready t o tak e a Still p hoto. 3. Frame your subject in the viewfinde r. 4. Press and ho ld the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter b utton 1/2 way down to all ow the camera to adj ust th e focu s an d expos ure. 5. When you see t he gre en light t o the left o f the vi ewfinder, pres s the Shutt er Shutter Shutter Shutter butt on all the way d own to ta k e the photo. W ait for the bee p s, indicatin g your ph oto ha s been t ak en, then rele ase the Shutt er Shutter Shutter Shutter button. Tip: When you are ta king a p hoto, be especially carefu l to k eep your fin gers away from the lens, fl ash, and sens ors on the f ront of the ca mera. The foll owing illust rati ons gi ve you exampl es of how to hold t he came ra. Camera mode dial On/ of f butt on Shutter button
Overview HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 32 Checking the Camera Sta tus Use the s tatus L CD and the col or L CD to chec k the sta tus of t he cam era. Ba sic cam era in formati on such a s ba ttery level, numb er of ph otos re mainin g, photo quali ty, flas h sta tus, a nd me mory car d stat us disp lay on t he stat us L CD. The col or L CD shows inform ation su ch as the num ber of p hotos st ored on the me mory car d, the c urrent compress ion level, re solution sett ing, an d batter y status. Using the Status L CD Use the sta tus L CD on the top of the camera to check th e status of the memory card, the bat tery level , and the number of ph ot os av a ilab l e on the m em ory ca rd . T h e sta tus L CD als o dis pla ys th e flash an d ph ot o qu al i ty sett in gs, and any c amera erro r message s. T o vie w the camera status on the statu s L CD : T o vie w the camera status on the statu s L CD : T o vie w the camera status on the statu s L CD : T o vie w the camera status on the statu s L CD : ⢠Press the on/off on/off on/off on/off button to turn th e cam era on. Indiv idual i cons are disc ussed throug hout this gui de or you can see a l ist of a ll t he icon s in Ap pendix B âIco nsâ on page 129. Photo qu a lity Battery level Phot os remaining Memory card status Flas h
Overview HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 33 Using the Color L CD Use the c olor L CD on the back of the camera t o check current camera setting s and status, i ncluding the numbe r of photos st ored on the me mory car d, and the comp ressi on and r esolu tion sett in gs. T o vie w the camera status on the color LCD: T o vie w the camera status on the color LCD: T o vie w the camera status on the color LCD: T o vie w the camera status on the color LCD: 1. T urn th e camer a on and t urn t he camer a mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the co lor LCD on/o ff colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off button to turn the c olor LC D o n . 3. Press the Status Status Status Status button (right s oft k ey). The col or L CD displa ys the curr ent camera setting s and sta tus. T o chan ge the camera setti ngs, us e the camer a menu s. See t he foll owing sec tions of this chapter for de tails. One or m ore ic ons may al so appe ar on th e Statu s screen, depen ding on t he camera stat us. Color L CD Color L CD on/o ff button Soft k eys
Overview HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 3 4 4. When you have finished viewing the camera sta tus, press the Exit Exit Exit Exit butto n (rig ht so ft k ey). Color L CD St atus Color L CD St atus Color L CD St atus Color L CD St atus Images tak en Images tak en Images tak en Images tak en The nu mber of photos stored on the memory card. Compress ion Compress ion Compression Compress ion The current comp ression level. Resolu tion Resolu tion Resolu tion Resolu tion The cu rrent r esoluti on setti ng. Whit e Bal Whit e Bal Whit e Bal Whit e Bal The curre nt whit e balance se tting. Digit a Digit a Digita Digit a The came ra fir mware vers ion number. Memory card inserted Battery status
Takin g Still , Burst and Ti melap se Photo s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 35 T a king Still, Burst and Timelapse Photos T aking Still Photos Use the Still Still Still Still setting to tak e one photo ea ch time yo u pr ess the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter b utton. T o take a Still photo: T o take a Still photo: T o take a Still photo: T o take a Still photo: 1. Remo ve the l ens cove r. 2. T urn the camera on and turn the c amera mode di al to Rec Rec Rec Rec . The stat us L CD displ ays the a pproxi mate numb er of ph otos available on the memory card. The camera i s not ready until this numb er ap pears. 3. Adjust your camera s ettings a s needed. Se e âAdjustin g the Camera S ettin gsâ on page 42 f or det a i ls. 4. Press the color L CD on/off color L CD on/off color L CD on/off color L CD on/off button to t urn the c olor L CD o n, then press t he left soft k ey until th e Still Still Still Still ico n appea rs on th e low e r over lay bar . Tip: T o conserv e battery power, t urn th e color L CD off a fter you choose t h e photo type. 5. Frame your subject in the viewfinde r, then press an d hold the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter bu tton 1/2 way down to allo w the ca mera to adjust the focus a nd exposure. If you see an o range light t o the left o f the vi ewfinder, you ma y need to chan ge the fl ash sett ing to adjus t for the lighti ng condi tions. Stat u s L CD Shutter but ton On/ of f bu tton Camera mode dial Number of photos available Still icon
Takin g Still , Burst and Ti melap se Photo s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 36 6. When you see the green light to the left of the viewfinder, press the Shutt er Shutter Shutter Shutter button al l th e way dow n to tak e the photo . Wait for the b eeps , indic ating t he pho to has been tak en, b efore r eleas ing the Shutter Shutte r Shutter Shutte r butto n. 7. If Ins tant Review is on, your photo ap pears briefly on the colo r L CD . If you are happy with the pho to, press th e Save Save Save Save bu tton (right sof t k ey) to sav e it on the memory c ard. If not, press the Delete Delete Delete Delete button (c enter soft k ey) to disca rd the ph oto an d try agai n. If you do not press ei ther b utton, the came ra au tomati cally sav es th e photo . T aking Burst Photos Use the B urst se tting to tak e photos in rapid success i on whi le holdi ng the Shutte r Shutter Shutter Shutter button down. Y ou ca n tak e up to four ph otos at a rate of one to three fra mes per second. The Burst setting i s recom mended f or takin g action photo s. The def ault Bur st rate is tw o frames per se cond. If you want to ch ange the Burst r ate, see bel ow. Note tha t you cannot use the f l ash for B urst p hotos; t he flash button i s inact ive. Note: Burst p hotos ta k e longer to pro cess tha n Stil l photos b ecaus e the camera ta k es up to three fr ames per secon d rather than a sin gle phot o. T o tak e Burst photos: T o tak e Burst photos: T o tak e Burst photos: T o tak e Burst photos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . The stat us L CD displ ays the a pproxi mate numb er of ph otos available on the memory card. The camera is not ready until this numb er ap pears. 2. Adjust your camera setting s as neede d. See âAdjust ing the Camera S ettin gsâ on page 42 f or det a i ls. 3. Press the col or LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off button to turn the c olor L CD on . Status L CD Shutter but ton On/off butt on Camera m ode dia l Number of phot os avai labl e
Takin g Still , Burst and Ti melap se Photo s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 37 4. Press th e left so ft k ey until th e Bu rst Burst Burst Burst icon appea rs on th e lower o verlay b ar. Tip: T o conserv e battery power, t urn th e color L CD off a fter you choose t h e photo type. If there is not en ough space on t he memory ca rd for the n umber of photos spec ified, the red light to t he lef t of th e viewf inder flashes and th e upp er overla y bar d isplays âNot en ough me mory.â T o solve this proble m, inse rt a new me mory car d, or t ry a lowe r photo quali ty s ettin g. 5. Frame your subject in the viewfinde r, then press an d hold the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter bu tton 1/2 way down to allo w the ca mera to adjust the focus a nd exposure. If you see an o range light t o the left o f the vi ewfinder, ther e may not be enough l ight on your s ubjec t. You c an stil l tak e the ph oto. 6. When you see a g reen light t o the left of the viewfi nder, press the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter butt on all t he way down and hold i t for the a mount of time you wan t to ta ke phot os, or unti l th e came ra bee ps. Tip: If you are taki ng an action se quence, you can move th e came ra to follow yo ur sub ject as you hol d the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter b utton d own. 7. If Instant Rev iew is o n, your firs t photo appears briefly on the c olor L CD. If you are ha ppy with t he photo , press the Sa ve Save Save Save button (right soft k ey) to save the series of ph o tos on the memor y card. If no t, p ress the Dele te Delete Delete Delete button (center s oft k ey) to disca rd the phot os and try ag ain. Pr essing Dele te Delete Delete Delete discar ds the entire se ries of phot os, not ju st the fi rst pho to. If you do not pres s either button, t he cam era autom atical ly save s the ph oto. Burst ic on
Takin g Still , Burst and Ti melap se Photo s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 38 T o change the Burst rate: T o change the Burst rate: T o change the Burst rate: T o change the Burst rate: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. The colo r L C D disp lays the Media Se ttin gs Media Settings Media Settings Media Settings menu . 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to Burs t Burs t Burs t Burs t . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t bu tton ( l e ft so ft key), a nd then sc roll down t o Burst Rate Burst Rate Burst Rate Burst Rate . 5. Use the 4- way ar row button to cho ose the d esired set ting, fro m 1 to 3 frames per s econd . 6. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to sav e your set tings and ex it the men us. T aking Timelapse Photos Use th e Time lapse s ettin g to tak e a series of ph otos at preset time int erval s. Y ou can sp ecify th e numb er of ph otos you wan t the ca mera t o tak e, as well as the amoun t of tim e betw een pho tos. It is re commen ded tha t you att ach the camera to a tri pod, or place it on a fir m surfac e at an ap prop riate distan ce and he i ght fr om the sub ject , to keep the camera ste ady. It is reco mmend ed tha t you u se a n AC power adap ter for lon g Timel apse phot o seq uences . Se e âUsin g an AC Po wer Adapter (recommended) â on page 2 9 for more i nformation. Tip: By def a ult the camera tak es 10 pho tos with 1 mi nute in tervals betwee n phot os. If you want to cha nge the Timelapse setti n gs, see be lo w.
Takin g Still , Burst and Ti melap se Photo s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 3 9 T o tak e Timelapse photos: T o tak e Timelapse photos: T o tak e Timelapse photos: T o tak e Timelapse photos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . The stat us L CD displ ays the a pproxi mate numb er of ph otos available on the memory card. The camera is not rea dy until this numb er ap pears. 2. Adjust your camera setting s as neede d. See âAdjust ing the Camera S ettin gsâ on page 42 f or det a i ls. 3. Pr ess th e color L CD on/off color L CD on/off color LCD on/off color L CD on/off but ton to tu rn th e co lo r L CD on. 4. Press th e left so ft k ey until th e Timelapse Timelapse Timelapse Timelapse ico n appe ars on the lo wer overl ay bar. Tip: T o conserve bat ter y pow er, tur n the color L CD off after you c ho ose the photo type . If there is not en ough space on t he memory ca rd for the n umber of photos spec ified, the red ligh t to the left of th e view finder flashes a nd the upper overla y bar displa ys âNot enou gh mem ory.â T o solve this pr oblem, inse rt a new m emory c ard, try a lower p hoto qua lity setti ng or decrease the numb er of photos specifie d in th e Timelapse se ttings. 5. Frame your subject in the viewfinde r, then press an d hold the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter bu tton 1/2 way down to allo w the ca mera to adjust the focus a nd exposure. If you see an o range light t o the left o f the vi ewfinder, ther e may not be enough l ight on your s ubjec t. You c an stil l tak e the ph oto. Status L CD Shut ter bu t ton On/off button Camera mo de dial Number of phot os a vai labl e Timelapse icon
Takin g Still , Burst and Ti melap se Photo s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 40 6. When you see a green li ght to t he left of the view finder , press the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter butt on all the way d own to take the first p hoto. Wait for the bee ps, ind icatin g the photo ha s bee n taken, before releas ing the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter b utton. The cam era au tomati cally tak es the numbe r of p hotos a t the ti me in terval specifi ed in the Tim elapse settin gs. Tip: If you wa nt to s top tak ing photos befo re the ca mera r eaches the numbe r of phot os specified in the Time la p se se ttin gs, press the Stop Stop Stop Stop button (right sof t key). 7. If Instan t Revi ew is on and you ar e using an AC power adapte r, your fi rst pho to appe ars on th e color LCD; an indicat or on t he uppe r overlay bar show s the nu mber o f photo s that ha ve b een tak en and a timer c ounts do wn the ti me until the next photo i s tak en. If Inst an t Revi ew is on and yo u ar e using batte ries, your fir st ph ot o appear s brie fly on the c ol or LCD. The color L CD turns it self of f after 30 seconds. Once th e seri es of ph otos ha s been ta k en and the fi rst pho to app ears o n the co lor L CD, press th e Sav e Save Save Save button (right sof t k ey) to save the series of photos on the memory c ard, or pre ss the Delete Delete Delete Delete button (c enter soft k ey) to discard t he photo s and try again. Pre ssing Dele te Delete Delete Delete disc ar ds th e enti re s er ies of phot os , no t j ust t he fi rst on e. If you do n ot pr ess eith er button, the camera a utoma ticall y saves t h e pho tos. T o change the Timelaps e se ttings: T o change the Timelaps e se ttings: T o change the Timelaps e se ttings: T o change the Timelaps e se ttings: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. The colo r L C D disp lays the Media Se ttin gs Media Settings Media Settings Media Settings menu. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to scroll down to Timela pse Timelapse Timela pse Timelapse . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key).
Takin g Still , Burst and Ti melap se Photo s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 41 5. Use the 4- way ar row button to se lect a s etting to change. 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to selec t the de sired settin g. 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to sav e your set tings and ex it the men us. Setti ng Setti ng Setti ng Setting Description Description Description Descript ion Default Default Default Default Inte rval Inte rval Inte rval Inte rval This i s the a mount of t ime you w ant th e cam era to w a it before taking the next p hoto. Select f rom 1 minute to 24 ho urs. 1 min # Imag es # Imag es # Imag es # Imag es This is the number of photos you want th e ca mera to take. Sele ct fro m 2 to 1 000 p hotos. 10
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 42 Adjusting the Camera Settings T aki ng Blac k an d Whit e Phot os Y ou can tak e either co lor or black a nd whit e photo s using the Sti ll, Burs t, or Ti melap se sett ings. Th e def ault is color . This sett ing rema in s until yo u change it, e ven if you turn the ca mera of f. T o change to color or black and white photos: T o change to color or black and white photos: T o change to color or black and white photos: T o change to color or black and white photos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Select the p hoto typ e. 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left soft k ey), then scrol l down t o Color Color Color Color . 5. Use the 4- way arrow button to choose B&W B&W B&W B&W (blac k and whit e) or Fu ll Ful l Ful l Ful l color . 6. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 4 3 Changing the Flash Setting T o chan ge the flash setting: T o chan ge the flash setting: T o change the flash setti ng: T o chan ge the flash setting: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Pr ess the Flash Flash Flash Flash button r ep eat edly u n til th e f la sh s ett in g you wa nt displays on the s tatus L CD. The flash setti ng is effecti ve for St ill and Time lapse ph otos, an d remain s until you chang e it, even i f you turn the came ra off . Note: Y ou cannot u se the fl ash for Burst photos ; the flash but ton is i nactiv e. The fla sh setti ngs are i ndicat ed by ico ns on th e statu s L CD: Note: The fla sh needs to recha rge betw een pho tos. When th e red lig ht next to the v iewfind er is off, you can take another fl ash photo. Auto The camera determi nes the n eed for a flash based on lightin g conditio ns. This is the defa ult set ting. On The flash will be used, rega rdless of the lighting c ondition s. Off T he flash will not be used, regardless of the lighting co nditions . Auto wi th red-e ye reduct ion The flash will be used if needed . Red -eye red ucti on minimiz es the occurr ence of red-ey e in phot os of pe op le or ani mals by flashin g twice . Flash button
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 44 Y ou can also change the f lash se ttings u sing th e camer a menu s. T o se lect a flash setting using t he cam era menu s: T o se lect a flash setting using t he cam era menu s: T o se lect a flash setting using t he cam era menu s: T o se lect a flash setting using t he cam era menu s: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way arrow but ton to scroll to th e Preferences Preferen ces Preferen ces Preferen ces menu, then scro ll down to Capture Capture Capture Capture . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Scroll to Flash Flash Flash Flash . 6. Use the 4-w ay arrow b u tton to s el ect a flash setting. See the table above for in for mation ab out eac h of t he fla sh setting s. Note: Y ou cannot u se the fl ash for Burst ph otos . If you choose a flash sett ing from the me nu but you are taking Burst photos, the set ting w ill not be effect ive until you tak e your next Sti ll or T imelaps e photo. 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus. Tip: T o co nserve batte ry powe r, turn the colo r L CD off af t er you ch o ose th e sett ing.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 45 Adjusting the Photo Quality The ph oto quali ty sett ing determ ines th e phot oâs resol ution a nd com pressio n. Bec ause of t his, i t also affe cts how many ph otos can be stor ed on t he memory card. Th e phot o quality s ettin g remai ns the sa me for e ach pho to of t he same t ype (St ill, B urst, a nd Timel aps e) unti l you ch ange it, even if you tu rn the camera off a nd on aga in. When s electing the ph oto quali ty, k eep in mind: ⢠How you plan t o use the p hoto (o n scre en, printe d, enlarged, etc. ). ⢠Higher p hoto qu ality re quires m ore s pace on the me mory car d; lo wer phot o qual ity req uires l ess spac e. ⢠Becaus e photo quality a ffects the numb er of photos that c an be st ored on the me mory car d, the n umber of availa ble photos (di splayed on the statu s L CD) chan ges as you cha nge the phot o quality. Th e number of photos is a c onservat ive e stimat e, so yo u migh t find t h at yo u can tak e more phot os than it ind icates. ⢠Y ou can use different phot o qualit y settin gs for different photos on the same memo ry car d. ⢠Y ou can cho ose differ ent photo qu ality set tings for Stil l, Bu rst an d Timela pse ph otos. ⢠The came ra pr ocesse s photo s with F ine or Su per-fi ne diamon d photo quality f aster than th ose with lower p hoto qualit y. If you want to tak e several p hotos, o ne aft er the ot her, in a short p eriod of t ime, u se the Fi ne or Super- fine p hoto qual ity se tting.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 46 T o adj ust the pho to quality: T o adj ust the pho to quality: T o adjust the photo quality: T o adj ust the pho to quality: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Photo Quality Photo Quality Photo Quality Photo Quality button repea tedly unt il the des i red ph oto quali ty sett ing displ ays on th e stat us L CD. Photo quality ico n Photo quality button
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 47 Each of t he pho to qual ity setti ngs co rrespond s to a co mbination of resolut ion and co mpression setti ngs. Th e diamond icons on the status L CD indica te phot o qual ity as follows : Pho to qu ali ty Pho to qu ali ty Pho to qu ali ty Photo quality Description Description Description Description Resolution Resolu tion Resolu tion Resolu tion Compre ssion Compre ssio n Compre ssio n Compre ssio n E-mail Is the most memory-e ffi cient. Use this sett ing for p hotos th at you plan to send via e -mail, p lace on the In ternet , use for screen save rs or wall pa per, or pr in t up to 3x5 inch pr ints. Low (640x480 pixels) High Basic P roduce s qual ity photo s and u ses le ss memo ry than Fine mode. Use t hi s s etti ng for pho tos that you pl an to s tore on your disk or in a da tabase, or print up to 4x6 inch print s. Medium (1152x864 p ixels) Medium Fine Produc es high- quali ty photos a nd requires less memory than Super-fine mode. U se this setti ng for phot os that you plan to print up to 5x7 inch prin t s. This i s the defa ult se tting. High (1600x1200 pixels) Medium Super- fine Produc es the highest-qualit y photo s and uses the most memory. Use this setting for tak ing photo s you plan to enla rge and prin t . High (1600x1200 pixels) Low
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 48 Y ou can also a djust the p hoto qual ity by adj usting the individu al resolut ion and com pressio n settings for each of th e three t ype s of p hotos: Still, Burst and T imela pse. T o adjust t he photo qual ity using th e men us: T o adjust t he photo qual ity using th e men us: T o adjust t he photo qual ity using th e men us: T o adjust t he photo qual ity using th e men us: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Select the p hoto typ e. 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Use the 4- way ar row button to se lect a r esolution or compression setting to change. Setti ng Setti ng Setti ng Setting Description Description Description Descriptio n Default Default De fault Default Resolu tion Resolu tion Resolu tion Resolu tion This is t he number of pixels in each photo. More pixels r esults in higher photo q ualit y. Choo se from H igh, M edium, or Low. Select a higher resoluti on fo r photos th at you want to enlarg e. Selec t a low er reso lution for photos that yo u want t o email (so th at the p hoto fi le size is small). High Compress ion Compress ion Compression Compress ion This is the a mount each p hoto is compres sed. T he com press ion lev el is a t rade-off between phot o qualit y and storage sp ace: t he lowe r the compres sion level, t he highe r the ph oto qua lity b ut the la rger the phot o file si ze. Cho ose fro m High , Mediu m, or Lo w. Sele ct a lower compres sion level for better q ualit y photos . Sel ect a h igher compression level to save space on the memory card. Medium
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 49 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to selec t the de sired settin g. As you decide which s ettin gs to use, reme mber th at th ere is a t rade- off be tween r esoluti on and c ompres sion. Higher res o lution photos p rovide better quality, but if you use hi gh res olutio n and high c ompres sion, so me of the ph otoâs detai l will be los t. Some c ombinat ions of s ettin gs corr espond t o the ca meraâs stand ard setti ngs i ndicate d by the photo q uality diamond s on the status L CD. If you cho ose to use com binatio ns of s ettings th at do n ot cor respo nd to t he camer aâs sta ndard ph oto q ualit y settings , you wil l see no pho to qual ity diam onds on the s tatus L CD. T his ju st means that you a re usi ng a custom phot o qualit y settin g. Tip: If you arenât su re which settings to select, press t he Default Default Default Default button (left soft k ey). 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to sav e your set tings and ex it the men us.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 50 Using the Zoom The HP Ph otoSm art C500 Di gital Came ra ha s opt ical z oom and digi tal z oom. Op tical zoom uses th e len s to foc us i n on a di stant ob ject. Use it t o increa se the s ize of a subje ct that is dist ant fr om you. D igital zoom s elects pixels from the ce nter of the phot o and enlarges the image furthe r. Use digital zo om once you have reached the maxim um opti cal zoo m, to i ncrea se th e s ize o f your s u bject e ven fu rther . If you use the digita l zoom, yo ur photos wil l ha ve lower resol u t ion than th ey usually would for a partic ular photo quali ty setti ng. It is recommen ded th at you pri nt thes e photos in smalle r size s. Zoom type Zoom type Zoom type Zoom ty pe When to use it When to u se it When to u se it When to u se it Example Example Example Example Optical (3x) Optical (3x) Optical (3x) Optical (3x) Use this sett in g wh en you r sub je ct i s dista nt from you a nd you wa nt to increas e or decrease its s ize in th e photo . You are ta king a photo of a sce ne and you want to zoom in on a tree. Digit al (2x ) Digit al (2x ) Digit al (2x ) Digit al (2x ) Use this se tt in g when you r su bje ct i s di sta nt from you a nd you wa nt to increas e its size more tha n you ca n with th e optic al zoom. You are ta king a photo of a sce ne and you want to i nc rea se th e si ze of a b ird in the tree. Pho to qu ali ty Pho to qu ali ty Pho to qu ali ty Photo qual ity Standard res olution Stan dar d re solut ion Stan dar d re solut ion Standar d re solu ti on Resolu ti on with digital zoom Resolu tion with digital z oom Resolu tion with digital z oom Resolu tion with digital z oom 640x480 pi xels 640x480 pi xels 1152x864 pixe ls 800x600 pixels 1600x1200 pixels 800x600 pixels 1600x1200 pixels 800x600 pixels
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 51 To u s e o p t i c a l z o o m : To u s e o p t i c a l z o o m : To u s e o p t i c a l z o o m : To u s e o p t i c a l z o o m : 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. As you frame your subject in the v iewfinde r, move the Zoom Zoom Zoom Zoom contr ol to the right to zoom in o n your subject , or to th e left to zoom out. 3. T ak e your photo. T o us e digital zoom: T o us e digital zoom: T o us e digital zoom: T o us e digital zoom: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the co lor LCD on/o ff colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off button to turn the c olor L CD on . Note: The color L CD must be on for d igital zoom. 3. If you do not see the o verlay bars o n the co lor L CD, press the Ov erl ay Overl ay Overl ay Overl ay button to tur n the ov erlay ba rs on . 4. Zoom al l the w ay in on your subject us ing the Zoom Zoom Zoom Zoom c ontrol. Relea se th e Zoom Zoom Zoom Zoom control and then pr ess it to th e right again. The digi tal zo om icon displays in the top overl ay bar . 5. Frame your subject on t he colo r L CD rather than th rough the viewf inder. Us e the Zoom Zoom Zoom Zoom control t o make furth er adju stments. 6. T ake you r photo . 7. Press the co lor LCD on/o ff colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off button to turn th e color L CD and digita l zoom off. Zoom control Digita l zo om icon
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 52 Using Macro Mode Use macr o mode to ta k e close-u p photos o f small objects . For exa mple, use macro m ode to tak e a close-up ph oto of a flower . T o tur n on macr o mod e: T o tur n on macr o mod e: T o tur n on macr o mod e: T o tur n on macr o mod e: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the co lor LCD on/o ff colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off button to turn the c olor L CD on . Note: The color L CD must be on for macro mode. 3. If you do not see the o verlay bars o n the co lor L CD, press the Ov erl ay Overl ay Overl ay Overl ay button to tur n the ov erlay ba rs on . 4. Press th e center soft k ey until the macro mode ic on app ears in color a t the cen ter of the lowe r overl ay bar. Note: The cent er soft k ey toggles between the sel f-timer and ma cro mod e so tha t you can tak e photos usin g just on e of th e modes , or both at th e same t ime. Th e icons appea r in color if they a re on. K eep p ressing the butto n until you hav e selec ted the combi nation of self- timer a nd mac ro mode that you want; o ne on, both on, or both off. 5. View your subject through the viewfinder, an d then fr ame you r photo on the col or L CD. 6. T ake you r photo . 7. Press the cen ter sof t k ey twice to t urn macr o mode off. The macro mode icon ap pears i n bla ck an d white , indica ting t hat mac ro mode is o ff. Macro mode icon Self-timer icon
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 53 Using the Self-Timer Use the sel f-timer to tak e a ph oto of your self or a pos ed group p hoto. T en sec onds (:10) i s the def ault amou nt of time the c ame ra wait s befor e takin g the phot o. Y ou can cha ng e this delay ti me to 3, 5, 10, 20, or 30 se co nds. Note: The self-ti mer is only avail able for Still phot os. T o use th e se lf-t im e r: T o use th e se lf-t im e r: T o use th e se lf-t im e r: T o use th e se lf-t im e r: 1. Attac h the cam era to a tripo d, or place it o n a firm surf ace at an appr opriat e distan ce an d heigh t from th e sub ject. 2. T urn the camera on and turn the c amera mode di al to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 3. Press the col or LCD colo r LCD colo r LCD colo r LCD on/o ff on/of f on /off on/of f button to turn the c olor LCD on. 4. Select the Still Still Still Still opt ion : ⢠Press the lef t soft k ey repeatedly until t he Still Stil l Stil l Stil l icon displa ys on the lower ov erlay bar. T ripo d moun t Still icon
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 54 5. Press the ce nte r so ft k ey until you see :1 0 :10 :10 :10 (or the number of se conds you have s et) app ear on th e upp er ove rlay bar, and the self- timer icon a ppear in co lor on th e lo wer overl ay bar. Note: The center soft k ey toggles between the s elf- timer and macro mo des so that you c an tak e photos u sing ju st one of the modes, or b oth at the same time. The icons appear in colo r if they are on. K eep pressi ng the button un ti l you hav e sele cted th e co mbina tion of self-timer an d macro mode tha t you wan t; on e on, bo th on, o r both off. 6. Frame your s ubject in the view finder, the n press and hold th e Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter button 1 /2 way d own to a llow th e camera to adju st the fo cus an d exposure. 7. When you see a green light to the left of the vi ewfinder , press t he Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter but ton all the way down, th en relea se it. The r ed self -timer indica tor ligh t on t he front of the c amera starts blinking. The ligh t bl inks faster for the final 3 second s, then stops blin king ju st be fore the c ame ra tak es the ph oto. Self-timer activated Self-tim er icon Macro mode ic on Self-ti m e r indica tor light
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 55 T o chan ge the self- timer delay : T o chan ge the self- timer delay : T o chan ge the self- timer delay : T o chan ge the self- timer delay : 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the co lor LCD on/o ff colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off button to turn the c olor L CD on . 3. Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button. 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to the Prefe rences Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences menu , then scroll down to Capture. Capture. Capture. Capture. 5. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 6. Sc rol l to Se lf-Time r. Self- Timer. Self-Timer . Self- Timer. 7. Use the 4-way ar row button to de creas e or in crease t he num ber of s econds the ca mera wa its befo re tak ing the photo . Y ou can s elect 3, 5, 1 0, 2 0, or 30 seco nds. 8. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 56 Setting the Exposure The HP Ph otoSm art C500 D igital Camera a utomati cally a djusts the amou nt of li ght in your photo for different ligh ti ng con diti on s. It inc ludes two auto mati c method s (Mat rix an d S pot) w hich cal culat e the expo sure s ettin g differen tly. T o ma k e the final p hoto l ighter o r dark er than the autom atic expos ure wo uld pr oduce, you can also manually adjus t the exposure. E xposure can be adjusted as much as /-1.5 EVs (Exposure V alues) in 0.3 EV increments. T o chan ge the ex posure setti ng: T o chan ge the ex posure setti ng: T o chan ge the ex posure setti ng: T o chan ge the ex posure setti ng: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Photo A s sis t Phot o Assist Phot o Assist Phot o Assist menu. The Pho to Ass ist men u displa ys with Exposure Exposure Exposure Exposure sel ec ted . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Use the 4- way arrow button to selec t an exposu re opti on.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 57 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to choose a sett ing. Tip: If you arenât su re which settings to select, press t he Default Default Default Default button (left soft k ey). 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus. If you use the AE method AE method AE method AE method , yo u can als o adjust whet her the camera cont inuously ca lculates t he ex posure (Conti nuous AE ), or calcula tes the exp osure w hen you press the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter b utton 1/2 way down and th en locks the exposure ( Auto Exp osure Loc k). If you are t aking a p hoto of a scene tha t has d ark er a nd lighter section s, (for example, a subje ct stand ing in a shadow ) Auto E xposure Lock c an help you to exp ose the p hoto co rrectly . F or example, you c an aim the camera at a dark er part of the s cene, press the Shutte r Shutte r Shutter Shutte r butto n 1/2 way d own, and then move the camera to incl ude a brighter part of the scene. Option Option Option Option Description Description Description Descript ion Default Default Default Default EV EV EV EV Select EV (Exposure Value) to man ually adjust t he exposure from -1.5 EV to 1.5 EV, i n 0.3 EV increm ents, values for lighte r photos, - val ues for da rker ph oto s. 0 AE Method AE Method AE Me thod AE Method Select AE (Au tomat i c Expo sure) Me thod to have the camera automat ical ly adjust the ex posure for d iffere nt lig hting condit ions. T here a re two A E me thods, M atrix and Spot. Matrix calculates the exposure by takin g the avera ge of sever al points of light in the p hoto. Spot c alculat es the exp osure by readin g the li ght from one sm all spot in the center of t he photo. Matri x
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 58 T o adjust the AE methodâs meter s etting: T o adjust the AE methodâs meter s etting: T o adjust the AE methodâs meter s etting: T o adjust the AE methodâs meter s etting: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Pr eferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences men u, the n scro ll do w n to Meter Meter Meter Meter . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Use the 4- way arrow button to selec t an exposu re opti on. ⢠Co ntinuou s AE Contin uou s AE Contin uou s AE Contin uou s AE ca lculate s the auto m at ic exp os ure cont inuous ly when you p ress th e Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter b utton. ⢠Auto Exposure Lock Auto Exposure Lock Auto Exposure Lock Auto Exposure Lock calc ulates the automatic exposure when you press th e Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter but ton 1 /2 way do wn, and then loc ks th e expo sure at that setti ng. 6. Pr ess t he Sele ct Select Select Select butto n (lef t soft key) to choo se an op tion . 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus. Setti ng th e Whit e Bal ance Fo r the trues t colo r re produc tion in you r phot os, th e HP P hotoS mart C 500 Digi tal Camera autom ati cally a djus ts the balanc e of c olors to mak e a true white in different lighti ng con ditions . Y ou can ma nuall y adj ust this s ettin g to h ave the camera compensate for specif ic lighti ng co nditions. The white balan ce settin g remains the same unti l you change i t, eve n if you turn th e camer a off.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 59 T o ma nually adj ust the white balan ce settin g: T o ma nually adj ust the white balan ce settin g: T o ma nually adj ust the white balan ce settin g: T o ma nually adj ust the white balan ce settin g: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Photo A s sis t Phot o Assist Phot o Assist Phot o Assist menu, then scroll down to White Whit e White Whit e Balance Balance Balance Balance . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Use the 4- way ar row button to se lect a w hite balan ce opti on. 6. Press the Selec t Select Select Select button (left so ft k ey). 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus. Setti ng Setti ng Setti ng Setting Select this option wh en Select this optio n wh en Select this optio n wh en Select this optio n wh en Auto Auto Auto Auto You wa nt the c amera t o autom atica lly sens e the lighting c ondit ions an d adju s t the wh ite ba la nce a ppropri atel y for op ti mum col or rep ro ductio n in your photo . Auto is the default. Dayli ght Dayli ght Dayli ght Dayli ght You ar e taking a phot o in daylight wi thout arti ficial light ing. Fluor esce nt Fluor esce nt Fluoresc ent Fluor esce nt You are taki ng a ph ot o und er flu o resc en t light. Tu n g s t e n Tu n g s t e n Tu n g s t e n Tu n g s t e n Y ou are taking a photo under n ormal incand escent light, su ch as the li ght from tungst en fil ament light bu lbs in h ousehol d lamps. Fla sh Fla sh Fla sh Fla sh You ar e using the flas h to il lumina te the s ubject .
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 60 Using Instant Review After you tak e a photo, In stant Rev iew briefl y displays the photo on the color L CD, even if you h ave not turned t he color LCD on. If you are hap py wi t h the phot o, you can then sa ve it on the memo ry card . If not, y ou can di scard the photo a nd try ag ain. I f you do n ot use Inst ant Re view, th e cam era autom aticall y save s the pho to. Instant Review defa ults to off, so if you wa nt to use this feature, you need to turn it on fi rst. Tip: If you want to t ak e several ph otos in quick success ion, turn Instant Review o ff. With Insta nt Revie w on, the camera tak es longer t o process each ph oto. T o turn Instant Review o n or off: T o turn Instant Review o n or off: T o turn Instant Rev iew on or off: T o turn Instant Review o n or off: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Pr eferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences menu , then scroll down to Capture. Capture. Capture. Capture. 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Scroll to Instant R eview. Instant Review. Instant Review. Instant Review. 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to turn Instant Review on or off. 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 61 T o us e Ins tant Rev iew: T o us e Ins tant Rev iew: T o us e Ins tant Rev iew: T o us e Ins tant Rev iew: 1. T ake your photo . After a few sec onds, you r phot o appe ars bri efly on th e color LCD . Note: If your p hoto doe s not ap pear on the col or L CD, you need to turn Instan t Revi ew on. 2. Press the Sav e Save Save Save button ( right soft k ey) to save yo ur pho to, or p ress the Delete Delete Delete Delete button (c enter soft key) to discard the ph oto. Note: The camer a auto matic ally saves the photo if you d o not s pecify t hat you want to save or dele te it. Y ou can clea r the col or L CD and save the photo by pressi ng the Shut ter Shutter Shutter Shutter but ton 1 /2 way do wn. 3. If you chose to delet e the ph oto, p ress the Delete Delete Delete Delete button (left s oft k ey) to confirm t he de letion. I f you do n o t confir m that you wa nt to de lete the pho to before t he photo di sappears from the colo r L CD , the camer a saves the photo.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 62 Setting the Eye Start Eye Start brings the came ra out o f slee p mode a nd star ts adju sting th e exposure w h en your eye is close to the viewfi nder. Eye Start wor ks by using se nsors located next to the vie wfinder. It is o n by de faul t. T o t urn Eye Start on or off: T o t urn Eye Start on or off: T o t urn Eye Start on or off: T o t urn Eye Start on or off: 1. T urn the camera on and turn the cam era mode dial to Re c Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences me nu, then scr oll dow n to Capture Capture Capture Capture . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Use the 4- way arrow button to turn Eye Start on or off. 6. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the men us. Setting Hand Held The ca mera ha s a H and Held set ting whic h hel ps yo u to tak e photos that are clear and sha rp . If the Ha nd Held se tting is on, the came r a a llows you to tak e photos with a slowe st sh u tte r sp eed of 1/8 s econd. B y def ault, Hand Held is on . If you tur n the Ha nd He ld set ting o ff, the c amera a llows you ta k e pho tos with a shutter speed as slow as 2 sec onds. I t is rec ommend ed that you use the cam era wit h a tri pod, or place the camer a on a f irm, st able su rfac e if yo u need to use a slow sh utter s peed. Eye Start s enso rs
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 63 T o turn Hand Held o n or off: T o turn Hand Held o n or off: T o turn Hand Held o n or off: T o turn Hand Held o n or off: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Pr eferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences men u, the n scro ll do w n to Capture Capture Capture Capture . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Scroll down to Han d H eld Hand Hel d Hand Hel d Hand Hel d . 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to turn Ha nd Held on or off. 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus. Setting the Counter Res et Counter Reset all ows you t o choose how you wa nt to number yo ur photos on the memory car d. If you w ant to st art number ing photo s from 1 each t ime you del ete all the phot os from t he memory card, turn Cou nter Reset on. I f you want to cont inue numberi ng pho tos, even after erasing a ll t he photo s from th e me mory c ard, so t hat you know the total numbe r of ph otos you ha ve ta k en sin ce you bought t he cam era, turn Co unter Res et off. It is off by defau lt. T o set Counter Re se t: T o set Counter Re se t: T o set Counter Re se t: T o set Counter Re se t: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Pr eferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences men u, the n scro ll do w n to Capture Capture Capture Capture .
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 64 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Scroll down to Coun ter Re set Counte r Reset Counter Re set Counte r Reset . 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to turn Counter R eset on or off. 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus. Setting Auto Shuto ff Y our HP Phot oSmart C500 D igital Camer a has an a utomat ic sh utoff, w h ich is de signed to hel p conse rve battery l ife during period s of ina ctivity. A uto Sh utoff i s on by def ault. It i s recom mended t hat you turn Aut o Shut off off when you are downl oa di ng phot os to your computer. Auto Shutoff turns o ff camer a func tions af ter the follow ing peri ods of inacti vity: ⢠If the camer a is in sleep mode, pre ss any but ton to âwak e upâ the camera. ⢠If the camera ha s turned itsel f off, press the on/off on/of f on /off on/of f bu tton t o turn i t back on . Powe r so urce Powe r so urce Po we r so ur ce Power source Camera mode Camera mo de Camera mo de Camera mo de Sleep Sleep S leep Sleep Power off Power off Power off Power off Battery power Battery power B attery power Battery power Rec, Rev, Play 30 seconds 10 minutes PC 4 minu tes 1 0 minut es AC power adapter AC power adapter AC power adapter AC power adapter Rec, R e v, Pl ay, PC 30 m i n utes
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 65 T o turn Auto Shutoff on or off: T o turn Auto Shutoff on or off: T o turn Auto Shutoff on or off: T o turn Auto Shutoff on or off: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Pr eferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences menu, then scroll down to General Genera l Genera l Genera l . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Scroll down to Auto Shuto ff Auto S hutof f Auto S hutof f Auto S hutof f . 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to turn A uto Sh utoff on or off. 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) to save the settings and exit t he menus . Setti ng th e Beep The camera uses a beep to c ommunicate that an even t has tak en place. F or example, when you ta k e a photo, t h e camera beeps to let you kno w that it has finished capturing the image. Beep is on by d efault. The camera beeps: ⢠T wice after a ph oto ha s been ta k en. ⢠Once at the beginni ng of a Burst series, a nd then tw ice at t he end of the series. ⢠Fo r 3 sec onds when t he batteries are l ow. ⢠When you turn the camer a on, if the me mory c ard is d amaged or u nformatt ed.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 66 ⢠When you press th e Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter button, if the memory card is full. ⢠If the camera is on and you insert a full memory card. T o t urn th e Beep on or off: T o t urn th e Beep on or off: T o t urn th e Beep on or off: T o t urn th e Beep on or off: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Pr eferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences menu, then scroll down to General Genera l Genera l Genera l . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Use the 4- way arrow button to turn Beep on o r off. 6. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 67 Chapter 4 - Viewing P hotos Overview After you have tak en some photo s wit h your H P PhotoS mart C 500 Digi tal Ca mera, you can view th em on th e camera âs colo r L CD or on a telev i s ion sc reen. Depend ing on th e came ra mode y ou use ( R eview or Play) , you can : ⢠view thu mbnail s of your photos ⢠view on e photo a t a time u sing the en tire screen ⢠play ba ck Bur st, Tim elaps e, an d groupe d photo sequenc es ⢠creat e a slides how
Overview HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 68 See the table belo w for the features a vailable in each mod e. Tip: T o conserv e batter y life , use an A C power ad apter w h ile v iewing p hotos on the col or L CD. See âUsin g an A C Power A dapter (r ecomme nded)â on page 29 for deta ils. Mode Mode Mode Mode What you can do What you can do What you can do What you can do Review Review Revi ew Review ⢠View thu mbnai ls of your phot os ⢠View B urst, T imela pse, and grouped photo s ⢠Mark pho tos for further action ⢠Delete selec ted or mark ed phot os ⢠Protect p hotos fr om being d eleted ⢠Categori ze p hotos for easy s earchi ng and fi ndin g ⢠Group photos for sor ting an d pri nting ⢠Sear ch fo r a p arti cular photo Pla y Pla y Pla y Pla y ⢠View one photo at a ti me, u sing the enti re scr een ⢠Play ba ck Bur st, Tim elaps e, and groupe d photo sequenc es ⢠Zoom in on pho tos to see detai ls in close-up ⢠Delete si ngle o r groupe d Stil l, Burs t and Timel apse p hotos ⢠Create a sl ideshow on the color LCD or o n a telev ision
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 6 9 Using Review Mode When you use Rev iew mod e, th e color L CD automa tically d ispla ys the ph otos sa ved on the me mory c ard. Y our photos a ppe ar as sm all thu mbnail i mages a cross the top of the d isplay. A l arger th umbnai l of th e selected photo appear s below the small th umbnail s; the p h ot o info rmatio n (the ima ge number , the imag e date an d time, and the group or camera name) ap pears o n the lower ri ght of th e displa y. Selecting Photos T o sel e c t ph otos : T o sel e c t ph otos : T o se l ect p hot os: T o sel e c t ph otos : 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4- way ar row button to sc roll thro ugh the thumb nails until the selection mark er point s to th e phot o you wan t. Press and hold th e butt on to scroll t hrough your photos r apidly. Selection marke r Photo information Thumbn ails Selected photo 4-way arrow butt on
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 70 Marking Photos Y ou can âma rkâ s everal p hot os so tha t when you sele ct an action, the action appli es to all ma rk ed photos. F or example, you can mark s everal p hotos a nd de lete the m all at on ce, rath er than delet ing one p hoto a t a tim e. If yo u mark an y pho to th at rep re sent s a closed grou p , al l the ph oto s in the grou p ar e mar k ed. T o ma rk ph otos: T o ma rk ph otos: T o ma rk ph otos: T o ma rk ph otos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to the p hoto you want t o ma rk . 3. Press the Mark Mark Mark Mark button (left soft k ey). A notc h app ears on t he lower right c orner of t he sele cted p hoto a nd its m atchi ng thum bnai l. 4. Repe at Ste ps 2 an d 3 to m ark addi tional photo s. OR T o mark al l phot os, press and hold do wn the Mark Mark Mark Mark button (left s oft k ey) unt il Mark All Mark All Mark All Mark All appears on the lower overl ay bar. Note: Photos remain mark ed until yo u pe rform an action on them, or until you unm ark th em. A notch in dica tes a mar k ed phot o
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 71 T o un mark marked photos: T o un mark marked photos: T o un mark marked photos: T o un mark marked photos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to the p hoto you want t o unmark. 3. Press the Unm ar k Unm ark Unm ar k Unm ark button (l eft so ft k ey). The notc h disa ppears from th e low er right corne r of the s elect ed photo and its ma tching thumbn ail. Y ou can un mark all th e ph o tos on the memor y card by press i ng a nd h ol di ng do wn the Unmark Unmark Unmark Unmark b utton (l ef t soft ke y ) u n t i l Un m ark A ll Unm ark All Un mar k A ll Unm ark All appears on the lowe r over lay bar. Deleting Photos Y ou can delete a single photo or a ll mark ed photos in Revi ew mode . Y ou can also de lete sin gle ph otos i n Play mode (see âDe leting Photos â on page 89). Note: Protect ed photos will not be deleted. S ee âProte cting Photosâ on pag e 72 for m ore info rmat ion. T o dele te phot os: T o dele te phot os: T o delete ph otos: T o dele te phot os: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Select a photo or mark the photos you w ant to del ete. If you wa nt to del ete all the p hotos, you can c hoose âMar k All.â See âMa rking Photosâ on page 70 for more i nforma tion. If you wa nt to d elete all of t he photos in a group, or a Tim elapse or Bur st series, you ca n close o r col lapse th e photos, until just th e one photo t hat repres ents the group o r seri es is sh owing. Y ou can th en se lect th e photo as you woul d a singl e Still p hoto, f or del eting.
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 7 2 3. Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button. 4. Press the Delet e Delete Delete Delete button (center soft k ey). The col or L CD displa ys a mess age aski ng you to confi rm that yo u want to delete the ph otos. 5. Press the Delet e Delete Delete Delete butt on (left s oft key) to delet e the ph otos. Protecting Photos Protect ing ph otos preven ts them fr om being deleted fr om the memory ca rd. Y ou also ca nnot ch ange the c ategory o f protec ted ph o tos . T o prot ect photos: T o prot ect photos: T o protect photos : T o prot ect photos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Select a ph oto or m ark th e photo s you wan t to prot ect. See âMarki ng Phot osâ on page 70 for more i nforma tion. Note: Protect acts on m ark ed phot os i f t h ere a re an y, o r on the current p hot o i f th er e a re n o marked p h oto s. If you want t o protect just t he cur rent photo , first unmark al l the p hotos o n the mem ory card. 3. Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button. 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to Protect Protect Protect Protect . 5. Press the Protect Protect Protect Protect button (ce nter soft k ey). The Prot ec ted i con appe ar s in the photo i nfo rmat io n to in di ca te th a t the ph ot o is p rot ect e d. Prot ected i c on
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 73 T o remove prot ec tion fr o m ph ot os: T o remove prot ec tion fr o m ph ot os: T o remove prot ec tion fr o m ph ot os: T o remove prot ec tion fr o m ph ot os: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Select a phot o or ma rk the p hotos you want t o unpro tect. See â Markin g Photosâ on pa ge 70 for more informat ion. 3. Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button. 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to Protect Protect Protect Protect . 5. Press the Unprotect Unprotect Unprotect Unprotect b utton (l eft soft k ey). Note: Y o u must unpr otect y o ur prot ected ph otos be f ore yo u can del ete them. Categorizing Photos Y ou can assi gn a cat egory to your phot os, mak ing them easier to find. Y ou can cate gorize on e photo at a tim e, or mark ph otos and ap ply one c ategory to all of the ma rk ed photos. Cate gories a re also u seful wh en you a re cre ating a slidesho w. For example, you co uld cr eate a slid eshow to share your v acation photos w ith friends a nd famil y. Note: Y ou cannot assi gn or c hange c ategorie s for pro tected photos . T o categ orize photos : T o categ orize photos : T o categorize ph otos: T o categ orize photos : 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Select a phot o or mark the p hotos you w ant t o categor ize. Se e âMark ing Phot osâ on p age 70 for more informat ion. 3. Press the Categor y Category Category Category but ton (cent er soft k ey).
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 74 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to the c ategory you want to use. Y ou can cho ose from the foll owing ca tegories: 5. Press the Select Select Select Select button (left so ft k ey). A check mark a ppears next to the category , and the c ame ra automa tically exi t the men us. The icon for the ca tegory you selec ted app ears in the p hoto inf orm at ion. T o deselect a category: T o deselect a category: T o deselect a category: T o deselect a category: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Select the photo whose category you want to desel ect. 3. Press the Categor y Category Category Category but ton (cent er soft k ey). 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to the c ategory you want to dese lect. 5. Press the Dese lect Desele ct Dese lect Desele ct button (left soft k ey). The camera automat ically exits the men us. The category icon disa ppears from the photo informa tion. ⢠Landsca pe ⢠Vacati on ⢠Friends ⢠Family ⢠Pets ⢠Work ⢠Triang le ⢠Square ⢠Circle Category icon
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 75 T o chan ge a category: T o chan ge a category: T o change a category: T o chan ge a category: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Select the photo whose category you want to cha nge. 3. Press the Categor y Category Category Category but ton (cent er soft k ey). 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to the n ew catego ry you wan t to selec t. 5. Press the Select Select Select Select button (left so ft k ey) to desele ct the o ld catego ry and sel ect the new cate gory. The came ra au tomati cally exit s the menus. T he new c ategory i con appea rs in th e pho to inf ormation. Grouping Photos Grou ping ph otos is similar to ca tegori zing th em. An i mpo rtant di fferen ce is th at gro uping al so aff ects t he organi zation of phot os on the mem ory ca rd. Wh en you create a group, you are creat ing a fol der on the me mory card, lik e you would cr eate a fo lder on the har d driv e of your comp uter. As you a dd pho tos to the grou p, the y are organ ize d in th e g rou pâs fol der. Y o u can c omb ine g r oups and cate gori es. Ind ividu al photo s with i n a group can e ach belon g to a d iffere nt cate gory, or you c an put a ll of th e phot os in a group into on e categor y. Note: If a gr oup is closed, marki ng the p hoto th at repre sents the grou p, mar ks all the ph otos in the grou p.
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 76 Creating and Removing G roups T o create a n ew group: T o create a n ew group: T o create a n ew group: T o create a n ew group: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Select a ph oto or m ark th e photo s you wan t to gr oup toge ther. S ee âMar king P hotosâ o n page 70 for more informat ion. 3. Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button. 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to Group Group Group Group . 5. Press the Crea te Crea te Create Crea te button ( left soft k ey). Note: The Cr eat e Creat e Creat e Creat e butt on is av ailab l e onl y wh en ther e are n o exi stin g groups. If there a re existi ng groups, press the Add Add Add Add button (l eft soft key), th en pr ess Cre ate New Create N ew Cr eate Ne w Create N ew (center so ft k ey). 6. Name the new gro up. Gro up name s must be eigh t charac ters or less an d cannot conta in spa ces. ⢠Use the u p and down side s of the 4-way arro w button to scro ll to the letter you want to use. ⢠Use the r ight si de of the 4-way arro w butt on to add a le tter to the name. ⢠Use the l eft side of the 4-way arr ow button to dele te a let ter fro m the name . Note: The camera does not accept gr oup names th at begin w ith BR or TL beca use these letters a re reserve d, regar dless of language, for id entif ying B urst an d Time lapse photos o n the m emory ca rd.
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 7 7 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus. The name of the g r oup app ears in the ph oto inf o rmat ion for al l phot os in th e g rou p. The Grou ped Im ages icon ap pears in the photo infor mat ion f or any ph oto t hat repr esen ts a closed group. T o dis solve a gr oup: T o dis solve a gr oup: T o dissolve a g roup: T o dis solve a gr oup: Note: Dissol ving a g roup removes all the phot os from the grou p and d eletes the grou p name . It does not delete the p hotos fro m the mem ory card . Y ou ca nnot d issolv e protect ed grou ped phot os. 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4- way ar row button to sc roll to any photo included in th e group you want t o remove. 3. Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button. 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to Group Group Group Group . 5. Press the Disso lve Dissolve Dissolve Dissolve button (center soft k ey). 6. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey). T o del ete a group of photos: T o del ete a group of photos: T o del ete a group of photos: T o del ete a group of photos: Note: Deleti ng grouped photos delete s all the ph otos in the grou p from the me mory card, but does not del ete the group na me. Onc e the pho tos are d eleted , you canno t reco ver them . 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to an y photo inclu ded in th e group you want t o delete. Group ed Images icon
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 7 8 3. If the group is open, showin g links between the photos, close the group by pressin g the Close Close Close Close button ( right soft ke y ) . 4. Sele ct the ph oto tha t represe nts the group of photos . 5. Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button. The Edit Edit Edit Edit menu di splays wi th Delete Delete Delete Delete highlighted. 6. Press the Delet e Delete Delete Delete button (center soft k ey). 7. Press the De lete Delete Delete Delete butt on (left s oft key) to delet e all of the phot os in the grou p. Remem ber that once ph otos are dele ted, you c annot r ecover them. Addin g Ph otos to a Gro up T o add a photo to a grou p: T o add a photo to a grou p: T o add a photo to a group: T o add a photo to a grou p: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Select a ph oto or m ark th e photo s you wan t to add to th e group. S ee âMarking Pho tosâ on page 70 for more informat ion. 3. Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button. 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to Group Group Group Group . 5. Press the Add Add Add Add button ( left s oft k ey) . Note: The Add Add Add Add button i s availa ble onl y whe n there a re existi ng group s. See â Creating a nd Remov ing Gro upsâ on page 76 for detai ls.
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 79 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to the gr oup you want to sel ect. 7. Press the Se lect Select Select Select button (left so ft k ey). 8. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button. The nam e of the group appears i n the photo informati on for all ph otos in the gr oup. Th e Grou ped Im ages ico n app ears in the p hoto in formati on for a ny photo that r eprese nts a close d grou p. Opening and Cl osing Groups Once you have g rouped som e phot os you can c lose th e group and view just the one photo that represent s the group or you c an open the group and view all the phot os in the group. T o ope n grouped phot os: T o ope n grouped phot os: T o ope n grouped phot os: T o ope n grouped phot os: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to th e photo th at rep resents th e group you want to open. Tip: The photo representing the group d isplays th e Group ed Images icon i n its photo informa tion. 3. Press the Ope n Open Ope n Open button (r ight soft k ey). Thumbn ails of all of the ph otos in t he grou p are displayed with l inks between them. Group na me Groupe d Images ico n Link s
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 80 T o clos e grouped photos: T o clos e grouped photos: T o clos e grouped photos: T o clos e grouped photos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to an y photo in the g roup you w ant to c lose. 3. Press the Close Close Close Close button (righ t soft k ey). Expanding Burst and Timelapse Ph otos When you tak e Burst o r Time lapse p hotos, the ca mera tak es a serie s of pho tos a nd uses t he first photo to rep resent the ser ies. Y ou ca n expa nd the s eries to dis play all the ph otos on the color L CD, or you ca n pl ay the s eries. S ee âView ing Burst , Tim elapse, and Gr ouped P hotosâ on page 86 for i nformat ion a bout pl aying a s eries of photo s. T o expand Burst or Timelapse photos: T o expand Burst or Timelapse photos: T o expand Burst or Timelapse photos: T o expand Burst or Timelapse photos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4-way a rrow butt on to scrol l to the ph oto that repr esents the B urst o r Ti melap se ser ies you want to expand. Tip: The photo repre senting t he serie s displays the Burs t or Timel apse i con in i ts photo informat ion. 3. Press the Expa nd Expa nd Expa nd Expa nd button (ri ght so ft k ey). Thumbn ails of all of the ph otos in t he serie s are displayed with li nks bet ween them . Bur st ic on Timelapse icon
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 81 T o coll apse Burst o r Timelapse pho tos: T o coll apse Burst o r Timelapse pho tos: T o coll apse Burst o r Timelapse pho tos: T o coll apse Burst o r Timelapse pho tos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to an y photo in the B urst o r Timela pse s eries you want to c ollapse. 3. Press the Collaps e Collapse Collapse Collapse button (right soft k ey). Searching for Ph otos Y o u ca n use the Find Find Find Find menu to sea rch for photos by date or by ca tegory. T o se arch for photos by date: T o se arch for photos by date: T o search for pho tos by date: T o se arch for photos by date: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Find Find Find Find menu. 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Enter th e range o f dates you want t he camera to use to searc h for photos: ⢠Use the r ight an d left sides of the 4-wa y arrow button to move to the m onth, da y, an d year fie lds. ⢠Use the u p and d own sides of the 4-way arrow bu tton to change th e month, day, and year.
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 82 Note: The Fr om From Fr om From date mu st be pr ior or equal to th e To To To To date. 6. Press the Find Find Find Find button (left soft k ey). 7. The results o f your search app ear on th e co lor L CD. The Fi nd Find Find Find ic on appea rs in th e low er right corner to remin d you that you a re loo king at the r esults o f your sea rch. 8. Use th e 4- way arr ow but ton to scro ll th rough t he p hotos. When you ha ve fin ished , pres s th e Show Show Show Show All All All All button (cen ter sof t k ey) to r esume v iewing al l phot os stored o n the memory card. Note: If ther e are n o photo s within the r ange o f date s you have selec ted, the colo r L CD di sp lays t he mes s age No No No No images matched search criteria images matched search criteria images matched search criteria images matched search criteria . Y ou ca n: ⢠Press the Show All Show All Show All Show All button (left soft k ey) to resume view ing all photos st ored on the me mory car d. OR ⢠Press the Find Find Find Find button (r ight sof t k ey) to select a new range of d ates. T o se arch for photos by category: T o se arch for photos by category: T o se arch for photos by category: T o se arch for photos by category: Note: For more inf orma tion on categ orie s, see âCateg o rizi ng Phot osâ on page 7 3. 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. Find icon
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 83 3. Use the 4-way arrow butto n to scr oll to th e Fin d Fin d Fi nd Fin d me nu, then scr oll down to By Ca tegory By Catego ry By Ca tegory By Catego ry . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to the c ategory you want to view. 6. Press the Selec t Select Select Select button (left so ft k ey). The re sults o f your sea rch ap pear on the co lor L CD. T he Fi nd Find Find Find ic on appe ars in t he lo wer righ t corner to rem ind you that you are loo king at the resu lts of your search . 7. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll thro ugh the ph otos. When you ha ve fini shed, press th e S how All Show All Show All Show All button (cente r soft k ey) to resume viewing all pho tos sto red on the memory card. Note: If there are no pho tos within t he categ ory you hav e selec ted, the c olor L CD displ ays the me ssage No No No No images matched search criteria images matched search criteria images matched search criteria images matched search criteria . Y ou ca n: ⢠Press the Show All Show All Show All Show All button (left soft k ey) to resume view ing all photos st ored on the me mory car d. OR ⢠Press the Find Find Find Find button (r ight sof t k ey) to select a new category. Find icon
Using Pla y Mode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 84 Using Play Mode When you use Play mod e, t he colo r L CD auto matic ally disp lays your p hot os us ing the en tire s creen. Pho tos in itia lly appe ar at a low resolution, and th en the c olor L CD refr eshes, fr om the top, to gi ve you a clear, sharp v iew of your photo. Y ou can view informa tion ab out p hotos on the over lay ba rs if you turn them on. Se e âOve rlay Barsâ on page 21 for more information . Viewing Single Photos T o vie w a single photo: T o vie w a single photo: T o vie w a single photo: T o vie w a single photo: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Play Play Play Play . 2. Use the 4- way ar row button to sc roll thro ugh your photos. Tip: Y ou can press the Overlay Overlay Overlay Overlay butto n to turn off t he overl ay bar and see the ent ire scree n , or press it twic e to tur n on both overlay ba rs. Overlay bar
Using Pla y Mode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 85 Zooming In on Y our Photo s If you wa nt to s ee a por tion of yo ur pho to in m ore detai l, use th e Zoo m Zoom Zoom Zoom button (cen ter sof t k ey). When you are zoome d in, you c an use t he 4-way a rrow bu tton to see different pa rts of the phot o. Y ou must e xit Zoo m befor e moving t o a diffe rent ph oto. T o zoom in an d out: T o zoom in an d out: T o zoom in an d out: T o zoom in an d out: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Pl ay Play Pl ay Play . 2. If the overlay bar s are off, press the Ov erla y Overl ay Overl ay Overl ay but ton to turn th em on . 3. Use the right and left sides of the 4-wa y arrow button to selec t the p hoto yo u want to view. 4. Zoom in a nd out : ⢠Press the Zoom Zoom Zoom Zoom button (center so ft k ey) to zoom in . Y ou can zoo m in three times. ⢠Press the Zoom Out Zoom Out Zoom Out Zoom Out button (lef t soft k ey) to zoom out. Y ou can z oom ou t four ti mes. ⢠Use the 4- way arrow button to see di fferent p arts of t he photo. Each ti me you z oom in or o ut, the color L CD refr eshes, fr om the top, to giv e you a c lear, sha rp view of your photo. 5. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) to finish zoo ming a nd return the di splay to the ori ginal p hoto si ze.
Using Pla y Mode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 86 Viewing Burst, Timelapse, and Grouped Photos Y ou can pla y back s equence s of Burst, Tim elaps e, an d groupe d photos at a p re-def ined rat e, mu ch li k e a sl idesho w. Y ou can view th e ph o tos on th e ca m era âs co lor L C D, or on th e t el evi si on sc reen ( see âViewing Photo s o n a T elevisionâ on page 92). T o play back pho tos: T o play back pho tos: T o play back pho tos: T o play back pho tos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Pl ay Play Pl ay Play . 2. If the overlay bar s are off, pres s the Overlay Overlay Overlay Overlay butt on to tu rn th em on so that you can s ee t h e na m es of t h e a ctiv e soft keys. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to scroll to th e Burst, Timel apse, or grouped p hotos you want to play ba ck. 4. Press the Play Play Play Play button (left soft k ey). 5. Press the Stop Slide show Stop Slidesh ow Stop Slidesh ow Stop Slidesh ow button ( left so ft k ey) to stop playing back your photos . T o chan ge the playback rate: T o chan ge the playback rate: T o chan ge the playback rate: T o chan ge the playback rate: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Pl ay Play Pl ay Play . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to Playback Rate Playback Rate Playback Rate Playback Rate .
Using Pla y Mode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 87 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Scroll to Timelapse Timelapse Timelapse Timelapse , Burst Burst Burst Burst , or Grou p Group Group Group . 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to decre ase or increa se the Pl ayback Rate. Y ou can choo se a rate o f 30 , 45, or 6 0 secon ds. The de faul t is 3 0 secon ds. 7. Press the Exit Exit Exit Exit button (rig ht soft k ey) twice to save the s etting s an d exit the menus. Creating a Sl ideshow Y ou can crea te a sli deshow t o display your p hotos on the col or L CD or on a tel evision screen. Y our slidesho w can includ e all of th e phot os on the memory ca rd, or you can ch oose a s i ngle c ategory of p hotos t o use. See âCate gorizin g Photos â on p age 73 for more i nformat ion on c ategor ies. T o create an d play a slideshow: T o create an d play a slideshow: T o create and play a slide show: T o create an d play a slideshow: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Pl ay Play Pl ay Play . Tip: Press the Over lay Overl ay Overl ay Overl ay button to t urn the ov erlay bars off so tha t you can see the entire sc reen. 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. The Play Settings Play Setting s Play Settings Play Setting s menu displays wi th Sli desho w Slides how Slid eshow Slides how hi ghlighted. 3. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key).
Using Pla y Mode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 88 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to the Slid eshow Slides how Slid eshow Slides how option you want to cha nge: 5. Use the 4-way ar row button to se lect th e desire d settin g. 6. Press the Start Start Start Start button (l eft soft k ey) to begin the slide show. 7. Y ou can stop the sl id eshow at a ny t ime by press ing t he Stop S l id e sh ow Stop S l id e sh ow St op Slide sh ow Stop S l id e sh ow b utton (left soft k ey). If th e ov erl ay ba rs are turned off, th e Stop Sli desho w Stop Slides ho w Stop Slid es ho w Stop Slides ho w label is no t visible, bu t the s oft ke y is st ill avail able. 8. After you ha ve stoppe d the sl ides how, pr ess the Exit Exit Exit Exit button ( ri gh t s oft k ey) twic e to sa ve th e se ttings and e xit the menus. Option Option Option Option Description Description De scription Descr iptio n Def ault Defa ult Default Defa ult Content Content Content Content The content of the sl idesho w can in clude all of t he photos on the memory ca rd or a single categ ory of ph otos. All Duration Duration Durati on Duration This is the a m ount of ti m e ea ch p h oto is d ispl aye d. Sel ec t fro m 30, 45, or 60 sec ond s. 30 secon ds Loop Loop Loop Loop This determines whether t he sli deshow w ill begin agai n (loop) w hen it reac hes t he last photo. On
Using Pla y Mode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 89 Deleting Photos Y ou can delet e a singl e phot o or all of the p hotos i n a grou p, Burs t, or T imelap se sequen ce in Play mode. Y ou can also de lete phot os in Review mode (see â Deleting Photosâ on page 71). Note: Protect ed photos will not be deleted. S ee âProte cting Photosâ on pag e 72 for m ore info rmat ion. T o dele te phot os: T o dele te phot os: T o delete ph otos: T o dele te phot os: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Pl ay Play Pl ay Play . 2. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to th e photo you want t o delet e. 3. Press the Delete Delete Delete Delete button (right soft k ey). The col or L CD displays a message asking you to con firm th at you want to d elete the photo. 4. Press the Delet e Delete Delete Delete butt on (left s oft key) to delet e the ph oto.
Using Your Televi sion HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 90 Using Y our T elevision When t he HP Phot oSmart C500 Digital Ca mera is c onnect ed to a tele visi on, th e tel evisi on sc reen fun ction s the same as the came raâs col or L CD. Y ou c an even use yo ur telev ision to vie w a slide sh ow, making i t easy to sha re your photo s wit h family and fri end s. Selecting the Video Output F o rmat Before you co nnect th e came ra to the telev ision y ou nee d to se lect th e video o utput format. T he form at that y ou choose ( NTSC NTSC NTSC NTSC or PA L PA L PA L PA L ) , depe n ds on y our te levisi onâs v ideo f orma t. Note: Refer to yo ur tel evisio n owne râs man ual fo r more i nformat ion a bout the vide o format . T o se lect the video out put forma t: T o se lect the video out put forma t: T o se lect the video out put forma t: T o se lect the video out put forma t: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Pl ay Play Pl ay Play . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to Video Video Video Video . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Press the left a nd rig ht sides of th e 4-way arrow but ton to select NTSC NTSC NTSC NTSC or PA L PA L PA L PA L . 6. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the men us.
Using Your Televi sion HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 91 Connecting the Camera to a T elevision T o connect the camera to a telev i sion: T o connect the camera to a telev i sion: T o connect the cam era to a telev i sion: T o connect the camera to a telev i sion: 1. Connect t he video cable: ⢠If you are usi ng an NTS C con nection , pl ug the in put (yel low) e nd of t he vi deo c able i nto you r tel evis ion se tâs video i nput connecto r (on mos t televisions , this is al so yello w). ⢠If you ar e using a P AL connection, p lug the i nput ( yellow) end of th e video cable into th e tele visionâ s video input co nn ector. On o lde r sets pl ug the vi deo ca ble int o a S CAR T adap ter (pu rchas ed se para tely), then p lug the ad apte r into your television setâs video input c onnector. Note: See your telev ision o wnerâs manual for spec ific instru ctions o n how to locate the vid eo inpu t connec tor. 2. Plug t he othe r end of the vi deo cab le into the cam era. 3. On your televisi on, set t he video input t o be the v ideo inp ut con nector where yo u con nected th e cam era. See your tel evision owner âs manua l for ins tructi ons on h ow to se t the vi deo inp ut. Tip: T o conserv e batter y life , use an AC po wer adap ter w hile your camera is conn ected to the te levi sion. S ee âUsing a n A C Power Adapt er (recommend ed)â on pag e 29. Video O ut
Using Your Televi sion HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 92 Viewing Photos on a T e levisi on When t he HP Ph otoSma rt C500 Di gital C amera is conn ected to a tele vision, you can play o r review yo ur photos on the tel evisio n screen j ust as you would on th e camer aâs col or L CD. Y ou can als o mark, protect , cate gorize, group o r dele te phot os, or cre a te a slidesh ow. T o vie w your ph otos on a t elevisi on: T o vie w your ph otos on a t elevisi on: T o vie w your ph otos on a t elevisi on: T o vie w your ph otos on a t elevisi on: 1. Connec t the ca mera t o your tel evision . See â Connect ing the Camera to a T elevisionâ o n page 91 for detail s. 2. T ur n on your te levisio n, and selec t the video i nput. Se e your telev ision ow nerâs manu al for inst ructio ns on how to set t he vide o inpu t. 3. T urn t he cam era on a nd turn the cam era m ode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev or Play Pla y Pla y Pla y . 4. View yo ur photo s o n the tel evis ion s creen as you w ould on th e cam eraâs colo r L CD. Se e âUsin g Revi ew Mo deâ on page 69 and âUsing Play Mode â on pa ge 84 for details. Y ou can use t he 4-way arrow bu tton on the camera to scroll through your p hotos, o r pres s the Menu Menu Menu Menu button to use the camera menus. Note: Y ou can also ta k e photos whil e the ca mera is c onnec ted to th e tele vision (with t he came ra in Rec Rec Rec Rec mode) and u se the tel evisio n scre en to pre view ph otos as you wo uld on the c ameraâs c olor L CD.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 9 3 Chapter 5 - Sharing and Printing Photos Once you have t ak en so me p hotos wi th your HP PhotoSmart C500 Digital Came ra, yo u can u se them in lot s of fun ways. Y ou can tr ansfe r them t o your IBM-com pati ble or Ma cintosh comput er for us e in crea tive project s, or f or shari ng with fa m il y and frien d s via the In ter net . The camera saves ph o tos on the me m ory ca rd in JPEG forma t wh ic h means that you c an use a wide variety of creative soft ware t o mani pulat e the ph oto f iles onc e you ha ve sa ved the m on your computer . If you ha ve a n HP JetSend-capable print er, s uch a s the HP P ho toS mar t P1000/ P1 10 0 pri nt er, yo u can use the HP Ph otoS mart C 500 Digita l Cam eraâs HP JetSen d capa bilit y for wirel ess p rinting. I f your p rinter h as a slot fo r a Comp actFlas h memory ca rd, you c an print p hotos direc tly from yo ur memor y card . Check ou t HP 's P h otoS m ar t W eb site a t www.ph otos mart.com www.ph otos mart.c om www.phot osmart.com www.ph otos mart.c om fo r gr ea t i dea s an d t ips on h ow to use your photos to create fun projects . Tip: T o conserve batter y life , connec t an A C power a dapter when you are using the camera wi th your computer or when you are JetS ending p hotos. Connecting the Camera to Y our PC Y o u can c on nect yo ur HP Pho toSma rt C500 Digita l Came ra to an I B M-compa tible, Window s PC usi ng the US B or serial cable that co mes in the camera package. Before you can use your camera wit h yo ur computer, you need t o insta ll the HP Photo Smart s oftwar e. Note: If you have a Maci ntosh comput er, see âConnectin g the Ca mera to Y our Macintoshâ o n page 101 for more informat ion.
Connec ting th e Came ra to Your PC HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 94 System Requirements If you wa nt to c onnect yo ur HP Ph otoSma rt C50 0 Digital Camera to a PC, yo ur computer system mus t meet th e follow ing re quirem ents: Y our compute r system als o needs an avai lable USB or se rial por t, dependi ng on the opera ting system you a re using, so that you can connec t the camera to your co mputer. See the t able below for the type of port r equired for ea ch of the sup porte d operat ing sys tems. Compone nt Compone nt Component Compone nt Minim um Min imum Minimu m Minim um Rec omme nded Recommen ded Recommende d Recommen ded Proc essor Pen ti um 133 MH z Penti um II, 300 MHz or bett e r Memory (RAM) 32 MB 64 MB or more Free har d di sk spac e 1 50 MB same Video di splay 640x480, 256 col ors 800x 600, 16 bit or h igher CD-ROM 4x or better same USB USB USB USB Serial Serial Serial Serial Window s 95 9 Window s 98 99 Windows NT 4. 0 9
Connec ting th e Came ra to Your PC HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 95 Installing the Software 1. Insert the HP P hotoSmart CD int o your compu terâs CD-ROM drive . The installa tion window a utoma tically appe ars. If it doesnâ t, use Wi ndows Explore r or My Com puter to l ocate you r CD-ROM d rive, then double-c lick the file setup.exe setup.exe setup.exe setup.exe . 2. Cli ck Next Next Next Next to begi n the i nstalla tion, a nd then follow the ins tructio ns on the scre en to i nstall th e soft ware. Connecting the Camera Y our computerâs operating s ystem dete rmines wh ich type of co nnection, USB or ser ial, you can use to connect your camera to yo ur computer. See the table abov e. T o connect the camera to your com puter: T o connect the camera to your com puter: T o connect the camera to your com puter: T o connect the camera to your com puter: 1. If you are usin g a serial connect ion, turn yo ur c omputer off. If you are usi ng a USB connec tion, you do not n eed to turn the c omput er off. 2. Plug t he roun d end o f the USB or serial cable into the camer a.
Connec ting th e Came ra to Your PC HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 9 6 3. Plug the ot her en d of the cable into th e appro priate port on your com puter. 4. If you are using a ser ial connection , turn your c omputer on. Downloading Ph otos Downlo adin g is the proce ss of t ransfe rring ph otos fro m the c ameraâ s memory ca rd to your com puter. Before you can do wnload ph otos to yo ur computer, you need t o instal l the software o n your PC. Se e âInst alling th e Softwa reâ on page 95 for details. Note: T o conserve b attery power, us e an A C power adapt er when yo u are do wnloadi ng photos to your computer. T o down load photos: T o down load photos: T o down load photos: T o down load photos: 1. Conn ect the camer a to your c om puter us ing the ap propri ate c able (US B or ser ia l). 2. T urn the camera on and turn the c amera mode di al to PC PC PC PC . PC mode trans fers con trol of the ca mera to your c omp uter. Seri al ca ble co nnec t i o n Seri al ca ble co nnec t i o n Seri al ca ble co nnec t i o n Seri al ca ble co nnec t i o n USB cable connection USB cable connection USB cable connect ion USB cable connection
Connec ting th e Came ra to Your PC HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 97 3. Start the HP Ph oto Im aging so ftware : ⢠Double -click the C500 C500 C500 C500 Photo Photo Photo Photo Imaging Software Imaging Software Imaging Software Imaging Software icon on your de sktop. OR ⢠Click Star t Start Start Start , Programs Programs Programs Programs , HP HP HP HP PhotoSmart PhotoSmart PhotoSmart PhotoSmart , C500 C500 C50 0 C500 Camera Camera Camera Camera , C500 C500 C500 C500 Photo Photo Photo Photo Imaging So ftware Imaging Softwa re Imaging Software Imaging Softwa re . 4. Click Unload Camera Unload Camera Unload Camera Unload Camera . 5. The photos wil l be sa ved i n the folde r listed in the Save m y images to Save m y images to Save m y images to Save m y images to se ction. If you want to change the locatio n of thi s fold er, cli ck the browse (...) browse (... ) browse (... ) browse (... ) but ton and choose a new f older. 6. If you wa nt to c reate a sub-fo lder ba sed on the dat e and ti me, s elect In new sub-fol der In new sub-fol der In new sub-fol der In new sub-fol der . A new folde r will be cr eated wi thin th e folder show n i n the Save my images to Save my imag es to Save my imag es to Save my imag es to section. Note: Once you are fa mili ar with the dow nload p rocess, you can dele te photos f rom the camera a fter th ey are sa ved on your computer. Select Delete all imag es from camera after Delete all images from camera after Delete all images from camera after Delete all images from camera after download download download download . 7. Cli ck Start Start Start Start . 8. Click Ye s Ye s Ye s Ye s t o c onfir m th at the im ages are being s av ed in th e corr ect folder a nd to downloa d the p hotos.
Connec ting th e Came ra to Your PC HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 9 8 When y ou ha ve fi nished downloa ding yo u ca n: ⢠print your photos ⢠view you r pho tos ⢠share your phot os with fami ly and fr iends on the I nternet Printing Photos The HP Ph oto P rintin g softwa re gives you se veral op tions fo r print ing your pho tos. Y ou can c reate and pri nt albu m pages w ith pho tos of differe nt si zes and o rient atio ns, or m ak e reprints of your ph otos in s tanda rd size s. T o print photos from a PC: T o print photos from a PC: T o print photos from a PC: T o print photos from a PC: 1. Start t he HP Ph oto Ima ging so ftware : ⢠Double -click the C500 C500 C500 C500 Photo Photo Photo Photo Imaging Software Imaging Software Imaging Software Imaging Software icon on your de sktop. OR ⢠Click Star t Start Start Start , Programs Programs Programs Programs , HP HP HP HP PhotoSmart PhotoSmart PhotoSmart PhotoSmart , C500 C500 C50 0 C500 Camera Camera Camera Camera , C500 C500 C500 C500 Photo Photo Photo Photo Imaging So ftware Imaging Softwa re Imaging Software Imaging Softwa re .
Connec ting th e Came ra to Your PC HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 99 2. From the HP Ph otoSma rt C5 00 Photo Imagi ng softw are win dow, cli ck Print Images Print Images Print Images Print Images . The HP Ph otoSm art Photo P rinting window d i splays.
Connec ting th e Came ra to Your PC HP Photo Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 100 3. Open the phot os you wa nt to prin t: ⢠If you h ave alrea dy downloa ded ph otos from the cam era, ope n the fol der wher e the ph otos are sto red. Click Open Open Open Open Files Files Files Files , navigate to the app ropriate fol der, selec t the photo fi les you want to pri nt, and then click OK OK OK OK . ⢠If you have not d ownloaded th e photos fr om the camera yet, co nnect th e came ra to your PC and cl ick Acquir e Acqu ire Acquire Acqu ire Images Images Images Images . See the so ftwareâs Help for details. Note: Acquire Images does n ot save the photo s to your computer âs hard driv e; it di splays a copy for you to v iew and manipulate. Y ou need to ma nually save ea ch ima ge from the soft ware. 4. Choose h ow to u se your p hotos: 5. Place your phot os onto th e album o r rep rints pa ge by dra gging them from the galle ry. Note: Y o u can adj ust t he Expos ure, Colo r, Rota tion , Scalin g and S harpnes s by doubl e-clic king o n a phot o and openin g th e Im age A dj ustm ents w indow . See th e soft war eâ s Help for de tail s. 6. Cli ck th e Prin t Print Print Print button to pr int yo ur pho tos. Note: Fo r compl ete i nformat ion o n the HP Photo Pr inting softwa re feat ures, c lick Help Help Help Help . ⢠Click th e Album Album Album Album button to crea te albu m pages. ⢠Select the layout, page size and page o rientati on, th en clic k OK OK OK OK . ⢠Click th e Prints Prints Prints Prints button to cre ate st andard s ized rep rints of your photos. ⢠Select th e layou t an d page si ze, t hen cl ick OK OK OK OK .
Conne c ting t he Camer a to Your Macinto sh HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 101 Connecting the Camera to Y our Macintosh System Requirements If you wa nt to c onn ect your HP PhotoS mart C500 Digi tal C am er a to a Macintosh, you r co mp u te r s y stem mu st m eet the foll owing requ irements : Installing the Software 1. Insert the HP P hotoSm art CD int o your compute râs CD-R OM drive. 2. Double- click the CD ic on on t he deskt op. 3. Sel ect your lan guage by d ouble-c lickin g the lang uageâ s folde r. Compone nt Compone nt Component Compone nt Minim um Min imum Minimu m Minim um Rec omme nded Recommen ded Recommende d Recommen ded Processor Power P C, 120 MH z Power PC, 2 33 MHz or bet ter Memory ( R AM) 16 MB 64 MB or more Free hard d isk space 32 MB 64 MB or more Video di splay 640x480, 256 colors 1024x76 8, 16 bi t or hi gher CD-ROM 4x or better same Oper ati ng syst em Mac OS 8.6 same Port USB same
Conne c ting t he Camer a to Your Macinto sh HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 102 4. Double-clic k Digita Desktop I nstaller Digita Desktop I nstaller Digi ta Desktop I nstalle r Digita Desktop I nstaller . 5. Click Contin ue Contin ue Continue Contin ue , and then fo llow th e ins truc tions on th e scre en. Connecting the Camera T o connec t the ca mera to your Ma cintosh , use th e US B cabl e. T o connect the cam era to yo ur Macintosh: T o connect the cam era to yo ur Macintosh: T o connect the cam era to yo ur Macintosh: T o connect the cam era to yo ur Macintosh: 1. Pl ug the r ound en d of th e USB ca ble int o t he cam era. 2. Plug t he othe r end o f the ca ble in to the U SB por t on your comp uter. Camera con nectio n Camera con nectio n Camera con nectio n Cam era co nnect ion Comp uter connec tio n Com put er co nnec t io n Com p ut er co nn ec t i o n Com put er co nnec t io n
Conne c ting t he Camer a to Your Macinto sh HP Photo Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 103 Downloading Ph otos Downlo adin g is the proce ss of t ransfe rring ph otos fro m the c ameraâ s memory ca rd to your com puter. Before you can do wnload ph otos to your co mputer, you need t o install the software o n your Macintos h. See âInstall ing the Softwar eâ on p a ge 101 for det ail s. F or fast d own lo ad ing, it is rec ommend ed th at you u se a memory ca rd read er, su c h as the Sa nDisk Imag eMate (available at www .hpshopping.com ) to save photo f iles on your computer. See â Using a Card R eaderâ on page 106 for more information. Note: T o conserve b attery power, us e an A C power adapt er when yo u are do wnloadi ng photos to your computer. T o down load photos: T o down load photos: T o down load photos: T o down load photos: 1. Connect the camera to your compute r using the USB cable. 2. T urn the camera on and turn the c amera mode di al to PC PC PC PC . 3. Open the HP Phot oSmart C5 00 HP PhotoSmar t C500 HP PhotoSmar t C500 HP PhotoSmar t C500 folder on your co mputerâs hard driv e. Note: If you in stalled the soft ware in a fol der other than t he def ault fo lder, na vigate t o that folder. 4. Open the Dig ita Desk top Digita De sktop Dig ita Desk top Digita De sktop folder, then dou ble -c li ck Digita Deskto p Digita Des ktop Digi ta Desktop Digita Des ktop .
Conne c ting t he Camer a to Your Macinto sh HP Photo Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 104 5. Click Connec t Connec t Connec t Connec t . 6. Choose Digita C amera (US B) Digita C amera (USB) Digita C amera (USB) Digita C amera (USB) an d click OK OK OK OK . 7. Download the photo s. Only t he singl e phot os in the curre nt window can be down loaded. If you w ant to downlo ad an entire gr oup or series of photos, dou ble-clic k the p hoto that represents th e group or seri es and display the grou p or seri es in a new wi ndow. If you want to d ownlo ad all the phot os from your c amera: ⢠First, downloa d the si ngle ph otos in t he cur rent win dow. Select Copy All Im ages to D isk Copy All Im ages to D isk Copy All Im ages to D isk Copy All Im ages to D isk from the View View View View menu. ⢠Then, do wnload each of the Burs t, Tim elapse, and grou ped ph otos. O p en eac h group or series, one at a time, by d ouble- click i n g on th e phot o that r epres e nts the g roup or serie s. Selec t Copy All I m ages to D i sk Copy All I m ages to Di sk Copy All Im ages to Di sk Copy All I m ages to Di sk from the View View View View menu. If you want to d ownlo ad only s elect ed phot os from yo ur ca mera: ⢠Press th e Sh i ft k ey on your k eyboard and c lick on the ph ot os you w an t to d own lo ad. S el ect Copy Selected Copy Selecte d Copy Selecte d Copy Selecte d Imag es to Disk Imag es to Disk Imag es to Disk Imag es to Disk from the View View View View menu. ⢠T o select p hotos within a group or se ries, dou ble-c lick the photo t h at rep resents th e gro up or se ries to display the photo s in a n ew window and then sel ect photos for downloading . 8. Choose a fo lder w here you want th e photo s to be s aved. C lick Sele ct Select Select Select . The photos are sa ved on your c omputer.
Conne c ting t he Camer a to Your Macinto sh HP Photo Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 105 Printing Photos Y ou can use t he Digita softwa re for printi ng thum bnai ls or fu ll-s ized co pies of yo ur photos, or c opies o f sever al photos o n an al b um p age. I f yo u nee d to p ri nt you r p hoto s in other size s, o r i f yo u need to manip ul at e you r ph ot os, use cr eative p hoto p rinting software. T o print photos: T o print photos: T o print photos: T o print photos: 1. Connect the c amera to yo ur c omputer us in g the USB c able. Se e â Conn ect in g the Camera t o Y our Macint oshâ on page 101 for detai ls. 2. T urn the camera on and turn the c amera mode di al to PC PC PC PC . 3. Start the Digi ta Deskto p soft ware. 4. Click Connec t Connec t Connec t Connec t . 5. Choose Digita C amera (US B) Digita C amera (USB) Digita C amera (USB) Digita C amera (USB) an d click OK OK OK OK . 6. Select the photos you want to print .
Printi ng Photo s Without a Co mput er HP Photo Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 106 7. Print the p hotos. ⢠If you wa nt to p rint th umbna ils of your photos, sele ct Print Print Print Print from the File File Fil e File menu. ⢠If you wa nt to pr int a full-sized photo, doubl e-click o n the photo, th en se lect Print Print Print Print from the File File File File menu. ⢠If you wa nt to pr int several diffe rent photos on a n album page, select Print Album Print Album Print Album Print Album from the File File File File menu. ⢠Choos e the nu mber o f rows and col umns, and s elect Fine Fine Fine Fine quality for the best quali ty prints . ⢠If you do not want the fil enames to app ear bel ow the p hotos, d eselec t Sh ow Filena mes Show File names Show Filena mes Show File names . ⢠Click Print Print Print Print . 8. Choose the prin t setti ngs, and the n click Print Print Print Print . Printing Photos Without a Computer If you r printe r has a slot for a Co mpactF lash me mory card, such as t he HP Phot oSmart P1000 /P1100 pri nter d oes, you ca n print your phot os dir ectly from the m emory card. See your p rinterâ s docu mentat ion f or detail s. The HP Pho toS ma rt C500 Digita l C ame ra lets you create Di gi ta l Prin t Order Forma t (DPO F) fi les to pre-s el ect which photos t o print and how many c opies you n eed. Using a Card Reader If you have a Co mpactF lash memor y card read er, su ch a s the SanD isk Imag eMate (a vaila b le at www.hp shoppi ng.c om) you can view an d save p hoto fi les on your com puter . Conne ct the card r eader t o your computer, and in sert the me mory card i nto the card rea der. Y ou can use the memory c ard just a s you would use a floppy disk. See your c ard r eaderâ s documen tation for detai ls.
Usi ng a Dig ita l Pr int Orde r Forma t (DPO F) Fi le HP Photo Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 107 Using a Digital Print Order F ormat (DPOF) File A DPOF fil e is a fi le that you create usi ng your digita l came ra. It i s stored on the memory ca rd and co ntains inform atio n such as wh ic h p h oto s a re sel e c ted a nd ho w m a ny of e a ch p hoto is to b e p r in ted. F or example, w h en you gather wi th fa mily a nd friend s to v iew your ph otos, you coul d create a DPOF fil e con taining re ferences of photo s they wan t to print. Some printe rs can read a DPOF file fro m the memo ry card so th at you do not h ave to re-sel ect the photos t o print. Note: If you delete a photo t hat is referen ced in a DP OF file o n the memory ca rd, you need t o recrea te the DP OF file befo re print ing the photos directl y from the memo ry card. T o create a D POF file: T o create a D POF file: T o create a DPOF file: T o create a D POF file: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e DPO F DPOF DPOF DPOF menu. Y ou can cho ose to: ⢠Add cu rrent Add current Add current Add current - add the cu rrent ph oto t o the DPOF file . ⢠Add a ll Add all Add all Add all - add al l the ph otos s tored on the mem ory car d to the DPOF file. If you h ave mark ed your ph otos (see â Markin g Photos â on pa ge 70), you can: ⢠Add marked Add mark ed Add mark ed Add mark ed - add mark ed photos to t he DP OF file.
Usi ng a Dig ita l Pr int Orde r Forma t (DPO F) Fi le HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 1 08 4. Use the 4- way ar row button to scrol l to th e optio n you wan t to sele ct. 5. Press the Sele ct Select Sele ct Select button (l eft soft k ey). 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to se lect the nu mber of copies yo u wa nt to print . 7. Press the Add Add Add Add button ( left s oft k ey) . 8. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) to exit the menus . T o del ete a DPOF file: T o del ete a DPOF file: T o del ete a DPOF file: T o del ete a DPOF file: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way arrow butto n to scroll to th e DPOF DPOF DPOF DPOF menu, the n scr oll down to Dele te form Delete fo rm Delete form Delete fo rm . 4. Press the Sele ct Select Sele ct Select button (l eft soft k ey). 5. Press the Delet e Delete Delete Delete button (left soft k ey). 6. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus. Tip: If you wa nt to see t he file structur e of your memo ry card, yo u can use a memory card reader just as you would a remov able di sk dr iv e to v iew or co py the co nt ents of a memor y c ard. See â Us ing a Card Readerâ on page 106 for more infor m ation.
JetSendi ng Ph oto s HP Photo Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 109 JetSending Photos HP JetSe nd allows for fas t, wi reless tran sfer . Y ou can t ransf er ph otos from the camer a to any Je tSend cap able d evic e. If your p ri nte r s up port s H P JetSen d i nf ra red, su c h as the HP PhotoSm a rt P 10 00/P 1100 printer, you can t ransfer your photo s direct ly from the ca mera to the printer. See your pri nterâs docum entat ion fo r more i nforma tion. If you tran sfer B urst, T ime lap se, or grouped pho tos, c lose or coll apse the gr oup or serie s to tr ansfer all the photos . I f the gr oup or serie s is open or ex panded , only t he cu r rent ph oto wi l l be tr a nsf er red. T o JetSend the curren t pho to: T o JetSend the curren t pho to: T o JetSend the curr en t photo: T o JetSend the curren t pho to: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev or Play Pla y Pla y Pla y . 2. Use the 4- way ar row button to sc roll thro ugh your ph otos un til the photo (or group) yo u want to tra nsfer is disp layed. Note: Fo r info rmatio n on c reating a group of pho tos, see âGroup ing Pho tosâ o n page 75. 3. Set your pri nter or other de vice to recei ve phot os. See t he devi ceâs doc umenta tion for details . 4. Set t he camera and ot her device ab out on e foot a part a nd aim the ca meraâs infrar ed senso r at the deviceâ s infra red sen sor.
JetSendi ng Ph oto s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 110 5. Press the Shar e Share Share Share button. OR Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button and use th e 4-way arr ow but ton to scroll to t he JetSen d JetSen d JetS end JetSen d menu. ⢠Choose to Jet Send the Current Current Current Current phot o or group, or All All All All photos on the memory card. ⢠Pres s the Start Start Start Start button ( left soft key). Infrare d se n so r Share button
JetSendi ng Ph oto s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 111 The HP Ph otoSm art C500 D igital Ca mera i mmediat ely sta rts a JetS end sess i o n, sear ches f o r a comp atible receivin g dev ice and sends the curre nt photo or group o f photo s. While th e conne c tion i s being e stablish ed the c amera âs color LCD says Looking fo r JetS end device Looking fo r JetS end device Looking fo r JetS end device Looking fo r JetS end device . Chec k the other device for not ification that comm uni ca tion ha s be en e sta b li she d . While co nnec ted, a t ransf er st atus ba r displ ays on the c ol or LCD. During th e trans fer, the Photo Quality dia mond ic ons fla sh on the status L CD, and t he red li ght next to the v iewfinde r on the back of the camera blinks. Y ou can cancel the transfer at any ti me by pressing t he Stop Stop Stop Stop bu t ton (center sof t k ey). 6. When you have finished trans m ittin g photo s, press the Exit Exit Exit Exit button (right soft key). HP Phot oSmart P100 0/ P110 0 Color Inkjet Printer HP Phot oSm art C500 Digital Came ra
Transm itting P hotos Between Two Cam eras HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 112 T ransmitting Photos Between T wo Cameras Y ou can use t he HP PhotoSmart C500 Di git al C amer a in fra red port to t ra nsf er photos between you r H P P ho toS mar t C500 Dig ital Camera and anot her H P PhotoS mart (o r oth er comp atibl e) dig ital cam era. T he othe r digi tal ca mera must u se the sta ndar d Digita transm it prot ocol. See the other ca mera âs docu mentation for details. T o se nd photos from y our HP PhotoSm art C500 Digital Ca mera to another camera: T o se nd photos from y our HP PhotoSm art C500 Digital Ca mera to another camera: T o se nd photos from y our HP PhotoSm art C500 Digital Ca mera to another camera: T o se nd photos from y our HP PhotoSm art C500 Digital Ca mera to another camera: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4- way ar row button to sc roll thro ugh your photo s until the photo (or group) you want to tra nsmit is disp layed. 3. Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button. 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to the Tr a n s m i t Tr a n s m i t Tr a n s m i t Tr a n s m i t menu. 5. Press the Send Send Send Send button (lef t soft k ey). The color L CD dis plays the message Receiv ing C amera Read y? Recei ving Ca mera R eady ? Receivin g Camera Read y? Recei ving Ca mera R eady ? 6. Set the other camera to re cei ve ph oto s. See the HP Ph ot oS ma rt C5 00 Digit a l Cam era âs pro ced ur e be low (or see the oth er cam eraâs docume ntatio n for details) . 7. Line up the i nfrared s ensors on the t wo ca meras s o that t hey are f acing ea ch oth er, and set the c ameras about one foot apart.
Transm itting P hotos Between Two Cam eras HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 113 8. Press the Contin ue Conti nue Continue Conti nue b utton (left soft key). The HP Ph otoS mart C5 00 Digita l Camera loo ks for a c ompat ible c amera a nd begi ns to tra nsmit photos. 9. When you have finished trans m ittin g photo s, pr ess the Do ne Done Done Done button (rig ht soft ke y). 10. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) to exit the menus . T o r eceive photos sent fro m another cam era: T o r eceive photos sent fro m another cam era: T o receive ph otos sent from anot her camera : T o r eceive photos sent fro m another cam era: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Tr a n s m i t Tr a n s m i t Tr a n s m i t Tr a n s m i t menu. 4. Press the Receive Receive Receive Receive button (cen ter sof t k ey). The color L CD dis plays the message Waiting for connection W aiting for connection W aiting for connection W aiting for connection . 5. Line up the infr ared s ensors on the two camera s so tha t they a re fac ing each oth er, and set the camera s abou t 1 foot apart. 6. Send th e phot os from t he ot her cam era. S ee the ot her cameraâs d ocumen tati on for deta ils. 7. When all o f the ph otos ha ve been recei ved, pr ess th e Do ne Done Done Done button (rig ht soft ke y). 8. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) to exit the menus .
Using Digita Scripts HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 114 Using Digita Scripts Y our HP PhotoS mart C5 00 Dig ital Camer a comes with Fl ashPoin t T echnol ogy Incor porated âs Dig ita opera ting system. Whenev er you acce ss the men us on the color L CD, you are using the Digita operating syste m. Advanc ed camer a users can downloa d Digita script s to run on the c amera. Thes e scrip ts allo w you t o customi ze the camera âs setting s. T o dow nload D igita sc ripts v isit Fl ashPoi ntâs w eb site at www. fl ashp oi nt .c o m www. fl as hpoi nt .co m ww w. flas hp oi nt .c o m www. fl as hpoi nt .co m .
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 115 Chapter 6 - T roubleshooting and Maintenance Problems and Solutions Prob lem Prob lem Prob lem Probl em Solut io n Solutio n Solutio n Solutio n The ca mera is on bu t when I press a butto n, it does not r espon d. ⢠The camera may b e in sl eep mode to c onserve battery pow er. Try pressing the fla sh or ph oto quality b uttons on the t op of th e camera. ⢠Try turn ing the camera off and then on again. ⢠Try unplug ging th e AC powe r adapt er and remo vin g th e N iMH ba tt erie s, and t hen re in stal li ng them. ⢠Try removi ng all of the power so urces, i nclud ing the coin ba ttery. I am t rying to name a grou p but the ca mera is not r esp ondi ng . ⢠Try using a different group name. The camera does not ac cept gro up nam es that begin w ith BR or TL (regardle ss of lan guage) becaus e these lett ers ar e reserved f or identifyi ng Burst and Timelapse photos on the memory card. T here is an 8 charac ter limi t o n grou p names.
Gettin g Assi stance HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 11 6 Getting Assistan ce When ther e is a prob lem, you hav e several reso urces for finding a solution. Resources in clude H P PhotoSma rt on the Intern et, He lp, an d HP Cu stomer C are. HP PhotoSmart on the Inte rnet Y ou can get pr oject ideas a nd trou bles hooting assi stance, acces s the co mmun ity for um, and g et any updates to softwar e from HP âs PhotoSmart W eb site. Go to www.photosmart.com www.photosm art.com www.photosm art.com www.photosm art.com , and clic k Support Support Support Support . I am searc hing throug h photos by date, and hav e selected the find dates, b ut the c amera is not responding. ⢠Make sure that the Fr om From Fr om From date is prio r or eq ual to the To To To To date. The sta tus LCD is displ aying an error messa ge. ⢠If the ca mera does n ot turn itsel f off, pr ess th e on/of f on/of f on /off on/of f button to turn the c amera of f and t hen on again. The main batteri es are charged but the came ra is not r esp ondi ng . ⢠Check that y ou do no t have an AC power adap ter attach ed to th e camer a. Even if it is not c onnected to a pow er sourc e, the c amera will no t use battery power . Prob lem Prob lem Prob lem Probl em Solut io n Solutio n Solutio n Solutio n
Gettin g Assi stance HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 117 Help If you h ave instal led th e software that came with your HP Ph otoSmar t C500 Dig i tal Camer a, you c an use the Help syst e m for as sist an ce. T he Help c ontain s âho w- toâ i nf orm at ion a s w ell as t roubl eshoo ting s u ggest ions. T o acces s Help on a P C: T o acces s Help on a P C: T o acces s Help on a P C: T o acces s Help on a P C: 1. Start t he HP Ph otoSmart Photo Imaging so ftware . 2. From the ma in windo w, cl ick Help Help Help Help . T o acces s Help on a M acintosh: T o acces s Help on a M acintosh: T o access Help on a Macinto sh: T o acces s Help on a M acintosh: 1. Double- c lick the HP Ph otoSma rt C5 00 Digita l Cam era Hel p folder on the desktop. 2. Double- click the bro wser versi on of Help. Contacting HP Cu stomer Care HP Custom er Care On line Click you r way to a grea t solut ion! Th e HP Phot oSmart W eb site, www.photosmart.co m www.photosmart .com www.photosmart .com www.photosmart .com , is a great plac e to s tart for answers to qu estions about your HP p roduct s. Y ouâll get insta nt acce ss to helpful tips and tr icks, d ownlo adabl e driver s, an d the la test pro duct an d soft ware up datesâ24 hours a day, 7 da ys a week. All a t no charge t o you.
Mainte nanc e HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 118 HP Custom er Care by P hone Lik e most HP customers, youâll probably never ne ed to call us. But if you do, youâll be co nnected t o a servi ce techn ician who spec ializes in your produc t and can he lp you find the answe rs you need. I n an indust ry thatâs known to k eep custome rs waiting, weâre prou d of our quick response timeâm ost cal ls are c onnect ed in u nder thr ee minute s. North Am erica HP Ph otoSm art Custo mer Care: (20 8 ) 376- FO T O (208) 376- FO T O (208) 376- FO T O (208) 376- FO T O (3686) Fo r phone numbers in other cou ntries, go to the HP Ph otoSma rt W eb site, www. photosm art.com www.ph otosm art.com ww w.phot osmar t.com www.ph otosm art.com , an d click th e Assist ance Assist ance Assist ance Assist ance button on th e navigati on bar. Maintenance K eeping th e lens cl ean will hel p you to tak e sharp, c lear ph otos wi th the best pos sible focus. ⢠Using a dry, soft, lint -free clot h, gently w ipe the lens , and stat us an d color L C Ds to clea n off any fin gerprint s and dust .
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 119 Appendix A - Safety, Regulatory , and W arr anty Info rmation Safety Information Using Batte ri es The HP Pho t oSma rt C500 Dig i tal Ca mera co mes wit h th ree AA N iMH batteri es. Do n ot mix old a nd ne w batter ies or bat teries of differ ent types. Follow the battery manufa cturerâs s afety instruc tions. Recycl ing Batte ries Foll ow the bat tery man u f acture r âs disp osal in struct ions o r t he guid eline s reco mmende d for yo ur a rea. Do not incinera te or pu ncture batt eries. Using an AC Po we r Adapt e r Use only an AC power adapte r t hat ha s be en appr oved by H P f or use wi th this came r a. Failur e to do so could c ause dam age or de s troy the c amera and caus e a fi re .
Regulatory Notices HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 120 Regulatory Notices U.S.A. This devi c e com pli es with Part 15 of th e FC C rules. Operat ion is subjec t to the fol l owi ng tw o conditions: (1) t his de vi ce may no t caus e ha rmful inte rferenc e, an d (2) thi s dev ice mu st a ccept a ny in ter ference recei ved, incl udi ng in terfere nce that may cause undesi red opera tion. Canad a This digita l appara tus doe s not exceed the Class B limi ts for radio n oise em issio ns from digital appara tus as s et out in the i nterferenc e-causin g equipment sta ndard e ntitled ìDigita l Apparatus ,î ICES-003 of the Depa rtment of Commu nicati ons. Cet ap parei l numà rique re specte les li mites d e brui ts rad ioÃlect riques a ppli cable s aux ap pareil s num Ãriques de Class B p rescrite s dans l a norme sur le matÃrie l brouill er: ìAppar eils Numà riques, î NMB-003 ÃdictÃe p ar le mini stre de Com munica tions .
Hewlett-P ackard Limited Warr anty Stat ement HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 1 21 Hewlett-Packard Limited W arranty Statement A. Extent of Limited Warran ty 1. Hewl ett-Pa ckard (HP) warrants to the end-user custo m er th at the HP p roducts specif ied above w ill be f ree from defect s in mater ial an d work manship for t he durati on spec ified above, which d uratio n beg ins on the date of purcha se by the custom er. 2. For softw a re pr odu c ts, HP âs l i mi te d warranty appli es onl y to a fa i lu re to e x ecute pr ogramming inst ru ct ion s . HP does no t warra nt that the op erati on of an y produc t will be uninte rrup te d or er ror f re e. 3. HPâs limit ed wa rr an ty co vers only those d efec ts w h ich a ri se a s a res u lt o f no rmal u se o f the p rod u ct, an d do es not cover any othe r probl em s, inclu ding t hose wh ich ari se as a r e sult of : a. Improp er maint enance or modification; b. Software , me dia, p arts, or suppl ies not p rovided or supported b y HP; o r c. Operation ou tside t h e prod uctâs specif icatio ns. 4. For HP pr inter pr oducts, the use of a non-HP ink ca rtridge o r a refilled i nk cartr idge d oes not a ffect either t he warr anty to the cus tomer or any HP suppo rt cont ract wi th the cus tomer . Howev er, if prin ter fai lure or da mage is attr ibut able to the use of a no n-HP or refil led i nk cart rid ge, HP will cha rge it s s tan dard time and mat e ri als charges to se rvi c e the printer for the p articu lar fai lure or damage . 5. If HP rec eives, duri ng the applica ble warranty pe riod, notice of a defect in an y product whic h is covered by HPâ s warranty, HP sh all eith er rep air o r repla ce the d efec tive pr oduct, at HPâs opti on. HP Pro duct HP Pro duct HP Prod uct HP Produ ct Duratio n of Li mited Warranty Duration of Lim ited W arranty Duration of Lim i ted W arran ty Duration of Lim ited W arranty HP Photo Imaging soft ware 90 Days HP PhotoSma r t C500 Di git al Came ra 1 year CompactFl ash memory card 1 year
Hewlett-P ackard Limited Warr anty Stat ement HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 122 6. If HP is unabl e to rep air or rep lace , as applic able, a de fectiv e produc t which is cover ed by HPâs wa rrant y, HP shall , with in a reas onable time a fter bei ng notifi ed of t he defect , refu nd the pu rchas e price for the pro duct. 7. HP shall h ave no obliga tion to repair, repla ce, or refu nd un til the custom er ret urns the d efecti ve produ ct to HP . 8. Any replacemen t produc t may be eith er new or li ke-new , provi ded that it h as funct ionality a t least equal to that of th e produc t being re place d. 9. HP produc ts may contai n remanu fact ur ed part s, comp onent s, or ma t erials equival ent to new in performa nce. 10.HPâs limit ed war ran ty is v alid in any co un try where t he co ver ed HP p roduc t is d istri bute d by HP . Co ntrac ts for a dditi onal warran ty serv ices, su ch as on-site service , are avail able from any auth orized HP serv ice fac ility in c ountri es where the produ ct is di stribu ted by HP or b y an a uthoriz ed impo rter. B. Limita tion s of Warr anty 1. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, NEITHER HP NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLI ERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND , WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE HP PRODUCTS, AND S PECI FICAL LY D ISCL AIM T HE IM PLIED WARR ANT IES OR COND ITIONS OF MERC HANT ABIL ITY, SAT ISFACT ORY QUALITY, AND FITNES S FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. C. Limitati ons o f Li abilit y 1. To t he extent a llow ed by loc al law , the rem edies pr ovide d in this Warran ty Statem ent are t h e cust omerâs so le an d exclusive r emedies. 2. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL L AW, EXCEPT FOR THE OBLIGATIONS SP ECIFICALLY SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT, IN NO EVENT SHALL HP OR ITS THIRD P ARTY SUPPLIERS BE LIA BLE FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTA L, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRA CT, TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY AN D WHETHER ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMA GES. D. Local La w 1. This Warran ty Statemen t gives the cust omer spec ific lega l rights. The cu stomer may al so have other rights which vary from state to state in the United Sta tes, from prov ince to provin ce in Can ada, and from countr y to country el sewhere i n the w orl d.
Hewlett-P ackard Ye ar 2000 W arranty f or Consumer Products D istributed Thro ugh Autho rized Rese llers HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 123 2. To th e exten t that this W arran ty Statem ent is inconsistent with local law, this Wa rrant y Statem ent sha ll be deemed modifi e d to be c o nsis t ent wi th s uc h lo ca l la w. Und e r suc h loc al l aw , c ert ai n di scl aim er s an d l imi ta tion s of this Wa r ra nty Statement may n ot apply to t he customer. Fo r example, some s tates in t he United S tates, as well as some gov ernments outsid e the Un ited Sta tes ( inclu di ng pro vinces in Canad a), may : a. Preclu de the di sclaimer s and limitations in this Warrant y Statem ent fro m limiting the statu tory righ ts of a c onsumer (e.g . the U nited Ki ngdom ); b. Otherwise restrict the ab ility of a man ufacturer to enf orce s uch disc laime rs or li mitati ons; or c. Gran t the customer addit ion al war ranty r ights , sp ecify the dur ati on of implied warr antie s which the manufac turer canno t discla im, or not all ow l imitatio ns on the dur ation o f impl ied warr anti es. 3. FOR CONS UMER TRANSACTIONS IN AU STRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND, THE TERM S IN THIS WARRANTY ST ATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT, OR MODIFY, AND ARE IN ADDITION TO, THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THE HP PRODUCTS TO SUCH CUS TOMERS. Hewlett-Pack ard Y e ar 2000 W arranty for Consumer Products Distributed Through Authorized Resellers Subjec t to all of the terms and lim itatio ns of the H P Limite d Warrant y Statement provi ded with this HP Pr oduct, H P warran ts that this HP Pr oduct wi ll be able to ac curatel y proc ess date d ata (inc luding, but not l imited to , calcu latin g, comparin g, and s equencing) from, into, a nd between the tw entieth a nd twe nty-first ce nturies , and t he years 1999 and 2000, i ncludin g le ap year calcula tions , when used in acc ordan ce wi th t he Prod uct do cument ation provid ed by HP (incl uding a ny instr uction s for instal ling patche s or up grad es), pro vided th at al l other prod ucts (e.g . ha rdware, softwa re, firmw are) used in comb ination w i th such HP P roduct( s) pro perly exch ange da te data with it . The duration of the Y ear 2000 wa rranty exte nds th rough January 31, 200 1.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 124 Appendix B - Ref erenc e Menu Structure This section lists t h e ava ilable m enus a nd thei r option s. Th e menu options are e xplaine d in d etail t hrough out th is Userâs Guide . If you want to acce ss a pa rticula r menu option, use th is tab le to loca te the option quickly. Record (Rec) Mode Menu Menu Menu Menu Opt ion Option Option Option Setting Settin g Se tting Setting Cho ices Choice s Choic es Choice s Default Default De fault Default Media Sett ings St ill Resolution High, Medium, Low High Compression High, Medium, Low Medium Color Full, B&W (Black and White) Full Burst Resolut ion High, Medium, Lo w High Compression High, Medium, Low Medium Color Full, Black an d White Full Burst Rate 1-3 FPS (Frames per seco nd) 2 FPS
Menu St ruc ture HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 125 Menu Menu Menu Menu Opt ion Option Option Option Setting Settin g Se tting Setting Cho ices Choice s Choic es Choice s Default Default De fault Default Media Setti n gs (cont .) Timelapse Resol u tion H igh, Medi u m, Low High Compression High, Medium, Low Medium Color Full, Black an d White Full Int erva l 1, 2 , 3 , 4, 5, 10, 20, 30, 50 mi n, 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 , 12, 24 hr 1 min # Images 2-1 000 10 Phot o Assi st Exposur e EV -1.5 - 1.5 (0.3 in crements) 0 AE Method Matrix, Spot Matrix White B alan c e Auto Auto Daylight Fluorescent Tung sten Flash
Menu St ruc ture HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 126 Menu Menu Menu Menu Opt ion Option Option Option Setting Settin g Se tting Setting Cho ices Choice s Choic es Choice s Default Default De fault Default Preferences LCD Brightness Set Brig ht ness 1-7 4 Capture Eye Start On, Off On Instant Review On, Off Off Flash Auto, On, Off, Red-Eye Auto Self Timer 3, 5, 10, 20, 30 (secon ds) 10 Hand Held On, Off On Coun ter R eset O n, Of f Off Meter Conti nuous AE C ont inuou s AE Auto Exposur e Lock Date & Time Set Date & Time Forma t Depend s on l angua ge Camera Name Enter Camera Name HP C500 General Beep On , Off On Auto Sh uto ff On, Off On
Menu St ruc ture HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 127 Review (Rev) Mode Menu Menu Menu Menu Opt ion Option Option Option Setting Settin g Se tting Setting Cho ices Choice s Choic es Choice s Default Default De fault Default Edit Delete Group Create/Add Groups that you have created Protect JetSe nd Current /Mar ked All DPOF Add current/marked Add to DPOF 1 -50 Add all Add to DP OF 1-50 Delete f orm Transmit Camera to Camera Send Recei ve Find B y Da te Sele ct Dat e Curr en t dat e By Cate g or y Select Ca te go r y Landsca p e, Vacat ion , Friends, Family, Pets, Work, Triangle, Square, Circ le Preferences Language Select La nguage E nglis h, Fra nçais, Italiano, Españo l, Deutsch Depend s on whe re you boug ht the came ra
Menu St ruc ture HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 128 Play Mode Menu Menu Menu Menu Opt ion Option Option Option Setting Settin g Se tting Setting Cho ices Choice s Choic es Choice s Default Default De fault Default Play Setti ngs Slide show Con tent All, Category All Dura tion 3 0, 45 , 60 s ec 3 0 sec Loop On, Off On Playba ck Rate Ti melap se 30, 45 , 60 sec 30 se c Burs t 30, 45 , 60 s ec 30 sec Gro up 30, 45, 6 0 s ec 30 sec Vid eo Video O ut PAL, NTSC De pend s on w here yo u boug ht the came ra
Icons HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 129 Icons Color L CD Mode Mode Mode Mode Icon Icon Icon Icon Meanin g Meaning Mean ing Meaning Location Loca tion Loc ation Loca tion Rec (Re c or d) S till The se m edia se ttings i cons ap pear on the lef t of the lower overlay b ar. Only one of th e three icons appe ars at a time, de pending on whether yo u are tak ing a Still, Burst, or Timelapse photo. Bur st Timel aps e Self- timer The Self- timer an d Mac ro mo de ic ons a ppe ar in the center of th e lower overl ay bar. If th e i cons appea r in color, th e sett ing is active. If th ey appear in gray , th e setting is inactive. Mac ro mod e Digi ta l Zoo m This icon ap p ears o n the ri ght of th e uppe r overl ay ba r . The i con only app ear s if you have a ct iva ted d ig ital zoom . Memory Card Status This icon appears on the left of t he upper overlay bar and i ndica t es how mu ch s pa c e is av aila b le on th e memory card.
Icons HP Phot o Smart C500 Di git al Camera Us er â s Guide 130 Mode Mode Mode Mode Icon Icon Icon Icon Meanin g Meaning Mean ing Meaning Location Loca tion Loc ation Loca tion Rec (con t.) Memor y Card In ser ted These ic ons app ear at t he top of th e Statu s menu . With the camera in Rec mode, pres s the Statu s b ut t on (right soft k ey) to s ee the Status m enu. Coin Batt ery Media Sett ings menu These icons a ppear when you press the Menu button. They indica te the menu s that are available . Phot o As s ist menu Prefere nces menu Rev (Revie w) Still These medi a settings ico ns appear in t he photo information. On ly one of the icon s appears a t a time, depending on whethe r the pho to you are vie wing is a Stil l, Burst, or Timelap se photo, o r a photo r eprese nting a grou p of phot os. Grouped Imag e s Bur st Timel aps e
Icons HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 131 Mode Mode Mode Mode Icon Icon Icon Icon Meanin g Meaning Mean ing Meaning Location Loca tion Loc ation Loca tion Rev (cont .) Find The Find i con appea rs in the p hoto information to indi cate that th e phot o you are viewin g is th e r esult of a search by date and time , or by ca tegory. Prot ected The P r otect ed icon appear s in the p h oto i nf orma ti on to indi cate that th e ph ot o you are viewi ng is prote cted. DPOF T he DPOF icon appears in the photo info rmatio n to indi cate that there is a DPO F fil e on th e memo r y car d. Edit menu These icons appear when y ou press the Menu button. They indica te the menu s that are available . JetSend menu DPOF m enu Transmit menu Find menu Prefere nces menu Play Play Sett ings menu This icon appears when yo u press th e Menu butt on. It indi c ates th e menu th at is a vaila ble.
Icons HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 132 Categories Icon Icon Icon Icon Meaning Meaning Me aning Meaning Location Location Locati on Location Landscape These ico ns appear in the photo informat ion to in dicate th at the ph oto you are viewing is par t of a category. Vacat ion Friends Family Pets Work Triangle Square Circle
Icons HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 13 3 Status L CD Icon Icon Icon Icon Meaning Meaning Me aning Meaning NiMH ba tteries empty NiMH ba tteries ful ly charge d NiMH batteries partially charged Autom atic flas h No flash Flash Automat ic flash with red-eye r eduction E-mail ph oto quality Basic ph oto qua l ity Fine ph oto quality Super -fine phot o qu ali ty Memory card installed No me mory ca rd in stal led
Error M essages HP Phot o Smart C500 Di git al Camera Us er â s Guide 134 Error Messages Color L CD Status L CD Camera err or messages numbered Ec0-9, Eca, a nd Ed0-6 a ppear on the s tatus L CD. If the camera d oesnât turn off: 1. T ry turnin g the ca mera of f and th en on again. 2. T ry unplugg ing the A C power ada pter or removing the NiM H batt eries, a nd then reinstal ling th em. 3. If the erro r p ersis ts, co ntac t H P Cust omer Ca re. Mess age Mess age Messag e Mess age What you shou ld do What yo u should do What yo u should do What yo u should do Not Read y Wait un til the message disa ppears. No Flash Card Inse rt a memory card. No Space On Card I nse rt a new memory card or delete pho tos from the current memory card. Processing Pictures Wait until the message disappears. Slow Shut ter Inc r e ase light on the su bje ct or turn on t he f l ash , o r turn Hand Held off . Or u s e a tripod with the camera, or hold the ca mera steady. No Focus Zo om out, mov e the came ra fa rt her away from the s ubj ect, or increa se the a mo unt of li ght on the sub ject.
Camera Spec if icatio ns HP Phot o Smart C500 Di git al Camera Us er â s Guide 135 Camera Specifications Resolu tion Resolu tion Resolu tion Resolu tion 2 megapi xels (160 0x1200 pixel s) Exposure Exposure Exposure Exposure ISO 80 Memory card Memory card Memory card Memory card 16 MB C ompactF lash Lens syst em Lens syst em Lens system Lens syst em Wide: F2.8 /F6.3 Tele: F4 .6/F 9.0 6.9mm to 20.7mm focal len g th (equivalent t o 38mm t o 115mm format) Fe at u r e s Fe at u r e s Fea t ur e s Fe at u r e s Co lor 2-i n LCD ; 3x op tical zoom, 2x digita l zoom ; fas t autof ocus; b urst m ode; accep ts 37m m lens filt ers and lenses Inte rface Inte rface Inte rface Inte rface HP JetS end, USB, Serial Power supply Power supply Power supply Power supply 3 AA Ni MH recha rgea ble batt eries an d batte ry rech ar ger, or AC adap ter (optio nal); coin ba ttery inclu ded in camera Dimens ions Dimens ions Dimension s Dimens ions 6 x 3.4 x 2.7 in (153 x 85 x 64 mm) Wei g ht Wei g ht We i g h t Wei g ht 0.82 lb (370 gm) withou t batte ries
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 136 Glossary 4-way arro w button A 4-way controll er used to scrol l through and mak e selecti ons from th e color LCD me nu option s. AC pow er adapte r An adapte r that co n nects you r camer a to a power source (s uch as a wal l outle t or powe r stri p) to co nserve battery power. Onl y use an AC power adap ter that has been approve d by HP for use with this camer a (adapter par t number C7315A). Auto exposure The camer a auto ma ti c ally adj u sts the expo sure for di ffer e nt lighti ng condit ions. T here a re two A E me thods, M atrix a nd Spot. M atrix ca lcul ates the exposure b y takin g the av erage of se veral points of light in the photo . Spot calculates the exposure by r eadin g the light f rom one sm all spot in the cent er of the photo. Auto foc us The cam era au tomati cally adj usts th e focus of the c amera when you p ress the shutt er but ton 1/ 2 way dow n. Burst ph otos A seri es of ph otos take n in r apid suc cession when you press a nd hold th e shutte r but ton down. You c an take up to f our photo s at a rate of one to th ree frames per s econd in this mod e. Camer a mode d i al The control us ed to s el ect on e of the f our came ra mode s âRec ( Record ), Rev (Review) , Play, and PCâth at d etermin e which f eatures and men u options are availabl e.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Di git al Camera Us er â s Guide 137 Coin battery A small batte ry shaped like a coin whi ch is u sed to reta in the c amer aâs date a nd time in format ion. Color LC D The Liqu id Crys tal Dis play (LCD) screen on the ba ck of the camer a that displays your photo s and the camer a me nus used to se t pre fere nces and s elect opti ons. Color LC D on/ off but ton Th e butto n on th e back o f the ca mera u sed to tu rn the color LCD on a nd off. Compa ctFlash m emory c ard The type of memo ry card used by the H P PhotoSmart C5 00 Dig ital Camer a. See also â Memory card.â Com press ion A techn ique of cond e nsin g color an d deta il infor mati on to de crea se the s ize of a photo file and sav e space on the m emory card. Compu ter c onnect ion A port u sed to conne ct the d i gital camera by a cable to a co mputer . Digital z oom A type o f zoom used to d igitall y crop o r frame the photo by enla rging th e center p ortion of th e image au tomati cally in the ca mera . Exposure Valu e A number repre senting the available c ombinations of shutter speeds and apertures t hat give t he same expos ure effect und er simila r scene brightn ess and light ing co nditio ns . Eye Start A featur e that b rings th e cam era out of sle ep mode and star ts adjustin g the exposure whe n your eye is close to the viewfi nder. Eye Sta rt uses two sensors locate d nex t to th e vie wfind er. Flash A brig ht burs t of li ght from t he camera whic h illu mina tes a su bject w hen th e surroun ding light is to o dim t o take a quality photo. Flash bu tton The bu tton on t he top of the ca mera u sed to change the fla sh setti ng.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 13 8 Flas h with red-ey e red u ction A flash s ettin g that reduce s the oc curr ence of red-e y e in pho tos of pe ople or animal s. It does thi s by fla shing t wice. Infr ared s ensor An infr ared t r ansmi tter a nd rece iver on the fr ont of the c amera th at is used to send or receive photos b etwee n your di gital c amera and ano ther camera, or a printe r wi th H P Jet Send capa bility . JetSend HPâs fa st, wirel ess te chnolo gy that a llows yo u to tra nsfer ph otos f rom your camer a to a c ompat ible p rinter o r compu ter usi ng infra red tr ansmi ssion . LCD Liquid C rystal D ispla y. See âC olor LC Dâ and â Statu s LCD.â Lens One or more pieces of optical gla ss used for formi ng a shar p image. Macro A mod e used for taking close-up pho tos of a subjec t. Main batteries The pri mary source of power for you r digital camera wh en it is not p lugged int o a wall o utlet w ith an AC pow er ada pter. Th e HP PhotoSm art C500 Digit al Came ra uses three AA Nick el Meta l Hydri de (NiMH ) batter ies. Memory c ard The s torage me dium in a digital camer a that hold s the photos you ha ve tak en. It is analogo us to the fil m in a re gular camera. T he HP P hoto Smart C5 00 Digital Camera takes o nly Type 1 Compa ctFlash cards. Menu A list of options from whi ch you can ma ke select ions to cha nge the wa y your camer a opera tes. The HP PhotoSm art C5 00 Digit a l Camera co ntains severa l menus th at orga nize option s by func tion. Menu bu tton T he on/o ff butto n used t o displ ay or hide the cam era me nus on t h e colo r LCD.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Di git al Camera Us er â s Guide 139 Mode The s electe d stat e of the c ame ra that de termines what t ype s of acti vities you can c urrentl y perfor m and which menus you ca n acces s on the colo r LCD. T he HP Pho toSmart C 500 Digita l Cam era has f our modes: Recor d, Review , Play , and PC. NTSC A video forma t general ly used i n coun tries su ch as US A, Can ada, an d Japan (standa rd devel op ed by th e Nati ona l Tele vi si on Sta nd ar ds Co mm i tt ee). On/off butt on The button t hat tu rns the camera power on and off. Opti cal zo om A type of zoo m that c hang es the fi eld o f view and magn ifi cat ion of the l ens by using the zoom cont rol to m ove differ ent lens group s withi n the lens t o cha nge its o verall focal leng th. Overlay b ars Bars that ap pear a t the to p an d bottom o f the color LC D to pro vide you with informa tion ab out th e camer a settin gs and tel l you the functions of th e soft keys. See al so âSof t key s.â PAL The vid eo forma t (short for Pha se Altern ating Li ne) gen erally use d in coun tries in Europe . PC mode The cam era mo de to s elect when you connect the camera to a computer. Photo qua lity butt on The butto n us ed to cycl e throu gh the four phot o quality settings. Play mod e T he camer a mo de used t o view you r pho tos on the col or LCD or a telev ision screen a nd to cr eate sli de shows. Record mo de The cam era mo de us ed to take photos. Red-eye reduct ion See âFlas h with re d-eye red uction. â
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 140 Resoluti on The number of pixel s that ma ke up t he photo . A hi gher reso lution setting captures more i nformatio n (more pixels) when a photo is take n. Review mode The camer a mode u sed to v iew your photos on the color LC D or a tel evision scree n. Self -time r A timer that de lays the re lease of the shutte r by a sp ecif ied numb er of s econ ds so tha t you ca n take a photo of your self or i nclud e yourself in a p osed gr oup photo. Self-tim er light A l ight on the fron t of the c ame ra that indic ates the self-tim er is o n and the shutte r wil l release au to m at ic ally aft er th e spec if ie d amount of time ha s elapsed. Share button The bu tton that star ts tra nsmi ttin g photos via infr ared f rom yo ur di gital cam era to a rece iving device su ch as a prin ter. S ee also âJe tSen d. â Shutter b utton The 2-stage b utton yo u pr ess to release t he cam eraâs sh utter a nd a djust the focus and expos ure bef ore ta king a p hoto. Status LC D The displ ay screen on the t op of th e camer a that shows the camera âs statu s, including the battery level , memory card status, number of photos remaining, and cu rrent p hoto qu ality a nd flash sett ings. Still ph otos Single photos taken ea ch tim e you p ress the shutter button . Timelap se pho tos A se ries of p hotos ta ken a t preset time inter vals when you pre ss the sh utter button. You can specify th e numbe r of pho tos you wan t the ca mera to take, a s well as the am ount of ti me betw een phot os (fro m 1 minute to 24 hou rs ). Tripod mount Connec tion po int on the b ottom of the cam era for at tachi ng a trip od.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 141 Video ou t A port used to conne ct the d igital camera to a televisi on with a cabl e. Viewfin der The w indow you look th roug h to f rame you r subj ect w hen taki ng a photo. White bala nc e T he a mou nt of adjustme nt m a de by th e c a me ra to th e co lo r balance to ma ke a true whi te in different lighting condi tions. Zoom To incre ase or dec rease the size o f an obj ect as i t appe ars in the viewfi nder (o r chan ge the ap parent distan ce of a n objec t) be fore taki ng a p hoto. T he HP PhotoS mart C5 00 Digita l Camer a has t wo type s of zoom : optic al and digital .
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 142 Index A AC powe r ad apte r using 2 9 Adapter for PAL TV connect 91 Assist ance 117 Auto shut off 64 turn in g on an d off 6 5 Automa tic e xposu re adjustin g 57 B Batte ries and the color LCD 20 chargi ng 11 checkin g the level of charge 9 instal ling 7 replac ing 7 , 8 safety i nformatio n 119 saving by using an AC pow er adapter 29 what ki nd to us e 7 , 8 Beep 65 Black a nd whi te photos 42 Brightness of co lor LCD 20 Burst ph otos changin g the settings 38 collaps ing 81 expanding 80 not enou gh memo ry 37 taking 36 viewi ng 86 C Camera adjusti ng the se ttings 42 auto s hutoff 64 beep 65 changing the language 27 chec king t he stat us 32 cleani ng 11 8 connec ting to a Macin tosh 102 connec ting to a PC 95 connec ting to a televis ion 91 exposure 56 Eye Start 62 flash 43
Index HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 143 hand h eld 62 langua ge 27 menus 23 modes 17 parts 3 photo qu ality 45 self- timer 53 setting up 5 specif icatio ns 1 35 turn in g on an d off 1 5 viewf ind er indi cator light 18 warra nty 121 whit e b alanc e 58 wri st str ap 5 zoom 50 Card reader 106 Categori es addin g photos to 73 using to searc h for pho tos 82 Chargi ng the ba tter ies 1 1 Cleani ng th e c amera 11 8 Closing groups 80 Coin b attery checking the level of charge 10 instal ling 8 Collaps ing burst ph otos 81 timel apse p hotos 81 Color LCD adjust in g the brightn ess 20 battery power 20 chec ki ng th e camer a stat us 33 cleani ng 11 8 icons 1 29 meanin g of status infor m at ion 34 overla y bars 21 Review mode 69 using 19 Compress ion photo qua lity settin g 45 Connectin g camera to a Ma cin tosh 1 02 camera to a PC 95 camer a to a te levi sion 91 Counter rese t 63 Custom er Care 117 D Date setting 24 using to sea rch for ph ot os 81
Index HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 144 Dayli ght adjusti ng white bal ance fo r 59 Dela y sett ing fo r a uto s hutoff 64 setting for the s elf-tim er 55 Dele ting photo s in Revi ew mode 71 using grou ps 77 using Pl ay mode 89 Digital Print Order Form at. Se e DPOF f iles. Digita l zo om compar ed to opt ical zoom 50 using 5 1 Downl oadi ng photos t o a Mac intosh 103 photos t o a PC 96 DPOF files creatin g 107 delet ing 108 E Error mess ages 134 Expanding burst p hotos 80 timelaps e photos 8 0 Exposure 56 Eye Start 62 F Findin g photo s 81 Flash changin g the sett ings 43 Fluoresce nt li ght adjust ing whi te balan ce for 59 Format setting for da te and tim e 24 Format memory cards 14 G Groups adding photos 78 closin g 80 creat ing 76 dele ting ph otos 77 openin g 79 removing 76 using to o rganiz e photos 75 viewi ng 86 H Hand he ld 62 Help 117
Index HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 145 HP Ph ot oSma rt Customer Care 117 Inter ne t addr ess 116 I Icons on th e c olor LCD 129 on the s tatus LCD 133 Inca nde sce nt light adjusti ng white bal ance fo r 59 Infrared rece iving p hoto s from a nothe r camer a 113 send ing photos to another c amera 112 send ing to an other device 109 Instal ling batte ries 7 memory card 11 softwar e on a M acintosh 101 soft ware o n a PC 95 Instant Review 6 0 turn in g on an d off 6 0 using 61 using when taki ng a ph oto 36 using with bu rst pho tos 37 using with tim elapse photos 40 Intern et addres s for H P PhotoS mart 116 Interval setting for ti melap se phot os 41 J JetSend 109 L Language changi ng 27 LCD brightness 20 color 19 , 33 stat us 32 Lens cleani ng 11 8 Lens cover attachi ng the l eash 5 Lighting adjusti ng expo sure for variat ions i n 56 adjust ing whit e balance f or vari ation s in 59
Index HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 146 M Macint osh connec ting the camera to 102 down loadin g photos to 103 instal ling s oftwa re 101 printin g photos 105 system requiremen ts 101 Macro mode 52 Marking ph otos 70 Matrix m ethod for automa tic exposu re 57 Media Settings menu Burst 38 Timelapse 4 0 Memory card rea der 106 Memory card s checking the status 13 formatti ng 14 instal ling 11 print ing photos from 106 Menus overview 23 Play mode 128 Record mod e 12 4 Review mode 127 Modes 1 7 N Not enough memory when ta king B urst ph otos 37 when ta king Timelap se pho tos 39 NTSC sele cting th e video o utpu t format 90 using to c onnec t to a te levi sion 91 when to use th is setti ng 91 O Opening gro ups 79 Optical zoom compare d to di gital zoom 50 using 51 Organizi ng phot os using categories 73 using groups 75 Overlay bars icons 1 29 location on col or LCD 2 1 using 21 Overview taking pho tos 30 viewin g photo s 67
Index HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 147 P PAL sele cting th e video output fo rmat 90 using to con nect to a tele vision 91 when to use th i s se tt ing 9 1 PC connec ting the camera t o 95 downlo ading photos to 96 instal ling s oftwa re 95 printin g photos 98 system requiremen ts 94 PC mode color LCD 20 overview 17 Phot o As sist menu Exposure 56 White Ba lanc e 59 Phot o Im aging sof tware warra nty 121 Photo qu al i ty adjusti ng the setti ngs 45 Phot os black and white 42 categ orizin g 73 collaps ing burst an d tim el apse 81 dele ting grou ped 77 dele ting in Review m ode 71 dele ting usi ng Pl ay mode 89 downloa ding to a Ma cint osh 103 downloa ding to a PC 96 expanding burst and time lapse 80 findin g 81 grouping 75 JetSending 109 marking 70 overvi ew of how to ta ke 30 playing back 86 printi ng from memo ry card 10 6 printi ng us ing a Macin tosh 105 printing us ing a PC 98 protecti ng 72 searching by c ategory 8 2 search in g by da te 81 sele cting in Revie w mode 69 sharing 93 taking 30 transm i tti ng be tween cameras 112 viewi ng on a t elevi sion 92 viewing using Play mode 84 zooming in on while vi ewing 85 Play b ack setting th e rate 86 using to v iew a s lide show 86
Index HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 1 48 Play m ode color LCD 20 color LCD icons 1 31 compared t o Review mo de for viewi ng photos 68 menus 128 overl ay bars 22 overview 17 viewin g a si n gle p h oto 84 Powe r camera âs sle ep mode 16 turn in g the ca mera on and o f f 1 5 using an AC adap ter 29 Prin ti ng phot os from a memory card 106 using a Ma cintosh 105 using a PC 98 via JetS end 109 Prote cting phot os 72 R Record mod e color LCD 20 color LCD icons 129 menus 124 overl ay bars 22 overview 17 Regula tory noti ces 120 Replacing batterie s 7 , 8 Requir ements batterie s 7 , 8 Macint osh 1 01 PC 94 Resolution photo qua lity settin g 45 Review mode categor izing ph otos 73 color LCD 20 color LCD ic o ns 130 compare d to Play mode for viewi ng pho tos 68 dele ting ph otos 71 marking ph ot os 70 menus 127 overview 17 sele cting photos 69 unmarkin g photos 71 using 69 Reviewing ph ot os Instant Review 36 using a television 92 S Safety i nformatio n 119 Scripts for the camer a 114
Index HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 149 Sear chi ng for ph ot os 81 Sele cting p hotos i n Revi ew mode 69 Self-t imer setting the delay 55 using 5 3 Setti ng th e date an d tim e 2 4 Setti ngs adjustin g 42 auto shut off 64 beep 65 black and white 42 counte r rese t 6 3 exposure 56 Eye Start 62 flash 43 hand h eld 62 Instant Review 6 0 photo qu ality 45 self- timer 53 whit e b alanc e 58 zoom 50 Setup camera 5 Shutof f automat ic 64 Sleep mod e overview 16 setting th e auto sh utoff times 64 using eye start 62 Slide show s creating a nd play ing 87 Small obj ects using mac ro mo de 52 Soft k eys 23 Soft ware accessing help 117 instal ling on a Mac intosh 101 install ing on a PC 95 Spec ificat ions 1 35 Spot me thod f or auto matic ex posur e 57 Status chec king 3 2 on the color LCD 33 Status L CD 32 batter y icon s 9 cleani ng 11 8 flash icons 43 icons 133 Still ph otos taking 35 using the self-t imer 53
Index HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 150 System requi rements Macint osh 101 PC 94 T Taking p hotos burst 36 Instant Review 3 6 of smal l obje cts 52 overvi ew 30 still im ages 35 timela pse 3 8 Technical s upport 117 Television connec ting the camera 91 using NTSC 91 using PAL 91 viewing p hotos 92 Time setti ng 24 Time lapse p hoto s changin g the sett ings 40 collaps ing 81 expanding 80 how man y to take 41 interval 41 not enou gh memo ry 39 taking 38 viewi ng 86 Transm itti ng photos to another camera 112 Trouble shootin g 115 U Unmarki ng pho tos 71 V Video outpu t forma t 90 Viewfinder i ndicator light 18 Viewing ph otos burst, ti melap se, and g rouped 86 using a television 92 using Play mode 84 using Review mode 69
Index HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 151 W Warra nty 121 White ba lanc e setting 5 8 Wri st str ap attac hing 5 Z Zoom digi tal 5 1 opti cal 51 using 5 0 using while viewing your photos 85
T rademark and C opyright Information © Copyright 2000 Hewlett-Packard Company All rights are reserv ed. No part of this d ocument may be pho to copied, reprod uced, or translate d to another language with out the prior writte n conse nt of He wlett-Packard C ompa ny. The inf ormat ion cont ained in this d ocumen t is s u bject to chang e withou t noti ce. Hewlet t-Packar d s hall no t be li able fo r errors conta ined herei n or for cons equ enti al damag es in c onnec tion w ith t he fu rnish ing, perf ormanc e, or use of this m ateri al. HP , t he HP lo go, JetS end, the J etSend l ogo, Phot oSmart, a nd the Pho toSmar t logo are pro perty o f H ewlett-P ackard Compan y. Micro soft a nd Windo ws are registe red t radem arks of Micr osoft Cor porat ion. Digita, the Di gita logo, and Digit a Deskt op are tr ademarks o f Flashp oint T echnolog y, Inc. CompactFla sh, CF , and the CF l ogo are tr ademarks of SanDisk Cor poration . Mac, the Mac logo, and Macinto sh are regis tered tradema rks of Apple Co mputer, In c. Other bra nds and their p roducts a re trademar ks or regist ered tradema rks of their respective ho lders.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide i Ta b l e o f C o n t e n t s Chapter 1 - Introduction .............................................. ................................... ..................... .................................................. ................... 1 Chapter 2 - Getting Started ..................... .................. .................. ................. ......................... ............................. ................................... 3 Camera Parts ............. .......... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... .. .............. ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ......... 3 Setting Up Your Ca mera ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ..... ................ ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ......... 5 Attachin g the Wrist Strap and Lens Cover Leash . ............... ........... ..... .......... ................ ........... ..... ...... ......... ........... ................ .......... .............. 5 Installin g the Batteries ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ........ ... ................ ............... ........... ............... ........... ................ ... 7 Installin g the Main Bat teries ...... ...... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ................ .......... ....... ......... ............... ........... ................ .......... .............. 7 Installin g a New Coin Battery .............. .......... ................ ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ..... ................ ........... .......... ................ .......... ......... 8 Checking the Batt ery Level ........ ................ ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ................ ........ ........ ............... ........... .......... ................ ........... ...9 Charging the Ba tt eries ... ..... .......... ................ ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ................ .. .............. ............... ........... ................ .......... ............. 11 Installin g the Memory Card .......... ................ .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... ................ ...... .......... ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... .. 11 Checking the Mem ory Card St atus ................... ..... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ..... ........... ... .................. ............... ........... ................ ..13 Formatting a Memory Ca rd ............. .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ..... ........... ............... ...... .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ . 14 Camera Basics ..... ...... .......... ................ .......... ..... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ........ ............. ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ....... 15 Turning the Camera On and Off ...... ................ ........... ..... .......... ...... .......... ................ ............... .. ................... ................ ................ .......... ............ 15 Sleep Mode .............. ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ........... ............... ........ ............. ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ....... 16 Using the Camera Modes .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... .......... ................ .......... ................ .......... ................ ............. 17 Understand in g the Viewfinder Indicator Light ........... ................ ............... ........... ............... .............. ....... ........... ............... ................ ........... . 18
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide ii Table of Content s Using the Color LCD .... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ................ ... .................. .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ . 19 Overlay Bars .. ................ .......... ................ .......... ..... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... .. ............. ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... ....... 2 1 Soft Keys .... ............... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... .... ................. ........... ............... ........... ................ ............... .......23 Using the Camera Menus ..... .......... ..... ........... ..... ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ ..... ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... .......23 Setting the Date an d Time .... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ................ ............... ........... ... .................. ............... ........... ................ .......... ........... 24 Changing th e Lang uage .. .......... ................ .......... ..... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... .... ............ ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... .27 Changing th e Camera âs Name ..... ................ .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... ..... ........... ........... ..... ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... 28 Using an AC Power Adapter (recommended) .. ................ ........... ..... .......... ..... ........... ................ ........... ......... ................ ........... ............... ...... 29 Chapter 3 - Taking Photos ....................... .................. .................. ................. .................. ....... ........... ................................... ............... 30 Overview ........... ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ............. ........ ................ ................ ............... ........... ............... ........... ................ 30 Taking a Photo . ..... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ............ .............. ................ ............... ........... ................ ............... ...... 30 Checking the Camera St atus .... ................ .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ................ .......... .. ... ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... .......32 Using the Status LCD ............... ........... ..... .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... ................ ....... ......... ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... .32 Using the Color LCD ...... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ .. ................... ..................... .......... ................ ............ 33 Taking Stil l, Burst and Timela pse Photos ............. ........... ..... .......... ................ .......... ................ ..... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ...... 3 5 Taking Still P hotos .............. .......... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... .......... ........... .......... ........... ................ .......... ................ .......... ...... 35 Taking Burst Phot o s ................ ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ........ ................... .......... ................ .......... ................ .......... ...... 36 Taking Timelapse Photos .................... ........... ................ ............... ........... ..... .......... ............... ............ .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ 38
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide iii Table of Content s Adjusting the Camera Se ttings ............. ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ................ ..... ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... 42 Taking Black and W hit e Photos .............. ............... ................ ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ................ .......... ........... .......... ................ ........... 42 Changing th e Fla sh Setting ...... .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ..... ................ ................ ............... ........... ................ 43 Adjusting the Photo Quality ..... .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ........... .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ 45 Using the Zo om ......... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ............... .... ................. ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ...... 50 Using Macro Mode ... ........... ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ........... .. .................. ........... .......... ................ ........... ............... ...... 52 Using the Sel f-Timer .................... .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ................ .. ................... ............... ........... ............... ........... ................ 53 Setting the Exposure ............... ............... ........... ................ ............... ........... ............... ........ ............. ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ...... 56 Setting the White Ba lan ce ............... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ................ .. ................... ............... ........... ................ ............... ...... 58 Using Instant Review .......... ............... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ............. ... ................ ............... ........... ............... ........... ............... 60 Setting the Eye Start ..... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... 62 Setting Hand Held ................... ............... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ..... .......... ....... ................... ........... .......... ................ ........... ............... ...... 62 Setting the Counte r Reset ..... .......... ..... ........... ................ ............... ........... ............... ............. .............. .......... ................ .......... ................ .......... ...... 63 Setting Auto Sh utoff ........... .......... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........... . .............. ........... ............... ........... ................ .......... ........... 64 Setting the Beep ... ................ .......... ................ .......... ..... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........ ............. ................ .......... ................ .......... ................ ........... 65
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide iv Table of Content s Chapter 4 - Viewing Photos .................... ..................................................... ........................... ........................................................... 67 Overview ........... ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ............. ........ ................ ................ ............... ........... ............... ........... ................ 67 Using Review Mo de .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ............... ...... .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ........... 69 Selecting Photos ....... ........... ..... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ..... ........... ............... .... ................. ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ...... 69 Marking Phot os .............. ................ .......... ...... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... .............. ....... ................ .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ 70 Deleting Ph otos .... ..... ........... ............... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........ ............. ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ ............. 71 Protecting Photos .......... ........... ..... .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... ................ ............... ...... ................ ............... ........... ............... ........... ................ .7 2 Categorizin g Pho tos ..... ...... .......... ................ .......... ..... ........... ................ ............... ........... .. ............. ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ....... 73 Grouping Pho tos .. .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ............... ........... ........... ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... .75 Creating and Removing Groups ......... ..... ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ ................ ..... .......... ............... ............ .......... ........... 76 Adding Photos to a Group .......... ................ ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ................ ........ ............. .......... ................ ................ .......... ...... 78 Opening and Closing Groups ... ........... ................ ............... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... .. ... .......... ............... ........... ........... ................ 79 Expanding Burst and Timelapse Phot o s .. .......... ...... .......... ................ .......... ..... ........... ................ .... ........... ................ .......... ................ .......... 80 Searching for P hotos ......... .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ ............... ........... ... .................. .......... ................ .......... ................ .......... ....... 81 Using Play Mode .................... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ....... ......... ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ...... 84 Viewing Single Photo s . ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... .......... ........... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ...... 84 Zooming In on Yo ur Ph otos ....... ...... .......... ................ .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... .......... ........... ................ ............... ........... ................ 85 Viewing Burst, Timelapse, an d Grouped Photos ....... .......... ...... .......... ................ ............... ........... ....... .............. .......... ................ ................ 86 Creating a Slideshow ................... ................ .......... ..... ........... ................ ............... ........... ... ............ ........... ............... ........... ................ ............... ...... 87 Deleting Ph otos .... ..... ........... ............... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........ ............. ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... 89
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide v Table of Content s Using Your Telev ision ........... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ................ .......... ........... .......... ..................... ........... ............... ................ .......... 90 Selecting the Video Out put Format ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ..... .......... ................ ......... ................. ................ .......... ................ .......... 90 Connecting the Camera to a Television ........ ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ............. ... ............... ................ ........... ............... ....... 91 Viewing Photos on a Television ........ ................ ........... ..... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... .... . ................ ............... ...... ................ .......... ........... 92 Chapter 5 - Sharing and Prin tin g Photos ............ .................. ................................... .................. .... ............................... ............... 93 Connecting the Camera t o Your P C ... ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ................ ....... .............. ............... ...... ............... ........... ................ 93 System Requirements ............. ............... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ..... .......... ........... ..... ................ ............... ........... ................ ............... ...... 94 Installin g the Software ...... ............... ........... ..... .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... .............. ....... ................ ............... ........... ................ ............... ...... 95 Connecting the Camera ........ .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ... ............. ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... 95 Downloading Pho tos ... ...... .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ..... ................ .......... .......... ................ ................ .......... ...... 96 Printing Pho tos ..................... ............... ........... ............... ........... ................ ............... ....... .............. ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ........... 98 Connecting the Camera to Your Macinto sh ... ................ .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ ..... .......... ................ .......... ................ .......... 101 System Requirements ............. ............... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ..... .......... ........... ................ .......... ................ ............... ........... ............... 101 Installin g the Software ...... ............... ........... ..... .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... .............. ....... ................ ............... ........... ................ ............... ..... 101 Connecting the Camera ........ .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ... ............. ............... ........... ............... ................ ......... 102 Downloading Pho tos ... ...... .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ..... ................ .......... .......... ................ ................ .......... .... 103 Printing Pho tos ..................... ............... ........... ............... ........... ................ ............... ....... .............. ................ .......... ................ .......... ................ ......... 105
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide vi Table of Content s Printing Phot os Wi thout a Comp uter ............ ............... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ............ ... ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... .... 106 Using a Card Reader ... ................ ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ..... ................ ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ......... 1 06 Using a Digital Print Orde r Format (DP OF) File .. ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... .......... ................ ........... ............... ................ ......... 107 JetSending P hotos .. ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ........... ............. ........ .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ .......... ......... 109 Transmitti ng Photos Between Two Cameras .. ................ .......... ................ .......... ................ .......... ...... . ......... ................ .......... ................ ................ 112 Using Digita Scripts .......... ........... ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... .. .............. ................ .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ 1 14 Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting and Ma intenance ................ ................................... ................................ .................................... 115 Problems and Solut ions . ................ .......... ..... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ............... .... ................. ..................... ........... ............... ................ ........... 1 15 Getting Assista nce ... .......... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ...... .......... .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ........... 116 HP Photo Smart on the Internet .... ................ .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... ................ ......... ................. .......... ................ ........... ............... ......116 Help ...... ................ .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ...... .................... .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... ...... 1 17 Contact in g HP Customer Care ....... ...... .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ................ .......... ..... . .................... ................ ................ .......... ........... 117 HP Customer Care Online ..... ........... ..... .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... ..... ........... .............. ....... ............... ........... ................ ............... ...... 117 HP Customer Care by Phon e .... ...... .......... ..... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... ............... ........ ............. ................ .......... ................ ........... 11 8 Mainten ance .............. .......... ................ .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ ....... ........ ........... .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... ......11 8
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide vii Table of Content s Appendix A - Sa fety, Regulatory, and Warranty Information ...... ...................................................... ......... ........ .............. 119 Safety Informatio n .. .......... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ....... ......... ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ......119 Regulatory Notices ...... .......... ...... .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ .......... ..... ... ............. ..................... ............... ........... ................ .......... ......... 120 U.S.A. .... ................ .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ .......... ................ ...... ............... ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... .... 120 Canada .......... ................ ........... ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ..... ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... ................ ......... 120 Hewlett-Packard Li mit ed Warranty Statement .............. .......... ..... ........... ............... ................ ........... .. .................. ........... ............... ...... ................ 12 1 Hewlett-Packard Year 2000 Warranty for Consumer Product s Distribut ed Thro ugh Aut horized Resellers .......................... 123 Appendix B - Refer ence .............................................. ................................... ....................... ................................................ ............. 124 Menu Stru cture ......... ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ................ .... ...... ........... ................ .......... ................ .......... ................ ............... 124 Record (Rec) Mode .............. .......... ................ ............... ........... ................ .......... ..... ........... . ......... ........... ............... ........... ............... ................ .......... 124 Review (Rev) Mode .... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ ............... ...... ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ..... 127 Play Mode ............... ..... ........... ............... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ... ............. ................ ............... ........... ............... ................ .......... 12 8 Icons ......... .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ................ .......... ........ ........ ................ .......... ................ .......... ................ ................ .......... ..........129 Color LCD .... ................ ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ...... .......... ................ .......... ... ........ ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... .....129 Categories . ............... ........... ............... ................ ........... ............... ........... ............... ...... ..................... .......... ................ ............... ........... ............... 13 2 Status LCD ......... .......... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........ ........ ..... ................ .......... ................ ............... ........... ............... 133 Error Messages .............. .......... ................ .......... ...... .......... ..... ........... ................ .............. ...... .......... ........... ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... .....13 4 Color LCD .... ................ ........... ............... ........... ..... .......... ...... .......... ................ .......... ... ........ ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... ............... ..... 134 Status LCD ......... .......... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........... ............... ........... ..... ........ ........ ..... ................ .......... ................ ............... ........... ............... 134 Camera Specifica tions .... ........... ............... ................ .......... ................ ........... ..... .......... ....... .............. ................ ............... ........... ................ .......... .......... 135
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâs Guide viii Table of Content s Glossary ..... .................................... ..................................................... ....................... .............................. ................................... ..............136 Index ............ ..................................................... ..................................................... .. ..................................................................... ............. 142
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 1 Chapter 1 - Introduction This guide c ompleme nts the Basics guide th at you recei ved with your HP PhotoSm art C500 Digital Came ra. It descri bes the camera âs ad vanced features, usi ng a step- by-step approa ch. The gui de is divided into th e follow ing sections: Chapte r Chapte r Chapte r Chapt er Title Title Title Title Description Description Description Description 1 Introdu ctio n How to use this guide . 2 Getting Started How to set up yo ur camer a, incl uding in stalli ng the bat teries , using an AC po wer ad apter , i nstall ing the me mory car d, sett ing the da te and t i me, c hangin g the la nguage, turnin g the ca mera on and of f, and u sing the c amera mo des, c olor LCD and me nus. 3 Taking Photos How to take S till, Bu rst a nd Timel apse p hotos, c heck th e cam era statu s, and a djust the cam era s ettings. 4 Viewing Phot os How to view ph ot os us in g Revi ew mod e, Pl ay mod e, or yo ur telev ision, and how to mark, categ orize , grou p, prot ect, an d delete photos. 5 Shari ng an d P rinti ng Photos How to send p hotos to anoth er camer a or a p rinte r, or pr int photos from a PC or Ma cintosh c omput er.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 2 6 Troubles hootin g and Mai ntena nce Soluti ons to probl ems, wh ere to fin d help using th e Interne t, th e softwa re Help, or HP C ustomer Care, and how to c lean th e camera. AS a f e t y , R e g u l a t o r y , and Warr anty Infor mation Batter y and A C power adapte r safe ty, ho w t he ca mera com plies with U.S. an d Canadi an reg ulations , and the exten t of the L imited Warran ty. B Referenc e Color LCD menu struct ures for Record, Review and Play mo des, icons used on the col or and s tatus LCDs, e rror mess ages disp layed on the c olor an d stat us LCDs , and came ra specif ications . Glossa ry Glos sary of ca mera p arts an d term inology.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 3 Chapter 2 - Getting Started This ch apter shows you how to set up your new H P PhotoS mart C 500 Dig ital Came ra, i ncluding in stalling t he batte rie s, using an AC po wer adapter, in sta ll i ng t he m emo ry c a rd, set ti ng t he da te a n d ti m e, ch a ngi ng t h e l an gu age, turnin g the ca mera on and of f, and us ing the c amera mo des, c olor L CD a nd menus . Camera Parts The follo wi ng ill ustr a tions sh ow the parts of th e HP Ph ot oS ma rt C500 Di gi tal C ame r a. T o view a gl ossa ry of camer a parts and term inology, see âGl ossaryâ on pa ge 136. Status L CD Shutter button Camera mode d ial Flash butt on Photo Quali ty button Share button On/off but ton To p To p To p To p Main battery compar tment door T ripo d mou nt Coin battery compartm en t cover Bottom Bottom Bottom Bottom
Camera Part s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 4 Side Side Side Side Self-tim er light Flash Lens Infrare d se n s or s Autom atic flash sensor Front Front Front Front Serial/USB compute r connection Video O u t AC p ow e r adapter connection Automatic focus and exposure sen sors Zoom control Memory card door latch Memory card do or Wrist strap atta chment Soft k eys Color L CD Back Back Back Back Color L CD on/off button 4-way arrow button Eye Start sensors Viewfi nder Overlay button Menu button Viewfind er i ndicator light
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 5 Setting Up Y our Camera Attaching the Wrist Strap and Lens Cover Leash The HP Ph otoS mart C500 D igital Camera c omes with a wrist strap a nd l ens cover leash. The wrist str ap and lens cover l eash ha s three l oops: 1. A short l oop to a ttach to the c amera. 2. A long thin l oop to a ttach to the l ens co ver. 3. The main wr ist strap loo p. 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 6 T o attach the wrist strap: T o attach the wrist strap: T o attach the wrist strap: T o attach the wrist strap: 1. Using th e wrist s trap and lens c over lea sh include d in th e box wit h your came ra, th read the sh ort l oop thro ugh the c amera a ttachm ent. Y ou might ne ed to u se a pencil to pul l the e nd of t he loop th roug h. 2. Pull th e strap and t he lens cover leas h thro ugh th e loop, and the n pull th e knot tig ht. T o attach th e lens cover leash : T o attach th e lens cover leash : T o attach th e lens cover leash : T o attach th e lens cover leash : 1. Remo ve the l ens cove r from the ca mera. 2. Thr e ad the lon g, thin loop thr ough the ho le in the le ns cove r. 3. Pull the lens c over t hrough th e loop , and th en pull the knot tight. 4. Replace t he lens cover on the camera . 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 7 Installing the Batteries The HP Ph otoSm art C500 D i gital Camera u ses t hree AA NiMH (Ni ck el Me tal Hy dride) b atteries . It a lso use s a coin battery fo r retai ning th e date a nd time i nformatio n. The ca mera comes with a co in bat tery (a lready in stalled), three NiMH ba tteries, and an NiMH batte ry charge r. Instal ling the Main Batteri es Caution: Use only A A NiMH batteries. Re place al l three batteries at the same time. Do not replace the bat teries individ ually. A lways fol low in struction s on the battery pack age w hen hand ling or disposi ng of ba tteries. T o install the main batteries: T o install the main batteries: T o install the main batteries: T o install the main batteries: 1. Ma k e sure t he camera powe r i s off off off off . 2. Open the ma in ba ttery co mpartme nt door b y slidi ng the la tch i n the direc tion of t he word O PEN. 3. Insert three batter ies, making s ure the /- elect rodes are faci ng the prop er direc tion (see the d iagram i nside the b attery compart ment) . 4. Close the main batter y compa rtment d oor. Main battery compa rtme nt door
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 8 Instal ling a New Coin Bat te ry When you buy the camera, a coin battery i s alrea dy insta lled. F ollow these directi ons if you need to insta ll a n ew coin batte ry. Caution: Use onl y a CR 2025 or equiva lent 3 volt c oin ba ttery. Always f ollow instruct ions on the bat tery pa ck age when han dlin g or di sposi ng of ba tte ries. T o inst all a coin battery: T o inst all a coin battery: T o inst all a coin battery: T o inst all a coin battery: 1. Ma k e sure t he camera powe r i s off off off off . 2. Remove the co in batt ery c ompart ment cov er by pla c in g the ed ge of a co in in the groo ve an d turni ng it coun ter-clo ckwis e until it stops. 3. Insert the coin ba ttery, so yo u see th e positiv e ( ) side f acing u p. 4. Repla ce the co in batt ery compa rtmen t cover and turn it clock wise until i t stops.
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 9 Checki ng th e B atter y L evel The battery i con on the cameraâs status L CD in dicates the c harge l evel for the main NiMH bat teries. There are t hree levels of batt ery char ge: fully c harged, partial ly charged , and em pty. Y ou can pu rchas e addition al NiMH batteries from H Pâs Shop ping V illag e at www.hpshoppin g.com www.hpsh opping.c om www.hpsh opping.c om www.hpsh opping.c om , o r from you r loca l ca mera or electron ics s tore. Batte ry life depen ds on sev era l f a ctors. These in cl u de: ⢠How often an d how long yo u use the color LCD. ⢠How ofte n you us e the fla sh and zoom. ⢠The numb er of photos you tak e. ⢠T emperatu re co ndition s (opera ting the camera at col der temp eratur es results in shorter battery l ife). T o preserve batter y life : ⢠When us in g th e ca me ra with a com p ut er or te lev isio n or when using th e col or L CD for exte nde d per io ds of ti m e, use an A C power adapt er that HP ha s app roved for use with the HP Phot oSmart C500 Digi tal Camera . ⢠Limit your use of the color L CD, except when usi ng an A C power adapter. ⢠Do not l eave b atteries in the charger for an exte nded period of time (su ch as sever al days).
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 10 T o check the main battery level: T o check the main battery level: T o check the main battery level: T o check the main battery level: ⢠Press the on/off on/off on/off on/off button to turn th e cam era on. The stat us L CD displ ays the b attery st atus icon. Note: If the batter ies are low when you firs t turn on the camera, t he camera beeps 5 ti mes, the empty battery icon flashes on the status L CD, the lens retracts, and the sta tus L CD goes bl ank as the c amera turns i tself off. T o check the c oin batt ery leve l: T o check the c oin batt ery leve l: T o check the c oin batt ery leve l: T o check the c oin batt ery leve l: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the co lor LCD on/o ff colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off button to turn the c olor L CD on . 3. If you do not see th e overlay bars , press the Overlay Overlay Overlay Overlay butt on to turn t hem on. 4. Press the Status Status Status Status button (right s oft key) to see the c amera status. The coi n battery i con appea rs on th e color L CD only if the battery lev el is low, or if th e re is no co in batt ery inst alled in the ca mera. 5. Press the Exit Exit Exit Exit button (right soft k ey) to exit the Sta tus sc reen. Fully c h ar ged Partia lly c harg ed Empt y On/off button Status L CD Battery st atu s icon Coin battery icon indica tes low charge or no batter y ins t alle d
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 11 Charging the Ba tterie s T o mak e sure your NiMH batt eri es ar e charged when you ne ed them, we recommend ch ar gin g t he m ov ern ig ht usi ng the bat tery charger included in the camera pack age. Once the bat teries ar e fully charged, remove them from the charge r. Note: The ba tteries re ach optimum charge c apaci ty for the firs t time a fter the y hav e been dr ained and ch arged four times. Installing the Memory Card The âfi lmâ used in the HP Photo Smart C 500 Di gital C ame ra is a remova ble, reu sabl e Compac tFlash memory card. T o ins tall the me mory card: T o ins tall the me mory card: T o ins tall the me mory card: T o ins tall the me mory card: 1. Slide th e memor y card doo r latch down to open th e memo ry card do or. Memory card door lat ch
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 12 2. If you are removin g an existin g card : Caution: Before you remove a memo ry card fro m the ca mera, mak e sure the memor y card a ccess li ght is off off off off (see the pic ture belo w). ⢠Press th e memo ry card re lease button to relea se the c ard fr om the slot. ⢠Remove the card. 3. Insert the new m emory card so t hat the fron t of the ca rd faces t he front of the camera and the e dge with pinh oles is plac ed in to the c amera f irst. 4. Gentl y push the memor y card all the way into the cam era un til it stops. 5. Close the memor y card do or. Tip: If you ca nnot close the m emory c ard door, you may no t have i nserted t he memor y card correctl y. CompactFlash memory card Memory card door Memory card access light Memory card release bu tton
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 13 Checkin g the Memo ry Card Stat us The mem ory card icon on the ca meraâs status L CD indicates the stat us of th e memo ry card. I f the re is not a memo ry card in stalle d in the cam era, th e memory ca rd icon has a flashing X ove r it, th e number of photos remai ning is 000, and a red light appe ars to the left of the viewfi nder. ⢠Press the on/off on/off on/off on/off button to turn the cam er a on. The s tatus L CD disp lays the m emory c ard st atus i con and the n umber of photos remain ing. T he St atus menu displays the me mory card i nserte d icon on the color L CD. (See âUsin g the Colo r LC Dâ on page 33 for more inform ation a bout the Stat us men u.) Memory card s tatus Photos re maining Memory card inserted
Setting Up Your Ca me ra HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 14 The numb er of photos a me mory car d can st ore depen ds on the memory cardâs storag e capa city and the sett ings t hat you choose for each photo . The number is a co nserva tive es timate, so you m ight find that you can t ak e more photo s than it in dicates . Y ou can also check the stat us of th e memo ry card usi ng the m emory card indica tor on the color LCD. For exampl e, yo u can see fr om th e indi cato r in t he graphic that the memory card is more than half full. F ormatting a Memory Card Most Compac tFlash memory cards are already fo rmatted wh en you buy them . But if you buy a memory ca rd th at has no t be en for matted , you need to for m at it bef ore you can use it in the camera . T o format a m emory card: T o format a m emory card: T o format a m emory card: T o format a m emory card: 1. Insert the memo ry card and turn the camer a on. T he ca mera ca n be in any m ode. If th e memor y card is not fo rmat ted, the co lor L CD disp lays a m essa ge ask ing i f you w ant to format the m emory card. 2. Press the Fo r m a t Fo r m a t Fo r m a t Fo r m a t butto n (left so ft k ey). The camera formats the memory card. Memory card indicator
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 15 Camera Basics T urning the Camera On and Off T o turn the camera power on: T o turn the camera power on: T o turn the camera power on: T o turn the camera power on: ⢠Press the on/off on/off on/off on/off button to turn th e came ra powe r on. The came ra lens automat icall y exten ds, and the st atus LCD displ ays the st atus of the came ra . Tip: Reme mber to remove the le ns cover before taking a pho to. T o remind you rself , alwa ys repla ce the l ens co ver with the l eash attachmen t poin ting up so tha t you see it w hen you look through the vi ewfinder. T o turn the camera power off: T o turn the camera power off: T o turn the camera power off: T o turn the camera power off: ⢠Press the on/off on/off on/off on/off button to turn the cam er a po wer off. The came ra lens aut omatic ally re tract s and th e status LCD goes blan k. On/off bu tton Stat u s LCD
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 16 Sleep Mode T o conserv e batter y power , the HP PhotoSm art C 500 Digi tal Ca mera a utomati cally â sleepsâ a fter a peri od of no activit y. Th is per i od of time di ffers d ependin g on the camera mode an d the p ower so urce . F or example, if yo u ar e using ba tter y pow er a nd you do n ot press any camer a bu tto ns fo r 30 sec on ds, th e color L CD turns its el f off a nd th e camera sleep s. The ca mera also tu rns itsel f off an d retrac ts the lens after 1 0 minut es with bat tery powe r, and after 30 minutes with A C adapter p ower. F or more info rmatio n abou t the sl eep and sh utoff ti mes, se e âSetti ng Auto Shutof fâ on page 64. T o âw ake upâ the came ra: T o âw ake upâ the came ra: T o âw ake upâ the came ra: T o âw ake upâ the came ra: ⢠Press a ny button.
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 17 Using the Came ra Modes The HP PhotoSmart C500 Di gital Camera has four modes. The camera mode de termine s which f eatures and me nu opti ons are a ctive. Use the camera mode dial camera mode dial camera mode dial camera mode dial to select the mo de. Mode Mode Mode Mode F unct ions Functions Functions Functions Rec (R ecord ) Rec (R ecord ) Rec (R ecord ) Rec (R ecord ) ⢠Take p hotos ⢠Preview p hotos on the c ameraâ s color L CD or a televi sion Rev (Re vie w) Rev (Re vie w) Rev (Re vie w) Rev (Re vie w) ⢠View thumbnai ls of your photo s ⢠Mark, c ategor ize, gro u p, pr otect, and delete ph otos ⢠View pho tos on th e came raâs color LCD o r a te levisio n ⢠Transmi t photo s via i nfrar ed Pla y Pla y Pla y Pla y ⢠View one p hoto at a time, usin g the enti re co lor LCD ⢠Play back Burst, Timela pse, and gr ouped ph oto se quences ⢠Create slide shows ⢠View pho tos on th e came raâs color LCD o r a te levisio n PC PC PC PC ⢠View photos on a compute r monitor when the ca mera is con nected to a computer ⢠Share, prin t, an d down load p hotos Camera mode dial
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 1 8 Understanding the Viewfinder Indicator Ligh t The ind icator li ght appea rs to th e left of the vie wfinder. The colo r of th e light chang es depe nding on th e c amera mo de and a t differen t stage s in th e phot ogr aphy pr ocess. I f the flashi ng ligh t indic ates a camera error , a mess age al so disp lays on t he stat us or co lor LCD. Light colo r Light colo r Light colo r Light co lo r Meaning Mea ning Mea ning Mea ning Red (flashing) ⢠Memory card p roblem ⢠No memory card ⢠Full memory card ⢠Interna l memo ry full (only for b urst ph otos) ⢠Batte ries l ow ⢠Camera er ror Red (soli d) ⢠Flash char ging Orange (flashing) ⢠Camer a initia lizing from Sl eep mod e Orange (solid) ⢠Auto Foc us faile d or p hoto un derexposu re wi ll occur (f lash off a nd insuffi cient li ght) ⢠Slow shut ter (not enough l ight or tripod needed) Green (flas hing) ⢠Sending a p hoto vi a JetSend Viewfi nd er indicator li ght
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 19 Using the Color L CD The col or L CD is lo cated on the ba ck of the HP Ph otoSma rt C5 00 Digital Camera. Use th e color L CD t o frame or view yo ur ph otos and to access the ca mera âs me nus. Y ou can adjust the br ightness of th e color L CD to suit light ing cond itions. For example, if you are us ing the came ra outsid e in bri ght sun l ight , you can make the color LCD brighter ( see below). The disp lay on the color L CD va ries w ith each camera m ode. The follow ing ta ble in dicates whethe r the color L CD i s on or of f in each mode, an d the def au lt displ ay. Green (soli d) ⢠Camera i s read y to take a photo (Auto E xposu re and Au to Focus have b een com pleted) ⢠Cont inuous A uto E x posure acti va ted Light colo r Light colo r Light colo r Light co lo r Meaning Mea ning Mea ning Mea ning Colo r LCD
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 20 Tip: The col or L CD uses a lot of battery power. If yo u ar e not using an AC p ower adap ter, you may want t o limit your use of the color LCD. T o adjust t he brig ht ness of the colo r L CD: T o adjust t he brig ht ness of the colo r L CD: T o adjust t he brig ht ness of the colo r L CD: T o adjust t he brig ht ness of the colo r L CD: 1. T urn the ca mera on and tu rn the came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences menu. L CD Brig htness is highlighted . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). Mode Mode Mode Mode Statu s Status Status Status Displ ay Display Display Display Rec (R ecord ) Rec (R ecord ) Rec (R ecord ) Rec (R ecord ) Off. You can turn the col or LCD o n by pressing the color L CD on/off color L CD on/off color L CD on/off color L CD on/off but ton . No displ ay unles s you tu rn the c olor LCD on. Rev (Re vie w) Rev (Re vie w) Rev (Re vie w) Rev (Re vie w) Turns on auto m aticall y. Turns off aut o matic all y aft er 30 seco nds if you are using battery power . Displa ys thumbna ils of ph otos stor ed on the memory card. Pla y Pla y Pla y Pla y Turns on auto m aticall y. Turns off aut o matic all y aft er 30 seco nds if you are using battery power . Displa ys photos st ored o n the me mory card us ing the enti re co lor LCD scr een. PC PC PC PC Off. No display. Soft k eys Menu button 4-way arrow button
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 21 5. Use the 4- way ar row button to adju st the color L CD brightness. A high er number gives a brighter display. 6. Press the Exi t Exi t Exit Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to ac tivate and save the new setting s, an d exit the menus. Tip: The brightness of the c olor L CD affects battery life; the brighter the co lor L CD, the mor e power i t uses. Y ou may want t o lower th e brightness leve l if you use the color LCD often. Overlay Ba rs Overla y bars app ear at the top and bo ttom of t h e colo r LC D. The y provid e you wit h infor m ation about th e cam era setting s, such as the type of p hoto (St ill, Bu rst or Timelapse ). The y also i ndicate the f unctions of the so ft k eys. The num ber of overl ay bars an d the informati on they provide vari es with each cam era mo de. In Rev (Revi ew) mo de, the low er ove rlay bar is alwa y s visible . In Rec (R ecor d) mode y ou can c h oo se wh e ther or no t to see the over lay bar s. In Play m ode yo u can c hoose to see b oth over lay bars, just th e lo wer bar, or neith er of the bars. Y ou can find inform ation a bout the icons that appear o n the ov erlay ba rs th rougho ut this guide. Color L CD on/off but to n Overlay button Overlay bars
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 22 T o t urn the overlay bar s on or o ff in Rec (Re cord) mode : T o t urn the overlay bar s on or o ff in Rec (Re cord) mode : T o t urn the overlay bar s on or o ff in Rec (Re cord) mode : T o t urn the overlay bar s on or o ff in Rec (Re cord) mode : 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Pr es s the color L C D on/off color L CD on/off color L CD on/off color L CD on/off button. By def a ult both the o verlay b ars ap pear . 3. Press the Over lay Overl ay Overl ay Overl ay button to t urn the overla y bars off and o n. T o turn the over lay bars on or o ff in Play mo de: T o turn the over lay bars on or o ff in Play mo de: T o turn the over lay bars on or o ff in Play mo de: T o turn the over lay bars on or o ff in Play mo de: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Pl ay Play Pl ay Play . By def a ult only the l ower o verlay b ar appe ars. 2. Press the Ov erla y Overl ay Overl ay Overl ay button once to turn of f the overlay ba r. Press the butt on agai n to se e both th e overlay b ars. Y o u ca n contin ue p ressing the Overlay Overlay Overlay Overlay butt on to toggle between the three options. Lower ov erlay bar No over l ay ba r s Both overla y bars
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 23 Soft K eys Soft k eys are butt ons tha t chan ge funct ion depe nding on the camera mode, s tat e, and men u opti on. Ea ch soft key fun ctio n i s labeled on the l ower over lay ba r, abov e the k ey that is use d to activat e the func tion. If the overlay bars a re off, you can st ill use the functi on by pr essing a sof t k ey. For example, if the camera is in Play mod e and the o verlay bar s are turn ed off, you ca n press the ce nter so ft k ey (the zoom bu tton ) once to turn the lowe r overla y bar on, a nd then a secon d time t o zoom in on the p hoto. Using the Came ra Menus The HP Ph otoSm art C500 D igital Ca mera men us display on the c olor L CD. Y ou can u se these me nus to adjust camera settings and use camera features. The menus vary with each camera mode . Use the colo r LCD and the control s on the back of the camera to acc ess the c ame ra menus and select th e menu options . Menu option s are descr ib ed in de tail th rougho ut this g uide. For a list of op tion s, see âM enu Str ucture â on pag e 1 24 in Appe ndix B. Soft k eys 4-way arrow but ton Menu button Soft k eys Menus display on the color L CD
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 24 T o use th e c ame r a men us : T o use th e c ame r a men us : T o use th e c ame r a men us : T o use th e c ame r a men us : 1. T urn the camera on and turn the cam era mode dial to the m ode yo u want t o use. 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the right an d left sides of the 4-wa y arrow button to select a menu. 4. Use the u p and down side s of th e 4-way a rrow butto n to s croll thr ough a menuâs op tions. 5. Press th e soft k eys to se lect or edit a menu o ption, or to ex it the cam era me nus. Note: Y ou must press the Exit Exit Exit Exit button t o save th e setting s and ex it the men us. If you change the camer a mode w hile you are selecti ng the menu optio ns, the camera does not save th e new s ettings. Y ou must exit all menu s before you can turn th e color L CD off. Setting the Date and Time Before you begi n takin g photos , set t he corre ct date a nd tim e. The ca mera s tores t he date and tim e with other informa tion a bout the photo , and di splays it in Rev (Re view) mo de. Wh en you turn your c amera on, th e color L CD prompts you to se t the da te and ti me und er an y of the fo llowing conditi ons: ⢠The firs t time yo u us e your ca mera. ⢠After re moving or rep lacin g the coi n batt ery whe n you ha ve no t insta lled th e NiMH b atteries and are not u sing an AC power adapt er. ⢠After l osing power in bot h the c oin and NiMH batterie s at th e same time . Y ou ca n also use the Preferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences camera me nu in Re c (Rec ord) mode to cha nge the d a te and time as nee ded.
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 25 T o se t the date and time when prompted by the co lor L CD: T o se t the date and time when prompted by the co lor L CD: T o se t the date and time when prompted by the co lor L CD: T o se t the date and time when prompted by the co lor L CD: 1. Sele ct a format f or the da te an d time: ⢠Press the Fo r m a t Fo r m a t Fo r m a t Fo r m a t butto n (left so ft k ey). ⢠Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to the f ormat you w ant. ⢠Press the Select Select Select Select button (left so ft k ey). Note: A camer a âs de faul t date a nd ti me for mats mat ch the camera âs l anguage . F or example, c amer as with th e langu ag e s et to English ha ve a de f a ult da te form a t of MM /D D/YY and a de f a ult ti me fo rm at o f 12 hours. Came ras with t h e lan guage set to Fr ench h ave a de faul t date for mat of DD/MM/Y Y and a def ault tim e format of 24 hours. 4-way arrow button Menu bu tton Soft k eys
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 26 2. Set th e date an d time: ⢠Use the u p and down s ides of th e 4-way a rrow bu tton to s elect a value f or th e hi ghli ghte d fi el d. ⢠Use the r ight si de of the 4-way arro w butt on to sav e the va lue in the current fi eld and to m ove to anot her fiel d. The field s are month , day, year, hour, mi nute, and in 12 hour format , AM or PM. 3. Wh en you ha v e finis hed, pr ess t he Exit Exit Exit Exit button ( right soft k ey). T o chan ge the date and time us ing the came ra menu: T o chan ge the date and time us ing the came ra menu: T o chan ge the date and time us ing the came ra menu: T o chan ge the date and time us ing the came ra menu: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Pr eferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences menu, then scroll down to Date & Ti me Date & Ti me Date & Ti me Date & Ti me . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. If you want to cha nge the da te and t ime form ats fro m the one s displa yed on th e col or LCD: ⢠Press the Fo r m a t Fo r m a t Fo r m a t Fo r m a t butto n (left so ft k ey). ⢠Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to the f ormat you w ant. ⢠Press the Select Select Select Select button (left so ft k ey).
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 27 6. Set th e date an d time: ⢠Use the u p and down s ides of th e 4-way a rrow bu tton to s elect a value f or th e hi ghli ghte d fi el d. ⢠Use the r ight si de of the 4-way arro w butt on to sav e the va lue in the curren t field and to move to an other fi eld. The f ields are m onth, day, year, hour, mi nute, and in 12 hour format , AM or PM. 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the men us. Changing the Language The HP Ph otoSm art C500 D igital Camera allow s you to c hange t he lan guage u sed for th e camer a menu s, overl ay bars, a nd def ault da te and ti me form ats. T o chan ge the langu age: T o chan ge the langu age: T o chan ge the langu age: T o chan ge the langu age: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Pr eferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences menu. 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to the l anguage you want t o use.
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 2 8 6. Press the Selec t Select Select Select button (left so ft k ey). A check mark app ears next to the s electe d langu age and the langu age immed iately ch anges. 7. When you have finish ed, press th e righ t soft k ey, which wil l be labeled Exit Exit Exit Exit in the l anguage selecte d . Changing the Cameraâs Name The cameraâ s defa ult name is HP C500. T he name ap pears in t he photo in formation only if yo u use the memory card i n anoth er cam era. F or example, if you and a fr iend both h ave HP P hotoSm art C5 00 Digit a l Cameras, yo u can share you r photos b y exch anging mem ory card s. Any ph otos th at you hav e tak en will displ ay on you r friendâ s camer a with your ca mera âs name in the photo i nform ation. T o chan ge the cameraâs name: T o chan ge the cameraâs name: T o chan ge the cameraâs name: T o chan ge the cameraâs name: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Pr eferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences men u, the n scro ll do w n to Camera Name Camera Name Camera Name Camera Name . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). ⢠Use the left soft k ey to toggle between capital l etters, l ower case lett ers, num ber s, and sp ecia l cha racte rs: A-capi tal le tters, a-lo wer case le t ters , 1- numbers , %-spe cial cha racte rs. ⢠Use the cent er soft k ey to add a space between letter s and cha racte rs.
Camera Ba si cs HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 29 ⢠Use the u p and down s ides of th e 4-way a rrow bu tton to s elect a let ter, numb er, o r special chara cter for t he camera nam e. ⢠Use the r ight si de of the 4-way arro w butt on to s ave the le tter, number, or speci al chara cter. 5. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus. Using an A C Power Adapter (recommended) T o preserve batt ery life, use a n A C power adapter that HP has ap proved f or use with the HP PhotoS mart C5 00 Digital Came ra. Use the adapter as your power sour ce when you co nnect you r ca mera to a com puter or a t elevisi on, o r when usi ng the c olor L CD for an exte nded pe riod of time. Note: An AC power ad apter p ro vides power to the c amera. It does n ot rec harge th e batt erie s. AC power adapter s are avail able fr o m www.hpsho pping.com www.hpsho pping.com www.hpsh opping.co m www.hpsho pping.com . F or A C power adapt er speci fications , refer to HPâs PhotoS mart W eb site at www.photosmart .com www.photosm art.com www.photosm art.com www.photosm art.com . T o connect an AC power adapter: T o connect an AC power adapter: T o connect an AC power adapter: T o connect an AC power adapter: 1. Plug t he adap ter i nto a p ower so urce (su ch as a wa ll out let or po wer stri p). 2. Connect t he round end of the ad apter cable t o the ca mera. Note: If you wa nt to us e battery p ower, remov e the A C adapter fro m the pow er source a nd the c amera. If the A C adapter is connecte d to the camera , even if it i s not con nected to a po wer so urce, the ca mera wi ll not use battery powe r. AC p ow e r ada pter conn ecti on
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 3 0 Chapter 3 - T aking Photos This ch apter describ es the p rocess of taking photos w ith your H P PhotoS mart C 500 Dig ital Came ra, in cludi ng how to tak e Still, B urst, and Timelaps e photo s, an d deta iled des cripti ons of adjust ing the camera setti ngs. If you want a quick ov erview, see the Basics guide that you received with your camera. There are thr ee setti ngs you c an use to tak e photos: Still , Bur st, a nd Time lapse. Tip: The Burst setting is id eal for t a king action p hotos. U se the T imelaps e setting for ob serving a s u bject ov er a longer pe riod of time. Overview Ta k i n g a P h o t o The HP Ph otoSm art C500 D igital Ca mera h as a 2-s tep Shutter Shutter S hutter Shutter but ton. When you pres s the Shut ter Shutter Shutter Shutter but ton 1 /2 way down, t he cam era adj usts the fo cus and exposur e of the photo. After th ese se ttings a re adju sted, a gr een ligh t appe ars to the left of the v iewfind er, in dicati ng that you can press th e Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter button all the way d own to ta k e the photo . Y ou may w ant to p ractic e to get used to t he timin g, be fore ta king im portan t photos. Still Still Still Still Use th is setti ng for taking a single color or bla ck and white p hoto. Burst Burst Burst Burst Use thi s setting for taking up to 4 photos i n rapid s u ccession . Timelapse Timelapse Timelapse Timelapse Use th is setti ng for taking s evera l phot os, with a set a mount of time (1 min ute to 24 hour s) betwee n photo s.
Overview HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 31 T o take a photo: T o take a photo: T o take a photo: T o take a photo: 1. Remo ve the l ens cove r. 2. T urn the camera on and turn the c amera mode di al to Rec Rec Rec Rec . The came ra is autom aticall y ready t o tak e a Still p hoto. 3. Frame your subject in the viewfinde r. 4. Press and ho ld the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter b utton 1/2 way down to all ow the camera to adj ust th e focu s an d expos ure. 5. When you see t he gre en light t o the left o f the vi ewfinder, pres s the Shutt er Shutter Shutter Shutter butt on all the way d own to ta k e the photo. W ait for the bee p s, indicatin g your ph oto ha s been t ak en, then rele ase the Shutt er Shutter Shutter Shutter button. Tip: When you are ta king a p hoto, be especially carefu l to k eep your fin gers away from the lens, fl ash, and sens ors on the f ront of the ca mera. The foll owing illust rati ons gi ve you exampl es of how to hold t he came ra. Camera mode dial On/ of f butt on Shutter button
Overview HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 32 Checking the Camera Sta tus Use the s tatus L CD and the col or L CD to chec k the sta tus of t he cam era. Ba sic cam era in formati on such a s ba ttery level, numb er of ph otos re mainin g, photo quali ty, flas h sta tus, a nd me mory car d stat us disp lay on t he stat us L CD. The col or L CD shows inform ation su ch as the num ber of p hotos st ored on the me mory car d, the c urrent compress ion level, re solution sett ing, an d batter y status. Using the Status L CD Use the sta tus L CD on the top of the camera to check th e status of the memory card, the bat tery level , and the number of ph ot os av a ilab l e on the m em ory ca rd . T h e sta tus L CD als o dis pla ys th e flash an d ph ot o qu al i ty sett in gs, and any c amera erro r message s. T o vie w the camera status on the statu s L CD : T o vie w the camera status on the statu s L CD : T o vie w the camera status on the statu s L CD : T o vie w the camera status on the statu s L CD : ⢠Press the on/off on/off on/off on/off button to turn th e cam era on. Indiv idual i cons are disc ussed throug hout this gui de or you can see a l ist of a ll t he icon s in Ap pendix B âIco nsâ on page 129. Photo qu a lity Battery level Phot os remaining Memory card status Flas h
Overview HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 33 Using the Color L CD Use the c olor L CD on the back of the camera t o check current camera setting s and status, i ncluding the numbe r of photos st ored on the me mory car d, and the comp ressi on and r esolu tion sett in gs. T o vie w the camera status on the color LCD: T o vie w the camera status on the color LCD: T o vie w the camera status on the color LCD: T o vie w the camera status on the color LCD: 1. T urn th e camer a on and t urn t he camer a mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the co lor LCD on/o ff colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off button to turn the c olor LC D o n . 3. Press the Status Status Status Status button (right s oft k ey). The col or L CD displa ys the curr ent camera setting s and sta tus. T o chan ge the camera setti ngs, us e the camer a menu s. See t he foll owing sec tions of this chapter for de tails. One or m ore ic ons may al so appe ar on th e Statu s screen, depen ding on t he camera stat us. Color L CD Color L CD on/o ff button Soft k eys
Overview HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 3 4 4. When you have finished viewing the camera sta tus, press the Exit Exit Exit Exit butto n (rig ht so ft k ey). Color L CD St atus Color L CD St atus Color L CD St atus Color L CD St atus Images tak en Images tak en Images tak en Images tak en The nu mber of photos stored on the memory card. Compress ion Compress ion Compression Compress ion The current comp ression level. Resolu tion Resolu tion Resolu tion Resolu tion The cu rrent r esoluti on setti ng. Whit e Bal Whit e Bal Whit e Bal Whit e Bal The curre nt whit e balance se tting. Digit a Digit a Digita Digit a The came ra fir mware vers ion number. Memory card inserted Battery status
Takin g Still , Burst and Ti melap se Photo s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 35 T a king Still, Burst and Timelapse Photos T aking Still Photos Use the Still Still Still Still setting to tak e one photo ea ch time yo u pr ess the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter b utton. T o take a Still photo: T o take a Still photo: T o take a Still photo: T o take a Still photo: 1. Remo ve the l ens cove r. 2. T urn the camera on and turn the c amera mode di al to Rec Rec Rec Rec . The stat us L CD displ ays the a pproxi mate numb er of ph otos available on the memory card. The camera i s not ready until this numb er ap pears. 3. Adjust your camera s ettings a s needed. Se e âAdjustin g the Camera S ettin gsâ on page 42 f or det a i ls. 4. Press the color L CD on/off color L CD on/off color L CD on/off color L CD on/off button to t urn the c olor L CD o n, then press t he left soft k ey until th e Still Still Still Still ico n appea rs on th e low e r over lay bar . Tip: T o conserv e battery power, t urn th e color L CD off a fter you choose t h e photo type. 5. Frame your subject in the viewfinde r, then press an d hold the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter bu tton 1/2 way down to allo w the ca mera to adjust the focus a nd exposure. If you see an o range light t o the left o f the vi ewfinder, you ma y need to chan ge the fl ash sett ing to adjus t for the lighti ng condi tions. Stat u s L CD Shutter but ton On/ of f bu tton Camera mode dial Number of photos available Still icon
Takin g Still , Burst and Ti melap se Photo s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 36 6. When you see the green light to the left of the viewfinder, press the Shutt er Shutter Shutter Shutter button al l th e way dow n to tak e the photo . Wait for the b eeps , indic ating t he pho to has been tak en, b efore r eleas ing the Shutter Shutte r Shutter Shutte r butto n. 7. If Ins tant Review is on, your photo ap pears briefly on the colo r L CD . If you are happy with the pho to, press th e Save Save Save Save bu tton (right sof t k ey) to sav e it on the memory c ard. If not, press the Delete Delete Delete Delete button (c enter soft k ey) to disca rd the ph oto an d try agai n. If you do not press ei ther b utton, the came ra au tomati cally sav es th e photo . T aking Burst Photos Use the B urst se tting to tak e photos in rapid success i on whi le holdi ng the Shutte r Shutter Shutter Shutter button down. Y ou ca n tak e up to four ph otos at a rate of one to three fra mes per second. The Burst setting i s recom mended f or takin g action photo s. The def ault Bur st rate is tw o frames per se cond. If you want to ch ange the Burst r ate, see bel ow. Note tha t you cannot use the f l ash for B urst p hotos; t he flash button i s inact ive. Note: Burst p hotos ta k e longer to pro cess tha n Stil l photos b ecaus e the camera ta k es up to three fr ames per secon d rather than a sin gle phot o. T o tak e Burst photos: T o tak e Burst photos: T o tak e Burst photos: T o tak e Burst photos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . The stat us L CD displ ays the a pproxi mate numb er of ph otos available on the memory card. The camera is not ready until this numb er ap pears. 2. Adjust your camera setting s as neede d. See âAdjust ing the Camera S ettin gsâ on page 42 f or det a i ls. 3. Press the col or LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off button to turn the c olor L CD on . Status L CD Shutter but ton On/off butt on Camera m ode dia l Number of phot os avai labl e
Takin g Still , Burst and Ti melap se Photo s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 37 4. Press th e left so ft k ey until th e Bu rst Burst Burst Burst icon appea rs on th e lower o verlay b ar. Tip: T o conserv e battery power, t urn th e color L CD off a fter you choose t h e photo type. If there is not en ough space on t he memory ca rd for the n umber of photos spec ified, the red light to t he lef t of th e viewf inder flashes and th e upp er overla y bar d isplays âNot en ough me mory.â T o solve this proble m, inse rt a new me mory car d, or t ry a lowe r photo quali ty s ettin g. 5. Frame your subject in the viewfinde r, then press an d hold the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter bu tton 1/2 way down to allo w the ca mera to adjust the focus a nd exposure. If you see an o range light t o the left o f the vi ewfinder, ther e may not be enough l ight on your s ubjec t. You c an stil l tak e the ph oto. 6. When you see a g reen light t o the left of the viewfi nder, press the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter butt on all t he way down and hold i t for the a mount of time you wan t to ta ke phot os, or unti l th e came ra bee ps. Tip: If you are taki ng an action se quence, you can move th e came ra to follow yo ur sub ject as you hol d the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter b utton d own. 7. If Instant Rev iew is o n, your firs t photo appears briefly on the c olor L CD. If you are ha ppy with t he photo , press the Sa ve Save Save Save button (right soft k ey) to save the series of ph o tos on the memor y card. If no t, p ress the Dele te Delete Delete Delete button (center s oft k ey) to disca rd the phot os and try ag ain. Pr essing Dele te Delete Delete Delete discar ds the entire se ries of phot os, not ju st the fi rst pho to. If you do not pres s either button, t he cam era autom atical ly save s the ph oto. Burst ic on
Takin g Still , Burst and Ti melap se Photo s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 38 T o change the Burst rate: T o change the Burst rate: T o change the Burst rate: T o change the Burst rate: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. The colo r L C D disp lays the Media Se ttin gs Media Settings Media Settings Media Settings menu . 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to Burs t Burs t Burs t Burs t . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t bu tton ( l e ft so ft key), a nd then sc roll down t o Burst Rate Burst Rate Burst Rate Burst Rate . 5. Use the 4- way ar row button to cho ose the d esired set ting, fro m 1 to 3 frames per s econd . 6. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to sav e your set tings and ex it the men us. T aking Timelapse Photos Use th e Time lapse s ettin g to tak e a series of ph otos at preset time int erval s. Y ou can sp ecify th e numb er of ph otos you wan t the ca mera t o tak e, as well as the amoun t of tim e betw een pho tos. It is re commen ded tha t you att ach the camera to a tri pod, or place it on a fir m surfac e at an ap prop riate distan ce and he i ght fr om the sub ject , to keep the camera ste ady. It is reco mmend ed tha t you u se a n AC power adap ter for lon g Timel apse phot o seq uences . Se e âUsin g an AC Po wer Adapter (recommended) â on page 2 9 for more i nformation. Tip: By def a ult the camera tak es 10 pho tos with 1 mi nute in tervals betwee n phot os. If you want to cha nge the Timelapse setti n gs, see be lo w.
Takin g Still , Burst and Ti melap se Photo s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 3 9 T o tak e Timelapse photos: T o tak e Timelapse photos: T o tak e Timelapse photos: T o tak e Timelapse photos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . The stat us L CD displ ays the a pproxi mate numb er of ph otos available on the memory card. The camera is not rea dy until this numb er ap pears. 2. Adjust your camera setting s as neede d. See âAdjust ing the Camera S ettin gsâ on page 42 f or det a i ls. 3. Pr ess th e color L CD on/off color L CD on/off color LCD on/off color L CD on/off but ton to tu rn th e co lo r L CD on. 4. Press th e left so ft k ey until th e Timelapse Timelapse Timelapse Timelapse ico n appe ars on the lo wer overl ay bar. Tip: T o conserve bat ter y pow er, tur n the color L CD off after you c ho ose the photo type . If there is not en ough space on t he memory ca rd for the n umber of photos spec ified, the red ligh t to the left of th e view finder flashes a nd the upper overla y bar displa ys âNot enou gh mem ory.â T o solve this pr oblem, inse rt a new m emory c ard, try a lower p hoto qua lity setti ng or decrease the numb er of photos specifie d in th e Timelapse se ttings. 5. Frame your subject in the viewfinde r, then press an d hold the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter bu tton 1/2 way down to allo w the ca mera to adjust the focus a nd exposure. If you see an o range light t o the left o f the vi ewfinder, ther e may not be enough l ight on your s ubjec t. You c an stil l tak e the ph oto. Status L CD Shut ter bu t ton On/off button Camera mo de dial Number of phot os a vai labl e Timelapse icon
Takin g Still , Burst and Ti melap se Photo s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 40 6. When you see a green li ght to t he left of the view finder , press the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter butt on all the way d own to take the first p hoto. Wait for the bee ps, ind icatin g the photo ha s bee n taken, before releas ing the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter b utton. The cam era au tomati cally tak es the numbe r of p hotos a t the ti me in terval specifi ed in the Tim elapse settin gs. Tip: If you wa nt to s top tak ing photos befo re the ca mera r eaches the numbe r of phot os specified in the Time la p se se ttin gs, press the Stop Stop Stop Stop button (right sof t key). 7. If Instan t Revi ew is on and you ar e using an AC power adapte r, your fi rst pho to appe ars on th e color LCD; an indicat or on t he uppe r overlay bar show s the nu mber o f photo s that ha ve b een tak en and a timer c ounts do wn the ti me until the next photo i s tak en. If Inst an t Revi ew is on and yo u ar e using batte ries, your fir st ph ot o appear s brie fly on the c ol or LCD. The color L CD turns it self of f after 30 seconds. Once th e seri es of ph otos ha s been ta k en and the fi rst pho to app ears o n the co lor L CD, press th e Sav e Save Save Save button (right sof t k ey) to save the series of photos on the memory c ard, or pre ss the Delete Delete Delete Delete button (c enter soft k ey) to discard t he photo s and try again. Pre ssing Dele te Delete Delete Delete disc ar ds th e enti re s er ies of phot os , no t j ust t he fi rst on e. If you do n ot pr ess eith er button, the camera a utoma ticall y saves t h e pho tos. T o change the Timelaps e se ttings: T o change the Timelaps e se ttings: T o change the Timelaps e se ttings: T o change the Timelaps e se ttings: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. The colo r L C D disp lays the Media Se ttin gs Media Settings Media Settings Media Settings menu. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to scroll down to Timela pse Timelapse Timela pse Timelapse . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key).
Takin g Still , Burst and Ti melap se Photo s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 41 5. Use the 4- way ar row button to se lect a s etting to change. 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to selec t the de sired settin g. 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to sav e your set tings and ex it the men us. Setti ng Setti ng Setti ng Setting Description Description Description Descript ion Default Default Default Default Inte rval Inte rval Inte rval Inte rval This i s the a mount of t ime you w ant th e cam era to w a it before taking the next p hoto. Select f rom 1 minute to 24 ho urs. 1 min # Imag es # Imag es # Imag es # Imag es This is the number of photos you want th e ca mera to take. Sele ct fro m 2 to 1 000 p hotos. 10
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 42 Adjusting the Camera Settings T aki ng Blac k an d Whit e Phot os Y ou can tak e either co lor or black a nd whit e photo s using the Sti ll, Burs t, or Ti melap se sett ings. Th e def ault is color . This sett ing rema in s until yo u change it, e ven if you turn the ca mera of f. T o change to color or black and white photos: T o change to color or black and white photos: T o change to color or black and white photos: T o change to color or black and white photos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Select the p hoto typ e. 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left soft k ey), then scrol l down t o Color Color Color Color . 5. Use the 4- way arrow button to choose B&W B&W B&W B&W (blac k and whit e) or Fu ll Ful l Ful l Ful l color . 6. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 4 3 Changing the Flash Setting T o chan ge the flash setting: T o chan ge the flash setting: T o change the flash setti ng: T o chan ge the flash setting: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Pr ess the Flash Flash Flash Flash button r ep eat edly u n til th e f la sh s ett in g you wa nt displays on the s tatus L CD. The flash setti ng is effecti ve for St ill and Time lapse ph otos, an d remain s until you chang e it, even i f you turn the came ra off . Note: Y ou cannot u se the fl ash for Burst photos ; the flash but ton is i nactiv e. The fla sh setti ngs are i ndicat ed by ico ns on th e statu s L CD: Note: The fla sh needs to recha rge betw een pho tos. When th e red lig ht next to the v iewfind er is off, you can take another fl ash photo. Auto The camera determi nes the n eed for a flash based on lightin g conditio ns. This is the defa ult set ting. On The flash will be used, rega rdless of the lighting c ondition s. Off T he flash will not be used, regardless of the lighting co nditions . Auto wi th red-e ye reduct ion The flash will be used if needed . Red -eye red ucti on minimiz es the occurr ence of red-ey e in phot os of pe op le or ani mals by flashin g twice . Flash button
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 44 Y ou can also change the f lash se ttings u sing th e camer a menu s. T o se lect a flash setting using t he cam era menu s: T o se lect a flash setting using t he cam era menu s: T o se lect a flash setting using t he cam era menu s: T o se lect a flash setting using t he cam era menu s: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way arrow but ton to scroll to th e Preferences Preferen ces Preferen ces Preferen ces menu, then scro ll down to Capture Capture Capture Capture . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Scroll to Flash Flash Flash Flash . 6. Use the 4-w ay arrow b u tton to s el ect a flash setting. See the table above for in for mation ab out eac h of t he fla sh setting s. Note: Y ou cannot u se the fl ash for Burst ph otos . If you choose a flash sett ing from the me nu but you are taking Burst photos, the set ting w ill not be effect ive until you tak e your next Sti ll or T imelaps e photo. 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus. Tip: T o co nserve batte ry powe r, turn the colo r L CD off af t er you ch o ose th e sett ing.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 45 Adjusting the Photo Quality The ph oto quali ty sett ing determ ines th e phot oâs resol ution a nd com pressio n. Bec ause of t his, i t also affe cts how many ph otos can be stor ed on t he memory card. Th e phot o quality s ettin g remai ns the sa me for e ach pho to of t he same t ype (St ill, B urst, a nd Timel aps e) unti l you ch ange it, even if you tu rn the camera off a nd on aga in. When s electing the ph oto quali ty, k eep in mind: ⢠How you plan t o use the p hoto (o n scre en, printe d, enlarged, etc. ). ⢠Higher p hoto qu ality re quires m ore s pace on the me mory car d; lo wer phot o qual ity req uires l ess spac e. ⢠Becaus e photo quality a ffects the numb er of photos that c an be st ored on the me mory car d, the n umber of availa ble photos (di splayed on the statu s L CD) chan ges as you cha nge the phot o quality. Th e number of photos is a c onservat ive e stimat e, so yo u migh t find t h at yo u can tak e more phot os than it ind icates. ⢠Y ou can use different phot o qualit y settin gs for different photos on the same memo ry car d. ⢠Y ou can cho ose differ ent photo qu ality set tings for Stil l, Bu rst an d Timela pse ph otos. ⢠The came ra pr ocesse s photo s with F ine or Su per-fi ne diamon d photo quality f aster than th ose with lower p hoto qualit y. If you want to tak e several p hotos, o ne aft er the ot her, in a short p eriod of t ime, u se the Fi ne or Super- fine p hoto qual ity se tting.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 46 T o adj ust the pho to quality: T o adj ust the pho to quality: T o adjust the photo quality: T o adj ust the pho to quality: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Photo Quality Photo Quality Photo Quality Photo Quality button repea tedly unt il the des i red ph oto quali ty sett ing displ ays on th e stat us L CD. Photo quality ico n Photo quality button
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 47 Each of t he pho to qual ity setti ngs co rrespond s to a co mbination of resolut ion and co mpression setti ngs. Th e diamond icons on the status L CD indica te phot o qual ity as follows : Pho to qu ali ty Pho to qu ali ty Pho to qu ali ty Photo quality Description Description Description Description Resolution Resolu tion Resolu tion Resolu tion Compre ssion Compre ssio n Compre ssio n Compre ssio n E-mail Is the most memory-e ffi cient. Use this sett ing for p hotos th at you plan to send via e -mail, p lace on the In ternet , use for screen save rs or wall pa per, or pr in t up to 3x5 inch pr ints. Low (640x480 pixels) High Basic P roduce s qual ity photo s and u ses le ss memo ry than Fine mode. Use t hi s s etti ng for pho tos that you pl an to s tore on your disk or in a da tabase, or print up to 4x6 inch print s. Medium (1152x864 p ixels) Medium Fine Produc es high- quali ty photos a nd requires less memory than Super-fine mode. U se this setti ng for phot os that you plan to print up to 5x7 inch prin t s. This i s the defa ult se tting. High (1600x1200 pixels) Medium Super- fine Produc es the highest-qualit y photo s and uses the most memory. Use this setting for tak ing photo s you plan to enla rge and prin t . High (1600x1200 pixels) Low
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 48 Y ou can also a djust the p hoto qual ity by adj usting the individu al resolut ion and com pressio n settings for each of th e three t ype s of p hotos: Still, Burst and T imela pse. T o adjust t he photo qual ity using th e men us: T o adjust t he photo qual ity using th e men us: T o adjust t he photo qual ity using th e men us: T o adjust t he photo qual ity using th e men us: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Select the p hoto typ e. 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Use the 4- way ar row button to se lect a r esolution or compression setting to change. Setti ng Setti ng Setti ng Setting Description Description Description Descriptio n Default Default De fault Default Resolu tion Resolu tion Resolu tion Resolu tion This is t he number of pixels in each photo. More pixels r esults in higher photo q ualit y. Choo se from H igh, M edium, or Low. Select a higher resoluti on fo r photos th at you want to enlarg e. Selec t a low er reso lution for photos that yo u want t o email (so th at the p hoto fi le size is small). High Compress ion Compress ion Compression Compress ion This is the a mount each p hoto is compres sed. T he com press ion lev el is a t rade-off between phot o qualit y and storage sp ace: t he lowe r the compres sion level, t he highe r the ph oto qua lity b ut the la rger the phot o file si ze. Cho ose fro m High , Mediu m, or Lo w. Sele ct a lower compres sion level for better q ualit y photos . Sel ect a h igher compression level to save space on the memory card. Medium
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 49 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to selec t the de sired settin g. As you decide which s ettin gs to use, reme mber th at th ere is a t rade- off be tween r esoluti on and c ompres sion. Higher res o lution photos p rovide better quality, but if you use hi gh res olutio n and high c ompres sion, so me of the ph otoâs detai l will be los t. Some c ombinat ions of s ettin gs corr espond t o the ca meraâs stand ard setti ngs i ndicate d by the photo q uality diamond s on the status L CD. If you cho ose to use com binatio ns of s ettings th at do n ot cor respo nd to t he camer aâs sta ndard ph oto q ualit y settings , you wil l see no pho to qual ity diam onds on the s tatus L CD. T his ju st means that you a re usi ng a custom phot o qualit y settin g. Tip: If you arenât su re which settings to select, press t he Default Default Default Default button (left soft k ey). 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to sav e your set tings and ex it the men us.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 50 Using the Zoom The HP Ph otoSm art C500 Di gital Came ra ha s opt ical z oom and digi tal z oom. Op tical zoom uses th e len s to foc us i n on a di stant ob ject. Use it t o increa se the s ize of a subje ct that is dist ant fr om you. D igital zoom s elects pixels from the ce nter of the phot o and enlarges the image furthe r. Use digital zo om once you have reached the maxim um opti cal zoo m, to i ncrea se th e s ize o f your s u bject e ven fu rther . If you use the digita l zoom, yo ur photos wil l ha ve lower resol u t ion than th ey usually would for a partic ular photo quali ty setti ng. It is recommen ded th at you pri nt thes e photos in smalle r size s. Zoom type Zoom type Zoom type Zoom ty pe When to use it When to u se it When to u se it When to u se it Example Example Example Example Optical (3x) Optical (3x) Optical (3x) Optical (3x) Use this sett in g wh en you r sub je ct i s dista nt from you a nd you wa nt to increas e or decrease its s ize in th e photo . You are ta king a photo of a sce ne and you want to zoom in on a tree. Digit al (2x ) Digit al (2x ) Digit al (2x ) Digit al (2x ) Use this se tt in g when you r su bje ct i s di sta nt from you a nd you wa nt to increas e its size more tha n you ca n with th e optic al zoom. You are ta king a photo of a sce ne and you want to i nc rea se th e si ze of a b ird in the tree. Pho to qu ali ty Pho to qu ali ty Pho to qu ali ty Photo qual ity Standard res olution Stan dar d re solut ion Stan dar d re solut ion Standar d re solu ti on Resolu ti on with digital zoom Resolu tion with digital z oom Resolu tion with digital z oom Resolu tion with digital z oom 640x480 pi xels 640x480 pi xels 1152x864 pixe ls 800x600 pixels 1600x1200 pixels 800x600 pixels 1600x1200 pixels 800x600 pixels
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 51 To u s e o p t i c a l z o o m : To u s e o p t i c a l z o o m : To u s e o p t i c a l z o o m : To u s e o p t i c a l z o o m : 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. As you frame your subject in the v iewfinde r, move the Zoom Zoom Zoom Zoom contr ol to the right to zoom in o n your subject , or to th e left to zoom out. 3. T ak e your photo. T o us e digital zoom: T o us e digital zoom: T o us e digital zoom: T o us e digital zoom: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the co lor LCD on/o ff colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off button to turn the c olor L CD on . Note: The color L CD must be on for d igital zoom. 3. If you do not see the o verlay bars o n the co lor L CD, press the Ov erl ay Overl ay Overl ay Overl ay button to tur n the ov erlay ba rs on . 4. Zoom al l the w ay in on your subject us ing the Zoom Zoom Zoom Zoom c ontrol. Relea se th e Zoom Zoom Zoom Zoom control and then pr ess it to th e right again. The digi tal zo om icon displays in the top overl ay bar . 5. Frame your subject on t he colo r L CD rather than th rough the viewf inder. Us e the Zoom Zoom Zoom Zoom control t o make furth er adju stments. 6. T ake you r photo . 7. Press the co lor LCD on/o ff colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off button to turn th e color L CD and digita l zoom off. Zoom control Digita l zo om icon
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 52 Using Macro Mode Use macr o mode to ta k e close-u p photos o f small objects . For exa mple, use macro m ode to tak e a close-up ph oto of a flower . T o tur n on macr o mod e: T o tur n on macr o mod e: T o tur n on macr o mod e: T o tur n on macr o mod e: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the co lor LCD on/o ff colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off button to turn the c olor L CD on . Note: The color L CD must be on for macro mode. 3. If you do not see the o verlay bars o n the co lor L CD, press the Ov erl ay Overl ay Overl ay Overl ay button to tur n the ov erlay ba rs on . 4. Press th e center soft k ey until the macro mode ic on app ears in color a t the cen ter of the lowe r overl ay bar. Note: The cent er soft k ey toggles between the sel f-timer and ma cro mod e so tha t you can tak e photos usin g just on e of th e modes , or both at th e same t ime. Th e icons appea r in color if they a re on. K eep p ressing the butto n until you hav e selec ted the combi nation of self- timer a nd mac ro mode that you want; o ne on, both on, or both off. 5. View your subject through the viewfinder, an d then fr ame you r photo on the col or L CD. 6. T ake you r photo . 7. Press the cen ter sof t k ey twice to t urn macr o mode off. The macro mode icon ap pears i n bla ck an d white , indica ting t hat mac ro mode is o ff. Macro mode icon Self-timer icon
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 53 Using the Self-Timer Use the sel f-timer to tak e a ph oto of your self or a pos ed group p hoto. T en sec onds (:10) i s the def ault amou nt of time the c ame ra wait s befor e takin g the phot o. Y ou can cha ng e this delay ti me to 3, 5, 10, 20, or 30 se co nds. Note: The self-ti mer is only avail able for Still phot os. T o use th e se lf-t im e r: T o use th e se lf-t im e r: T o use th e se lf-t im e r: T o use th e se lf-t im e r: 1. Attac h the cam era to a tripo d, or place it o n a firm surf ace at an appr opriat e distan ce an d heigh t from th e sub ject. 2. T urn the camera on and turn the c amera mode di al to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 3. Press the col or LCD colo r LCD colo r LCD colo r LCD on/o ff on/of f on /off on/of f button to turn the c olor LCD on. 4. Select the Still Still Still Still opt ion : ⢠Press the lef t soft k ey repeatedly until t he Still Stil l Stil l Stil l icon displa ys on the lower ov erlay bar. T ripo d moun t Still icon
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 54 5. Press the ce nte r so ft k ey until you see :1 0 :10 :10 :10 (or the number of se conds you have s et) app ear on th e upp er ove rlay bar, and the self- timer icon a ppear in co lor on th e lo wer overl ay bar. Note: The center soft k ey toggles between the s elf- timer and macro mo des so that you c an tak e photos u sing ju st one of the modes, or b oth at the same time. The icons appear in colo r if they are on. K eep pressi ng the button un ti l you hav e sele cted th e co mbina tion of self-timer an d macro mode tha t you wan t; on e on, bo th on, o r both off. 6. Frame your s ubject in the view finder, the n press and hold th e Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter button 1 /2 way d own to a llow th e camera to adju st the fo cus an d exposure. 7. When you see a green light to the left of the vi ewfinder , press t he Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter but ton all the way down, th en relea se it. The r ed self -timer indica tor ligh t on t he front of the c amera starts blinking. The ligh t bl inks faster for the final 3 second s, then stops blin king ju st be fore the c ame ra tak es the ph oto. Self-timer activated Self-tim er icon Macro mode ic on Self-ti m e r indica tor light
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 55 T o chan ge the self- timer delay : T o chan ge the self- timer delay : T o chan ge the self- timer delay : T o chan ge the self- timer delay : 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the co lor LCD on/o ff colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off colo r LCD on /off button to turn the c olor L CD on . 3. Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button. 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to the Prefe rences Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences menu , then scroll down to Capture. Capture. Capture. Capture. 5. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 6. Sc rol l to Se lf-Time r. Self- Timer. Self-Timer . Self- Timer. 7. Use the 4-way ar row button to de creas e or in crease t he num ber of s econds the ca mera wa its befo re tak ing the photo . Y ou can s elect 3, 5, 1 0, 2 0, or 30 seco nds. 8. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 56 Setting the Exposure The HP Ph otoSm art C500 D igital Camera a utomati cally a djusts the amou nt of li ght in your photo for different ligh ti ng con diti on s. It inc ludes two auto mati c method s (Mat rix an d S pot) w hich cal culat e the expo sure s ettin g differen tly. T o ma k e the final p hoto l ighter o r dark er than the autom atic expos ure wo uld pr oduce, you can also manually adjus t the exposure. E xposure can be adjusted as much as /-1.5 EVs (Exposure V alues) in 0.3 EV increments. T o chan ge the ex posure setti ng: T o chan ge the ex posure setti ng: T o chan ge the ex posure setti ng: T o chan ge the ex posure setti ng: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Photo A s sis t Phot o Assist Phot o Assist Phot o Assist menu. The Pho to Ass ist men u displa ys with Exposure Exposure Exposure Exposure sel ec ted . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Use the 4- way arrow button to selec t an exposu re opti on.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 57 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to choose a sett ing. Tip: If you arenât su re which settings to select, press t he Default Default Default Default button (left soft k ey). 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus. If you use the AE method AE method AE method AE method , yo u can als o adjust whet her the camera cont inuously ca lculates t he ex posure (Conti nuous AE ), or calcula tes the exp osure w hen you press the Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter b utton 1/2 way down and th en locks the exposure ( Auto Exp osure Loc k). If you are t aking a p hoto of a scene tha t has d ark er a nd lighter section s, (for example, a subje ct stand ing in a shadow ) Auto E xposure Lock c an help you to exp ose the p hoto co rrectly . F or example, you c an aim the camera at a dark er part of the s cene, press the Shutte r Shutte r Shutter Shutte r butto n 1/2 way d own, and then move the camera to incl ude a brighter part of the scene. Option Option Option Option Description Description Description Descript ion Default Default Default Default EV EV EV EV Select EV (Exposure Value) to man ually adjust t he exposure from -1.5 EV to 1.5 EV, i n 0.3 EV increm ents, values for lighte r photos, - val ues for da rker ph oto s. 0 AE Method AE Method AE Me thod AE Method Select AE (Au tomat i c Expo sure) Me thod to have the camera automat ical ly adjust the ex posure for d iffere nt lig hting condit ions. T here a re two A E me thods, M atrix and Spot. Matrix calculates the exposure by takin g the avera ge of sever al points of light in the p hoto. Spot c alculat es the exp osure by readin g the li ght from one sm all spot in the center of t he photo. Matri x
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 58 T o adjust the AE methodâs meter s etting: T o adjust the AE methodâs meter s etting: T o adjust the AE methodâs meter s etting: T o adjust the AE methodâs meter s etting: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Pr eferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences men u, the n scro ll do w n to Meter Meter Meter Meter . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Use the 4- way arrow button to selec t an exposu re opti on. ⢠Co ntinuou s AE Contin uou s AE Contin uou s AE Contin uou s AE ca lculate s the auto m at ic exp os ure cont inuous ly when you p ress th e Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter b utton. ⢠Auto Exposure Lock Auto Exposure Lock Auto Exposure Lock Auto Exposure Lock calc ulates the automatic exposure when you press th e Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter but ton 1 /2 way do wn, and then loc ks th e expo sure at that setti ng. 6. Pr ess t he Sele ct Select Select Select butto n (lef t soft key) to choo se an op tion . 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus. Setti ng th e Whit e Bal ance Fo r the trues t colo r re produc tion in you r phot os, th e HP P hotoS mart C 500 Digi tal Camera autom ati cally a djus ts the balanc e of c olors to mak e a true white in different lighti ng con ditions . Y ou can ma nuall y adj ust this s ettin g to h ave the camera compensate for specif ic lighti ng co nditions. The white balan ce settin g remains the same unti l you change i t, eve n if you turn th e camer a off.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 59 T o ma nually adj ust the white balan ce settin g: T o ma nually adj ust the white balan ce settin g: T o ma nually adj ust the white balan ce settin g: T o ma nually adj ust the white balan ce settin g: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Photo A s sis t Phot o Assist Phot o Assist Phot o Assist menu, then scroll down to White Whit e White Whit e Balance Balance Balance Balance . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Use the 4- way ar row button to se lect a w hite balan ce opti on. 6. Press the Selec t Select Select Select button (left so ft k ey). 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus. Setti ng Setti ng Setti ng Setting Select this option wh en Select this optio n wh en Select this optio n wh en Select this optio n wh en Auto Auto Auto Auto You wa nt the c amera t o autom atica lly sens e the lighting c ondit ions an d adju s t the wh ite ba la nce a ppropri atel y for op ti mum col or rep ro ductio n in your photo . Auto is the default. Dayli ght Dayli ght Dayli ght Dayli ght You ar e taking a phot o in daylight wi thout arti ficial light ing. Fluor esce nt Fluor esce nt Fluoresc ent Fluor esce nt You are taki ng a ph ot o und er flu o resc en t light. Tu n g s t e n Tu n g s t e n Tu n g s t e n Tu n g s t e n Y ou are taking a photo under n ormal incand escent light, su ch as the li ght from tungst en fil ament light bu lbs in h ousehol d lamps. Fla sh Fla sh Fla sh Fla sh You ar e using the flas h to il lumina te the s ubject .
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 60 Using Instant Review After you tak e a photo, In stant Rev iew briefl y displays the photo on the color L CD, even if you h ave not turned t he color LCD on. If you are hap py wi t h the phot o, you can then sa ve it on the memo ry card . If not, y ou can di scard the photo a nd try ag ain. I f you do n ot use Inst ant Re view, th e cam era autom aticall y save s the pho to. Instant Review defa ults to off, so if you wa nt to use this feature, you need to turn it on fi rst. Tip: If you want to t ak e several ph otos in quick success ion, turn Instant Review o ff. With Insta nt Revie w on, the camera tak es longer t o process each ph oto. T o turn Instant Review o n or off: T o turn Instant Review o n or off: T o turn Instant Rev iew on or off: T o turn Instant Review o n or off: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Pr eferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences menu , then scroll down to Capture. Capture. Capture. Capture. 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Scroll to Instant R eview. Instant Review. Instant Review. Instant Review. 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to turn Instant Review on or off. 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 61 T o us e Ins tant Rev iew: T o us e Ins tant Rev iew: T o us e Ins tant Rev iew: T o us e Ins tant Rev iew: 1. T ake your photo . After a few sec onds, you r phot o appe ars bri efly on th e color LCD . Note: If your p hoto doe s not ap pear on the col or L CD, you need to turn Instan t Revi ew on. 2. Press the Sav e Save Save Save button ( right soft k ey) to save yo ur pho to, or p ress the Delete Delete Delete Delete button (c enter soft key) to discard the ph oto. Note: The camer a auto matic ally saves the photo if you d o not s pecify t hat you want to save or dele te it. Y ou can clea r the col or L CD and save the photo by pressi ng the Shut ter Shutter Shutter Shutter but ton 1 /2 way do wn. 3. If you chose to delet e the ph oto, p ress the Delete Delete Delete Delete button (left s oft k ey) to confirm t he de letion. I f you do n o t confir m that you wa nt to de lete the pho to before t he photo di sappears from the colo r L CD , the camer a saves the photo.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 62 Setting the Eye Start Eye Start brings the came ra out o f slee p mode a nd star ts adju sting th e exposure w h en your eye is close to the viewfi nder. Eye Start wor ks by using se nsors located next to the vie wfinder. It is o n by de faul t. T o t urn Eye Start on or off: T o t urn Eye Start on or off: T o t urn Eye Start on or off: T o t urn Eye Start on or off: 1. T urn the camera on and turn the cam era mode dial to Re c Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences me nu, then scr oll dow n to Capture Capture Capture Capture . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Use the 4- way arrow button to turn Eye Start on or off. 6. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the men us. Setting Hand Held The ca mera ha s a H and Held set ting whic h hel ps yo u to tak e photos that are clear and sha rp . If the Ha nd Held se tting is on, the came r a a llows you to tak e photos with a slowe st sh u tte r sp eed of 1/8 s econd. B y def ault, Hand Held is on . If you tur n the Ha nd He ld set ting o ff, the c amera a llows you ta k e pho tos with a shutter speed as slow as 2 sec onds. I t is rec ommend ed that you use the cam era wit h a tri pod, or place the camer a on a f irm, st able su rfac e if yo u need to use a slow sh utter s peed. Eye Start s enso rs
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 63 T o turn Hand Held o n or off: T o turn Hand Held o n or off: T o turn Hand Held o n or off: T o turn Hand Held o n or off: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Pr eferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences men u, the n scro ll do w n to Capture Capture Capture Capture . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Scroll down to Han d H eld Hand Hel d Hand Hel d Hand Hel d . 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to turn Ha nd Held on or off. 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus. Setting the Counter Res et Counter Reset all ows you t o choose how you wa nt to number yo ur photos on the memory car d. If you w ant to st art number ing photo s from 1 each t ime you del ete all the phot os from t he memory card, turn Cou nter Reset on. I f you want to cont inue numberi ng pho tos, even after erasing a ll t he photo s from th e me mory c ard, so t hat you know the total numbe r of ph otos you ha ve ta k en sin ce you bought t he cam era, turn Co unter Res et off. It is off by defau lt. T o set Counter Re se t: T o set Counter Re se t: T o set Counter Re se t: T o set Counter Re se t: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Pr eferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences men u, the n scro ll do w n to Capture Capture Capture Capture .
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 64 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Scroll down to Coun ter Re set Counte r Reset Counter Re set Counte r Reset . 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to turn Counter R eset on or off. 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus. Setting Auto Shuto ff Y our HP Phot oSmart C500 D igital Camer a has an a utomat ic sh utoff, w h ich is de signed to hel p conse rve battery l ife during period s of ina ctivity. A uto Sh utoff i s on by def ault. It i s recom mended t hat you turn Aut o Shut off off when you are downl oa di ng phot os to your computer. Auto Shutoff turns o ff camer a func tions af ter the follow ing peri ods of inacti vity: ⢠If the camer a is in sleep mode, pre ss any but ton to âwak e upâ the camera. ⢠If the camera ha s turned itsel f off, press the on/off on/of f on /off on/of f bu tton t o turn i t back on . Powe r so urce Powe r so urce Po we r so ur ce Power source Camera mode Camera mo de Camera mo de Camera mo de Sleep Sleep S leep Sleep Power off Power off Power off Power off Battery power Battery power B attery power Battery power Rec, Rev, Play 30 seconds 10 minutes PC 4 minu tes 1 0 minut es AC power adapter AC power adapter AC power adapter AC power adapter Rec, R e v, Pl ay, PC 30 m i n utes
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 65 T o turn Auto Shutoff on or off: T o turn Auto Shutoff on or off: T o turn Auto Shutoff on or off: T o turn Auto Shutoff on or off: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Pr eferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences menu, then scroll down to General Genera l Genera l Genera l . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Scroll down to Auto Shuto ff Auto S hutof f Auto S hutof f Auto S hutof f . 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to turn A uto Sh utoff on or off. 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) to save the settings and exit t he menus . Setti ng th e Beep The camera uses a beep to c ommunicate that an even t has tak en place. F or example, when you ta k e a photo, t h e camera beeps to let you kno w that it has finished capturing the image. Beep is on by d efault. The camera beeps: ⢠T wice after a ph oto ha s been ta k en. ⢠Once at the beginni ng of a Burst series, a nd then tw ice at t he end of the series. ⢠Fo r 3 sec onds when t he batteries are l ow. ⢠When you turn the camer a on, if the me mory c ard is d amaged or u nformatt ed.
Adjust ing the Came ra Sett ings HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 66 ⢠When you press th e Shutter Shutter Shutter Shutter button, if the memory card is full. ⢠If the camera is on and you insert a full memory card. T o t urn th e Beep on or off: T o t urn th e Beep on or off: T o t urn th e Beep on or off: T o t urn th e Beep on or off: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rec Rec Rec Rec . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Pr eferen ces Prefer ences Prefer ences Prefer ences menu, then scroll down to General Genera l Genera l Genera l . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Use the 4- way arrow button to turn Beep on o r off. 6. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 67 Chapter 4 - Viewing P hotos Overview After you have tak en some photo s wit h your H P PhotoS mart C 500 Digi tal Ca mera, you can view th em on th e camera âs colo r L CD or on a telev i s ion sc reen. Depend ing on th e came ra mode y ou use ( R eview or Play) , you can : ⢠view thu mbnail s of your photos ⢠view on e photo a t a time u sing the en tire screen ⢠play ba ck Bur st, Tim elaps e, an d groupe d photo sequenc es ⢠creat e a slides how
Overview HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 68 See the table belo w for the features a vailable in each mod e. Tip: T o conserv e batter y life , use an A C power ad apter w h ile v iewing p hotos on the col or L CD. See âUsin g an A C Power A dapter (r ecomme nded)â on page 29 for deta ils. Mode Mode Mode Mode What you can do What you can do What you can do What you can do Review Review Revi ew Review ⢠View thu mbnai ls of your phot os ⢠View B urst, T imela pse, and grouped photo s ⢠Mark pho tos for further action ⢠Delete selec ted or mark ed phot os ⢠Protect p hotos fr om being d eleted ⢠Categori ze p hotos for easy s earchi ng and fi ndin g ⢠Group photos for sor ting an d pri nting ⢠Sear ch fo r a p arti cular photo Pla y Pla y Pla y Pla y ⢠View one photo at a ti me, u sing the enti re scr een ⢠Play ba ck Bur st, Tim elaps e, and groupe d photo sequenc es ⢠Zoom in on pho tos to see detai ls in close-up ⢠Delete si ngle o r groupe d Stil l, Burs t and Timel apse p hotos ⢠Create a sl ideshow on the color LCD or o n a telev ision
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 6 9 Using Review Mode When you use Rev iew mod e, th e color L CD automa tically d ispla ys the ph otos sa ved on the me mory c ard. Y our photos a ppe ar as sm all thu mbnail i mages a cross the top of the d isplay. A l arger th umbnai l of th e selected photo appear s below the small th umbnail s; the p h ot o info rmatio n (the ima ge number , the imag e date an d time, and the group or camera name) ap pears o n the lower ri ght of th e displa y. Selecting Photos T o sel e c t ph otos : T o sel e c t ph otos : T o se l ect p hot os: T o sel e c t ph otos : 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4- way ar row button to sc roll thro ugh the thumb nails until the selection mark er point s to th e phot o you wan t. Press and hold th e butt on to scroll t hrough your photos r apidly. Selection marke r Photo information Thumbn ails Selected photo 4-way arrow butt on
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 70 Marking Photos Y ou can âma rkâ s everal p hot os so tha t when you sele ct an action, the action appli es to all ma rk ed photos. F or example, you can mark s everal p hotos a nd de lete the m all at on ce, rath er than delet ing one p hoto a t a tim e. If yo u mark an y pho to th at rep re sent s a closed grou p , al l the ph oto s in the grou p ar e mar k ed. T o ma rk ph otos: T o ma rk ph otos: T o ma rk ph otos: T o ma rk ph otos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to the p hoto you want t o ma rk . 3. Press the Mark Mark Mark Mark button (left soft k ey). A notc h app ears on t he lower right c orner of t he sele cted p hoto a nd its m atchi ng thum bnai l. 4. Repe at Ste ps 2 an d 3 to m ark addi tional photo s. OR T o mark al l phot os, press and hold do wn the Mark Mark Mark Mark button (left s oft k ey) unt il Mark All Mark All Mark All Mark All appears on the lower overl ay bar. Note: Photos remain mark ed until yo u pe rform an action on them, or until you unm ark th em. A notch in dica tes a mar k ed phot o
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 71 T o un mark marked photos: T o un mark marked photos: T o un mark marked photos: T o un mark marked photos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to the p hoto you want t o unmark. 3. Press the Unm ar k Unm ark Unm ar k Unm ark button (l eft so ft k ey). The notc h disa ppears from th e low er right corne r of the s elect ed photo and its ma tching thumbn ail. Y ou can un mark all th e ph o tos on the memor y card by press i ng a nd h ol di ng do wn the Unmark Unmark Unmark Unmark b utton (l ef t soft ke y ) u n t i l Un m ark A ll Unm ark All Un mar k A ll Unm ark All appears on the lowe r over lay bar. Deleting Photos Y ou can delete a single photo or a ll mark ed photos in Revi ew mode . Y ou can also de lete sin gle ph otos i n Play mode (see âDe leting Photos â on page 89). Note: Protect ed photos will not be deleted. S ee âProte cting Photosâ on pag e 72 for m ore info rmat ion. T o dele te phot os: T o dele te phot os: T o delete ph otos: T o dele te phot os: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Select a photo or mark the photos you w ant to del ete. If you wa nt to del ete all the p hotos, you can c hoose âMar k All.â See âMa rking Photosâ on page 70 for more i nforma tion. If you wa nt to d elete all of t he photos in a group, or a Tim elapse or Bur st series, you ca n close o r col lapse th e photos, until just th e one photo t hat repres ents the group o r seri es is sh owing. Y ou can th en se lect th e photo as you woul d a singl e Still p hoto, f or del eting.
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 7 2 3. Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button. 4. Press the Delet e Delete Delete Delete button (center soft k ey). The col or L CD displa ys a mess age aski ng you to confi rm that yo u want to delete the ph otos. 5. Press the Delet e Delete Delete Delete butt on (left s oft key) to delet e the ph otos. Protecting Photos Protect ing ph otos preven ts them fr om being deleted fr om the memory ca rd. Y ou also ca nnot ch ange the c ategory o f protec ted ph o tos . T o prot ect photos: T o prot ect photos: T o protect photos : T o prot ect photos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Select a ph oto or m ark th e photo s you wan t to prot ect. See âMarki ng Phot osâ on page 70 for more i nforma tion. Note: Protect acts on m ark ed phot os i f t h ere a re an y, o r on the current p hot o i f th er e a re n o marked p h oto s. If you want t o protect just t he cur rent photo , first unmark al l the p hotos o n the mem ory card. 3. Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button. 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to Protect Protect Protect Protect . 5. Press the Protect Protect Protect Protect button (ce nter soft k ey). The Prot ec ted i con appe ar s in the photo i nfo rmat io n to in di ca te th a t the ph ot o is p rot ect e d. Prot ected i c on
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 73 T o remove prot ec tion fr o m ph ot os: T o remove prot ec tion fr o m ph ot os: T o remove prot ec tion fr o m ph ot os: T o remove prot ec tion fr o m ph ot os: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Select a phot o or ma rk the p hotos you want t o unpro tect. See â Markin g Photosâ on pa ge 70 for more informat ion. 3. Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button. 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to Protect Protect Protect Protect . 5. Press the Unprotect Unprotect Unprotect Unprotect b utton (l eft soft k ey). Note: Y o u must unpr otect y o ur prot ected ph otos be f ore yo u can del ete them. Categorizing Photos Y ou can assi gn a cat egory to your phot os, mak ing them easier to find. Y ou can cate gorize on e photo at a tim e, or mark ph otos and ap ply one c ategory to all of the ma rk ed photos. Cate gories a re also u seful wh en you a re cre ating a slidesho w. For example, you co uld cr eate a slid eshow to share your v acation photos w ith friends a nd famil y. Note: Y ou cannot assi gn or c hange c ategorie s for pro tected photos . T o categ orize photos : T o categ orize photos : T o categorize ph otos: T o categ orize photos : 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Select a phot o or mark the p hotos you w ant t o categor ize. Se e âMark ing Phot osâ on p age 70 for more informat ion. 3. Press the Categor y Category Category Category but ton (cent er soft k ey).
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 74 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to the c ategory you want to use. Y ou can cho ose from the foll owing ca tegories: 5. Press the Select Select Select Select button (left so ft k ey). A check mark a ppears next to the category , and the c ame ra automa tically exi t the men us. The icon for the ca tegory you selec ted app ears in the p hoto inf orm at ion. T o deselect a category: T o deselect a category: T o deselect a category: T o deselect a category: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Select the photo whose category you want to desel ect. 3. Press the Categor y Category Category Category but ton (cent er soft k ey). 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to the c ategory you want to dese lect. 5. Press the Dese lect Desele ct Dese lect Desele ct button (left soft k ey). The camera automat ically exits the men us. The category icon disa ppears from the photo informa tion. ⢠Landsca pe ⢠Vacati on ⢠Friends ⢠Family ⢠Pets ⢠Work ⢠Triang le ⢠Square ⢠Circle Category icon
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 75 T o chan ge a category: T o chan ge a category: T o change a category: T o chan ge a category: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Select the photo whose category you want to cha nge. 3. Press the Categor y Category Category Category but ton (cent er soft k ey). 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to the n ew catego ry you wan t to selec t. 5. Press the Select Select Select Select button (left so ft k ey) to desele ct the o ld catego ry and sel ect the new cate gory. The came ra au tomati cally exit s the menus. T he new c ategory i con appea rs in th e pho to inf ormation. Grouping Photos Grou ping ph otos is similar to ca tegori zing th em. An i mpo rtant di fferen ce is th at gro uping al so aff ects t he organi zation of phot os on the mem ory ca rd. Wh en you create a group, you are creat ing a fol der on the me mory card, lik e you would cr eate a fo lder on the har d driv e of your comp uter. As you a dd pho tos to the grou p, the y are organ ize d in th e g rou pâs fol der. Y o u can c omb ine g r oups and cate gori es. Ind ividu al photo s with i n a group can e ach belon g to a d iffere nt cate gory, or you c an put a ll of th e phot os in a group into on e categor y. Note: If a gr oup is closed, marki ng the p hoto th at repre sents the grou p, mar ks all the ph otos in the grou p.
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 76 Creating and Removing G roups T o create a n ew group: T o create a n ew group: T o create a n ew group: T o create a n ew group: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Select a ph oto or m ark th e photo s you wan t to gr oup toge ther. S ee âMar king P hotosâ o n page 70 for more informat ion. 3. Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button. 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to Group Group Group Group . 5. Press the Crea te Crea te Create Crea te button ( left soft k ey). Note: The Cr eat e Creat e Creat e Creat e butt on is av ailab l e onl y wh en ther e are n o exi stin g groups. If there a re existi ng groups, press the Add Add Add Add button (l eft soft key), th en pr ess Cre ate New Create N ew Cr eate Ne w Create N ew (center so ft k ey). 6. Name the new gro up. Gro up name s must be eigh t charac ters or less an d cannot conta in spa ces. ⢠Use the u p and down side s of the 4-way arro w button to scro ll to the letter you want to use. ⢠Use the r ight si de of the 4-way arro w butt on to add a le tter to the name. ⢠Use the l eft side of the 4-way arr ow button to dele te a let ter fro m the name . Note: The camera does not accept gr oup names th at begin w ith BR or TL beca use these letters a re reserve d, regar dless of language, for id entif ying B urst an d Time lapse photos o n the m emory ca rd.
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 7 7 7. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus. The name of the g r oup app ears in the ph oto inf o rmat ion for al l phot os in th e g rou p. The Grou ped Im ages icon ap pears in the photo infor mat ion f or any ph oto t hat repr esen ts a closed group. T o dis solve a gr oup: T o dis solve a gr oup: T o dissolve a g roup: T o dis solve a gr oup: Note: Dissol ving a g roup removes all the phot os from the grou p and d eletes the grou p name . It does not delete the p hotos fro m the mem ory card . Y ou ca nnot d issolv e protect ed grou ped phot os. 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4- way ar row button to sc roll to any photo included in th e group you want t o remove. 3. Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button. 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to Group Group Group Group . 5. Press the Disso lve Dissolve Dissolve Dissolve button (center soft k ey). 6. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey). T o del ete a group of photos: T o del ete a group of photos: T o del ete a group of photos: T o del ete a group of photos: Note: Deleti ng grouped photos delete s all the ph otos in the grou p from the me mory card, but does not del ete the group na me. Onc e the pho tos are d eleted , you canno t reco ver them . 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to an y photo inclu ded in th e group you want t o delete. Group ed Images icon
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 7 8 3. If the group is open, showin g links between the photos, close the group by pressin g the Close Close Close Close button ( right soft ke y ) . 4. Sele ct the ph oto tha t represe nts the group of photos . 5. Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button. The Edit Edit Edit Edit menu di splays wi th Delete Delete Delete Delete highlighted. 6. Press the Delet e Delete Delete Delete button (center soft k ey). 7. Press the De lete Delete Delete Delete butt on (left s oft key) to delet e all of the phot os in the grou p. Remem ber that once ph otos are dele ted, you c annot r ecover them. Addin g Ph otos to a Gro up T o add a photo to a grou p: T o add a photo to a grou p: T o add a photo to a group: T o add a photo to a grou p: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Select a ph oto or m ark th e photo s you wan t to add to th e group. S ee âMarking Pho tosâ on page 70 for more informat ion. 3. Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button. 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to Group Group Group Group . 5. Press the Add Add Add Add button ( left s oft k ey) . Note: The Add Add Add Add button i s availa ble onl y whe n there a re existi ng group s. See â Creating a nd Remov ing Gro upsâ on page 76 for detai ls.
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 79 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to the gr oup you want to sel ect. 7. Press the Se lect Select Select Select button (left so ft k ey). 8. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button. The nam e of the group appears i n the photo informati on for all ph otos in the gr oup. Th e Grou ped Im ages ico n app ears in the p hoto in formati on for a ny photo that r eprese nts a close d grou p. Opening and Cl osing Groups Once you have g rouped som e phot os you can c lose th e group and view just the one photo that represent s the group or you c an open the group and view all the phot os in the group. T o ope n grouped phot os: T o ope n grouped phot os: T o ope n grouped phot os: T o ope n grouped phot os: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to th e photo th at rep resents th e group you want to open. Tip: The photo representing the group d isplays th e Group ed Images icon i n its photo informa tion. 3. Press the Ope n Open Ope n Open button (r ight soft k ey). Thumbn ails of all of the ph otos in t he grou p are displayed with l inks between them. Group na me Groupe d Images ico n Link s
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 80 T o clos e grouped photos: T o clos e grouped photos: T o clos e grouped photos: T o clos e grouped photos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to an y photo in the g roup you w ant to c lose. 3. Press the Close Close Close Close button (righ t soft k ey). Expanding Burst and Timelapse Ph otos When you tak e Burst o r Time lapse p hotos, the ca mera tak es a serie s of pho tos a nd uses t he first photo to rep resent the ser ies. Y ou ca n expa nd the s eries to dis play all the ph otos on the color L CD, or you ca n pl ay the s eries. S ee âView ing Burst , Tim elapse, and Gr ouped P hotosâ on page 86 for i nformat ion a bout pl aying a s eries of photo s. T o expand Burst or Timelapse photos: T o expand Burst or Timelapse photos: T o expand Burst or Timelapse photos: T o expand Burst or Timelapse photos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4-way a rrow butt on to scrol l to the ph oto that repr esents the B urst o r Ti melap se ser ies you want to expand. Tip: The photo repre senting t he serie s displays the Burs t or Timel apse i con in i ts photo informat ion. 3. Press the Expa nd Expa nd Expa nd Expa nd button (ri ght so ft k ey). Thumbn ails of all of the ph otos in t he serie s are displayed with li nks bet ween them . Bur st ic on Timelapse icon
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 81 T o coll apse Burst o r Timelapse pho tos: T o coll apse Burst o r Timelapse pho tos: T o coll apse Burst o r Timelapse pho tos: T o coll apse Burst o r Timelapse pho tos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to an y photo in the B urst o r Timela pse s eries you want to c ollapse. 3. Press the Collaps e Collapse Collapse Collapse button (right soft k ey). Searching for Ph otos Y o u ca n use the Find Find Find Find menu to sea rch for photos by date or by ca tegory. T o se arch for photos by date: T o se arch for photos by date: T o search for pho tos by date: T o se arch for photos by date: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Find Find Find Find menu. 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Enter th e range o f dates you want t he camera to use to searc h for photos: ⢠Use the r ight an d left sides of the 4-wa y arrow button to move to the m onth, da y, an d year fie lds. ⢠Use the u p and d own sides of the 4-way arrow bu tton to change th e month, day, and year.
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 82 Note: The Fr om From Fr om From date mu st be pr ior or equal to th e To To To To date. 6. Press the Find Find Find Find button (left soft k ey). 7. The results o f your search app ear on th e co lor L CD. The Fi nd Find Find Find ic on appea rs in th e low er right corner to remin d you that you a re loo king at the r esults o f your sea rch. 8. Use th e 4- way arr ow but ton to scro ll th rough t he p hotos. When you ha ve fin ished , pres s th e Show Show Show Show All All All All button (cen ter sof t k ey) to r esume v iewing al l phot os stored o n the memory card. Note: If ther e are n o photo s within the r ange o f date s you have selec ted, the colo r L CD di sp lays t he mes s age No No No No images matched search criteria images matched search criteria images matched search criteria images matched search criteria . Y ou ca n: ⢠Press the Show All Show All Show All Show All button (left soft k ey) to resume view ing all photos st ored on the me mory car d. OR ⢠Press the Find Find Find Find button (r ight sof t k ey) to select a new range of d ates. T o se arch for photos by category: T o se arch for photos by category: T o se arch for photos by category: T o se arch for photos by category: Note: For more inf orma tion on categ orie s, see âCateg o rizi ng Phot osâ on page 7 3. 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. Find icon
Usin g Rev iew M ode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 83 3. Use the 4-way arrow butto n to scr oll to th e Fin d Fin d Fi nd Fin d me nu, then scr oll down to By Ca tegory By Catego ry By Ca tegory By Catego ry . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to the c ategory you want to view. 6. Press the Selec t Select Select Select button (left so ft k ey). The re sults o f your sea rch ap pear on the co lor L CD. T he Fi nd Find Find Find ic on appe ars in t he lo wer righ t corner to rem ind you that you are loo king at the resu lts of your search . 7. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll thro ugh the ph otos. When you ha ve fini shed, press th e S how All Show All Show All Show All button (cente r soft k ey) to resume viewing all pho tos sto red on the memory card. Note: If there are no pho tos within t he categ ory you hav e selec ted, the c olor L CD displ ays the me ssage No No No No images matched search criteria images matched search criteria images matched search criteria images matched search criteria . Y ou ca n: ⢠Press the Show All Show All Show All Show All button (left soft k ey) to resume view ing all photos st ored on the me mory car d. OR ⢠Press the Find Find Find Find button (r ight sof t k ey) to select a new category. Find icon
Using Pla y Mode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 84 Using Play Mode When you use Play mod e, t he colo r L CD auto matic ally disp lays your p hot os us ing the en tire s creen. Pho tos in itia lly appe ar at a low resolution, and th en the c olor L CD refr eshes, fr om the top, to gi ve you a clear, sharp v iew of your photo. Y ou can view informa tion ab out p hotos on the over lay ba rs if you turn them on. Se e âOve rlay Barsâ on page 21 for more information . Viewing Single Photos T o vie w a single photo: T o vie w a single photo: T o vie w a single photo: T o vie w a single photo: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Play Play Play Play . 2. Use the 4- way ar row button to sc roll thro ugh your photos. Tip: Y ou can press the Overlay Overlay Overlay Overlay butto n to turn off t he overl ay bar and see the ent ire scree n , or press it twic e to tur n on both overlay ba rs. Overlay bar
Using Pla y Mode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 85 Zooming In on Y our Photo s If you wa nt to s ee a por tion of yo ur pho to in m ore detai l, use th e Zoo m Zoom Zoom Zoom button (cen ter sof t k ey). When you are zoome d in, you c an use t he 4-way a rrow bu tton to see different pa rts of the phot o. Y ou must e xit Zoo m befor e moving t o a diffe rent ph oto. T o zoom in an d out: T o zoom in an d out: T o zoom in an d out: T o zoom in an d out: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Pl ay Play Pl ay Play . 2. If the overlay bar s are off, press the Ov erla y Overl ay Overl ay Overl ay but ton to turn th em on . 3. Use the right and left sides of the 4-wa y arrow button to selec t the p hoto yo u want to view. 4. Zoom in a nd out : ⢠Press the Zoom Zoom Zoom Zoom button (center so ft k ey) to zoom in . Y ou can zoo m in three times. ⢠Press the Zoom Out Zoom Out Zoom Out Zoom Out button (lef t soft k ey) to zoom out. Y ou can z oom ou t four ti mes. ⢠Use the 4- way arrow button to see di fferent p arts of t he photo. Each ti me you z oom in or o ut, the color L CD refr eshes, fr om the top, to giv e you a c lear, sha rp view of your photo. 5. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) to finish zoo ming a nd return the di splay to the ori ginal p hoto si ze.
Using Pla y Mode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 86 Viewing Burst, Timelapse, and Grouped Photos Y ou can pla y back s equence s of Burst, Tim elaps e, an d groupe d photos at a p re-def ined rat e, mu ch li k e a sl idesho w. Y ou can view th e ph o tos on th e ca m era âs co lor L C D, or on th e t el evi si on sc reen ( see âViewing Photo s o n a T elevisionâ on page 92). T o play back pho tos: T o play back pho tos: T o play back pho tos: T o play back pho tos: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Pl ay Play Pl ay Play . 2. If the overlay bar s are off, pres s the Overlay Overlay Overlay Overlay butt on to tu rn th em on so that you can s ee t h e na m es of t h e a ctiv e soft keys. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to scroll to th e Burst, Timel apse, or grouped p hotos you want to play ba ck. 4. Press the Play Play Play Play button (left soft k ey). 5. Press the Stop Slide show Stop Slidesh ow Stop Slidesh ow Stop Slidesh ow button ( left so ft k ey) to stop playing back your photos . T o chan ge the playback rate: T o chan ge the playback rate: T o chan ge the playback rate: T o chan ge the playback rate: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Pl ay Play Pl ay Play . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to Playback Rate Playback Rate Playback Rate Playback Rate .
Using Pla y Mode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 87 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Scroll to Timelapse Timelapse Timelapse Timelapse , Burst Burst Burst Burst , or Grou p Group Group Group . 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to decre ase or increa se the Pl ayback Rate. Y ou can choo se a rate o f 30 , 45, or 6 0 secon ds. The de faul t is 3 0 secon ds. 7. Press the Exit Exit Exit Exit button (rig ht soft k ey) twice to save the s etting s an d exit the menus. Creating a Sl ideshow Y ou can crea te a sli deshow t o display your p hotos on the col or L CD or on a tel evision screen. Y our slidesho w can includ e all of th e phot os on the memory ca rd, or you can ch oose a s i ngle c ategory of p hotos t o use. See âCate gorizin g Photos â on p age 73 for more i nformat ion on c ategor ies. T o create an d play a slideshow: T o create an d play a slideshow: T o create and play a slide show: T o create an d play a slideshow: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Pl ay Play Pl ay Play . Tip: Press the Over lay Overl ay Overl ay Overl ay button to t urn the ov erlay bars off so tha t you can see the entire sc reen. 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. The Play Settings Play Setting s Play Settings Play Setting s menu displays wi th Sli desho w Slides how Slid eshow Slides how hi ghlighted. 3. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key).
Using Pla y Mode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 88 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to the Slid eshow Slides how Slid eshow Slides how option you want to cha nge: 5. Use the 4-way ar row button to se lect th e desire d settin g. 6. Press the Start Start Start Start button (l eft soft k ey) to begin the slide show. 7. Y ou can stop the sl id eshow at a ny t ime by press ing t he Stop S l id e sh ow Stop S l id e sh ow St op Slide sh ow Stop S l id e sh ow b utton (left soft k ey). If th e ov erl ay ba rs are turned off, th e Stop Sli desho w Stop Slides ho w Stop Slid es ho w Stop Slides ho w label is no t visible, bu t the s oft ke y is st ill avail able. 8. After you ha ve stoppe d the sl ides how, pr ess the Exit Exit Exit Exit button ( ri gh t s oft k ey) twic e to sa ve th e se ttings and e xit the menus. Option Option Option Option Description Description De scription Descr iptio n Def ault Defa ult Default Defa ult Content Content Content Content The content of the sl idesho w can in clude all of t he photos on the memory ca rd or a single categ ory of ph otos. All Duration Duration Durati on Duration This is the a m ount of ti m e ea ch p h oto is d ispl aye d. Sel ec t fro m 30, 45, or 60 sec ond s. 30 secon ds Loop Loop Loop Loop This determines whether t he sli deshow w ill begin agai n (loop) w hen it reac hes t he last photo. On
Using Pla y Mode HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 89 Deleting Photos Y ou can delet e a singl e phot o or all of the p hotos i n a grou p, Burs t, or T imelap se sequen ce in Play mode. Y ou can also de lete phot os in Review mode (see â Deleting Photosâ on page 71). Note: Protect ed photos will not be deleted. S ee âProte cting Photosâ on pag e 72 for m ore info rmat ion. T o dele te phot os: T o dele te phot os: T o delete ph otos: T o dele te phot os: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Pl ay Play Pl ay Play . 2. Use the 4- way arrow button to scrol l to th e photo you want t o delet e. 3. Press the Delete Delete Delete Delete button (right soft k ey). The col or L CD displays a message asking you to con firm th at you want to d elete the photo. 4. Press the Delet e Delete Delete Delete butt on (left s oft key) to delet e the ph oto.
Using Your Televi sion HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 90 Using Y our T elevision When t he HP Phot oSmart C500 Digital Ca mera is c onnect ed to a tele visi on, th e tel evisi on sc reen fun ction s the same as the came raâs col or L CD. Y ou c an even use yo ur telev ision to vie w a slide sh ow, making i t easy to sha re your photo s wit h family and fri end s. Selecting the Video Output F o rmat Before you co nnect th e came ra to the telev ision y ou nee d to se lect th e video o utput format. T he form at that y ou choose ( NTSC NTSC NTSC NTSC or PA L PA L PA L PA L ) , depe n ds on y our te levisi onâs v ideo f orma t. Note: Refer to yo ur tel evisio n owne râs man ual fo r more i nformat ion a bout the vide o format . T o se lect the video out put forma t: T o se lect the video out put forma t: T o se lect the video out put forma t: T o se lect the video out put forma t: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Pl ay Play Pl ay Play . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to Video Video Video Video . 4. Press the Edi t Edi t Edi t Edi t button (left sof t key). 5. Press the left a nd rig ht sides of th e 4-way arrow but ton to select NTSC NTSC NTSC NTSC or PA L PA L PA L PA L . 6. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the men us.
Using Your Televi sion HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 91 Connecting the Camera to a T elevision T o connect the camera to a telev i sion: T o connect the camera to a telev i sion: T o connect the cam era to a telev i sion: T o connect the camera to a telev i sion: 1. Connect t he video cable: ⢠If you are usi ng an NTS C con nection , pl ug the in put (yel low) e nd of t he vi deo c able i nto you r tel evis ion se tâs video i nput connecto r (on mos t televisions , this is al so yello w). ⢠If you ar e using a P AL connection, p lug the i nput ( yellow) end of th e video cable into th e tele visionâ s video input co nn ector. On o lde r sets pl ug the vi deo ca ble int o a S CAR T adap ter (pu rchas ed se para tely), then p lug the ad apte r into your television setâs video input c onnector. Note: See your telev ision o wnerâs manual for spec ific instru ctions o n how to locate the vid eo inpu t connec tor. 2. Plug t he othe r end of the vi deo cab le into the cam era. 3. On your televisi on, set t he video input t o be the v ideo inp ut con nector where yo u con nected th e cam era. See your tel evision owner âs manua l for ins tructi ons on h ow to se t the vi deo inp ut. Tip: T o conserv e batter y life , use an AC po wer adap ter w hile your camera is conn ected to the te levi sion. S ee âUsing a n A C Power Adapt er (recommend ed)â on pag e 29. Video O ut
Using Your Televi sion HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 92 Viewing Photos on a T e levisi on When t he HP Ph otoSma rt C500 Di gital C amera is conn ected to a tele vision, you can play o r review yo ur photos on the tel evisio n screen j ust as you would on th e camer aâs col or L CD. Y ou can als o mark, protect , cate gorize, group o r dele te phot os, or cre a te a slidesh ow. T o vie w your ph otos on a t elevisi on: T o vie w your ph otos on a t elevisi on: T o vie w your ph otos on a t elevisi on: T o vie w your ph otos on a t elevisi on: 1. Connec t the ca mera t o your tel evision . See â Connect ing the Camera to a T elevisionâ o n page 91 for detail s. 2. T ur n on your te levisio n, and selec t the video i nput. Se e your telev ision ow nerâs manu al for inst ructio ns on how to set t he vide o inpu t. 3. T urn t he cam era on a nd turn the cam era m ode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev or Play Pla y Pla y Pla y . 4. View yo ur photo s o n the tel evis ion s creen as you w ould on th e cam eraâs colo r L CD. Se e âUsin g Revi ew Mo deâ on page 69 and âUsing Play Mode â on pa ge 84 for details. Y ou can use t he 4-way arrow bu tton on the camera to scroll through your p hotos, o r pres s the Menu Menu Menu Menu button to use the camera menus. Note: Y ou can also ta k e photos whil e the ca mera is c onnec ted to th e tele vision (with t he came ra in Rec Rec Rec Rec mode) and u se the tel evisio n scre en to pre view ph otos as you wo uld on the c ameraâs c olor L CD.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 9 3 Chapter 5 - Sharing and Printing Photos Once you have t ak en so me p hotos wi th your HP PhotoSmart C500 Digital Came ra, yo u can u se them in lot s of fun ways. Y ou can tr ansfe r them t o your IBM-com pati ble or Ma cintosh comput er for us e in crea tive project s, or f or shari ng with fa m il y and frien d s via the In ter net . The camera saves ph o tos on the me m ory ca rd in JPEG forma t wh ic h means that you c an use a wide variety of creative soft ware t o mani pulat e the ph oto f iles onc e you ha ve sa ved the m on your computer . If you ha ve a n HP JetSend-capable print er, s uch a s the HP P ho toS mar t P1000/ P1 10 0 pri nt er, yo u can use the HP Ph otoS mart C 500 Digita l Cam eraâs HP JetSen d capa bilit y for wirel ess p rinting. I f your p rinter h as a slot fo r a Comp actFlas h memory ca rd, you c an print p hotos direc tly from yo ur memor y card . Check ou t HP 's P h otoS m ar t W eb site a t www.ph otos mart.com www.ph otos mart.c om www.phot osmart.com www.ph otos mart.c om fo r gr ea t i dea s an d t ips on h ow to use your photos to create fun projects . Tip: T o conserve batter y life , connec t an A C power a dapter when you are using the camera wi th your computer or when you are JetS ending p hotos. Connecting the Camera to Y our PC Y o u can c on nect yo ur HP Pho toSma rt C500 Digita l Came ra to an I B M-compa tible, Window s PC usi ng the US B or serial cable that co mes in the camera package. Before you can use your camera wit h yo ur computer, you need t o insta ll the HP Photo Smart s oftwar e. Note: If you have a Maci ntosh comput er, see âConnectin g the Ca mera to Y our Macintoshâ o n page 101 for more informat ion.
Connec ting th e Came ra to Your PC HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 94 System Requirements If you wa nt to c onnect yo ur HP Ph otoSma rt C50 0 Digital Camera to a PC, yo ur computer system mus t meet th e follow ing re quirem ents: Y our compute r system als o needs an avai lable USB or se rial por t, dependi ng on the opera ting system you a re using, so that you can connec t the camera to your co mputer. See the t able below for the type of port r equired for ea ch of the sup porte d operat ing sys tems. Compone nt Compone nt Component Compone nt Minim um Min imum Minimu m Minim um Rec omme nded Recommen ded Recommende d Recommen ded Proc essor Pen ti um 133 MH z Penti um II, 300 MHz or bett e r Memory (RAM) 32 MB 64 MB or more Free har d di sk spac e 1 50 MB same Video di splay 640x480, 256 col ors 800x 600, 16 bit or h igher CD-ROM 4x or better same USB USB USB USB Serial Serial Serial Serial Window s 95 9 Window s 98 99 Windows NT 4. 0 9
Connec ting th e Came ra to Your PC HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 95 Installing the Software 1. Insert the HP P hotoSmart CD int o your compu terâs CD-ROM drive . The installa tion window a utoma tically appe ars. If it doesnâ t, use Wi ndows Explore r or My Com puter to l ocate you r CD-ROM d rive, then double-c lick the file setup.exe setup.exe setup.exe setup.exe . 2. Cli ck Next Next Next Next to begi n the i nstalla tion, a nd then follow the ins tructio ns on the scre en to i nstall th e soft ware. Connecting the Camera Y our computerâs operating s ystem dete rmines wh ich type of co nnection, USB or ser ial, you can use to connect your camera to yo ur computer. See the table abov e. T o connect the camera to your com puter: T o connect the camera to your com puter: T o connect the camera to your com puter: T o connect the camera to your com puter: 1. If you are usin g a serial connect ion, turn yo ur c omputer off. If you are usi ng a USB connec tion, you do not n eed to turn the c omput er off. 2. Plug t he roun d end o f the USB or serial cable into the camer a.
Connec ting th e Came ra to Your PC HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 9 6 3. Plug the ot her en d of the cable into th e appro priate port on your com puter. 4. If you are using a ser ial connection , turn your c omputer on. Downloading Ph otos Downlo adin g is the proce ss of t ransfe rring ph otos fro m the c ameraâ s memory ca rd to your com puter. Before you can do wnload ph otos to yo ur computer, you need t o instal l the software o n your PC. Se e âInst alling th e Softwa reâ on page 95 for details. Note: T o conserve b attery power, us e an A C power adapt er when yo u are do wnloadi ng photos to your computer. T o down load photos: T o down load photos: T o down load photos: T o down load photos: 1. Conn ect the camer a to your c om puter us ing the ap propri ate c able (US B or ser ia l). 2. T urn the camera on and turn the c amera mode di al to PC PC PC PC . PC mode trans fers con trol of the ca mera to your c omp uter. Seri al ca ble co nnec t i o n Seri al ca ble co nnec t i o n Seri al ca ble co nnec t i o n Seri al ca ble co nnec t i o n USB cable connection USB cable connection USB cable connect ion USB cable connection
Connec ting th e Came ra to Your PC HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 97 3. Start the HP Ph oto Im aging so ftware : ⢠Double -click the C500 C500 C500 C500 Photo Photo Photo Photo Imaging Software Imaging Software Imaging Software Imaging Software icon on your de sktop. OR ⢠Click Star t Start Start Start , Programs Programs Programs Programs , HP HP HP HP PhotoSmart PhotoSmart PhotoSmart PhotoSmart , C500 C500 C50 0 C500 Camera Camera Camera Camera , C500 C500 C500 C500 Photo Photo Photo Photo Imaging So ftware Imaging Softwa re Imaging Software Imaging Softwa re . 4. Click Unload Camera Unload Camera Unload Camera Unload Camera . 5. The photos wil l be sa ved i n the folde r listed in the Save m y images to Save m y images to Save m y images to Save m y images to se ction. If you want to change the locatio n of thi s fold er, cli ck the browse (...) browse (... ) browse (... ) browse (... ) but ton and choose a new f older. 6. If you wa nt to c reate a sub-fo lder ba sed on the dat e and ti me, s elect In new sub-fol der In new sub-fol der In new sub-fol der In new sub-fol der . A new folde r will be cr eated wi thin th e folder show n i n the Save my images to Save my imag es to Save my imag es to Save my imag es to section. Note: Once you are fa mili ar with the dow nload p rocess, you can dele te photos f rom the camera a fter th ey are sa ved on your computer. Select Delete all imag es from camera after Delete all images from camera after Delete all images from camera after Delete all images from camera after download download download download . 7. Cli ck Start Start Start Start . 8. Click Ye s Ye s Ye s Ye s t o c onfir m th at the im ages are being s av ed in th e corr ect folder a nd to downloa d the p hotos.
Connec ting th e Came ra to Your PC HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 9 8 When y ou ha ve fi nished downloa ding yo u ca n: ⢠print your photos ⢠view you r pho tos ⢠share your phot os with fami ly and fr iends on the I nternet Printing Photos The HP Ph oto P rintin g softwa re gives you se veral op tions fo r print ing your pho tos. Y ou can c reate and pri nt albu m pages w ith pho tos of differe nt si zes and o rient atio ns, or m ak e reprints of your ph otos in s tanda rd size s. T o print photos from a PC: T o print photos from a PC: T o print photos from a PC: T o print photos from a PC: 1. Start t he HP Ph oto Ima ging so ftware : ⢠Double -click the C500 C500 C500 C500 Photo Photo Photo Photo Imaging Software Imaging Software Imaging Software Imaging Software icon on your de sktop. OR ⢠Click Star t Start Start Start , Programs Programs Programs Programs , HP HP HP HP PhotoSmart PhotoSmart PhotoSmart PhotoSmart , C500 C500 C50 0 C500 Camera Camera Camera Camera , C500 C500 C500 C500 Photo Photo Photo Photo Imaging So ftware Imaging Softwa re Imaging Software Imaging Softwa re .
Connec ting th e Came ra to Your PC HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 99 2. From the HP Ph otoSma rt C5 00 Photo Imagi ng softw are win dow, cli ck Print Images Print Images Print Images Print Images . The HP Ph otoSm art Photo P rinting window d i splays.
Connec ting th e Came ra to Your PC HP Photo Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 100 3. Open the phot os you wa nt to prin t: ⢠If you h ave alrea dy downloa ded ph otos from the cam era, ope n the fol der wher e the ph otos are sto red. Click Open Open Open Open Files Files Files Files , navigate to the app ropriate fol der, selec t the photo fi les you want to pri nt, and then click OK OK OK OK . ⢠If you have not d ownloaded th e photos fr om the camera yet, co nnect th e came ra to your PC and cl ick Acquir e Acqu ire Acquire Acqu ire Images Images Images Images . See the so ftwareâs Help for details. Note: Acquire Images does n ot save the photo s to your computer âs hard driv e; it di splays a copy for you to v iew and manipulate. Y ou need to ma nually save ea ch ima ge from the soft ware. 4. Choose h ow to u se your p hotos: 5. Place your phot os onto th e album o r rep rints pa ge by dra gging them from the galle ry. Note: Y o u can adj ust t he Expos ure, Colo r, Rota tion , Scalin g and S harpnes s by doubl e-clic king o n a phot o and openin g th e Im age A dj ustm ents w indow . See th e soft war eâ s Help for de tail s. 6. Cli ck th e Prin t Print Print Print button to pr int yo ur pho tos. Note: Fo r compl ete i nformat ion o n the HP Photo Pr inting softwa re feat ures, c lick Help Help Help Help . ⢠Click th e Album Album Album Album button to crea te albu m pages. ⢠Select the layout, page size and page o rientati on, th en clic k OK OK OK OK . ⢠Click th e Prints Prints Prints Prints button to cre ate st andard s ized rep rints of your photos. ⢠Select th e layou t an d page si ze, t hen cl ick OK OK OK OK .
Conne c ting t he Camer a to Your Macinto sh HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 101 Connecting the Camera to Y our Macintosh System Requirements If you wa nt to c onn ect your HP PhotoS mart C500 Digi tal C am er a to a Macintosh, you r co mp u te r s y stem mu st m eet the foll owing requ irements : Installing the Software 1. Insert the HP P hotoSm art CD int o your compute râs CD-R OM drive. 2. Double- click the CD ic on on t he deskt op. 3. Sel ect your lan guage by d ouble-c lickin g the lang uageâ s folde r. Compone nt Compone nt Component Compone nt Minim um Min imum Minimu m Minim um Rec omme nded Recommen ded Recommende d Recommen ded Processor Power P C, 120 MH z Power PC, 2 33 MHz or bet ter Memory ( R AM) 16 MB 64 MB or more Free hard d isk space 32 MB 64 MB or more Video di splay 640x480, 256 colors 1024x76 8, 16 bi t or hi gher CD-ROM 4x or better same Oper ati ng syst em Mac OS 8.6 same Port USB same
Conne c ting t he Camer a to Your Macinto sh HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 102 4. Double-clic k Digita Desktop I nstaller Digita Desktop I nstaller Digi ta Desktop I nstalle r Digita Desktop I nstaller . 5. Click Contin ue Contin ue Continue Contin ue , and then fo llow th e ins truc tions on th e scre en. Connecting the Camera T o connec t the ca mera to your Ma cintosh , use th e US B cabl e. T o connect the cam era to yo ur Macintosh: T o connect the cam era to yo ur Macintosh: T o connect the cam era to yo ur Macintosh: T o connect the cam era to yo ur Macintosh: 1. Pl ug the r ound en d of th e USB ca ble int o t he cam era. 2. Plug t he othe r end o f the ca ble in to the U SB por t on your comp uter. Camera con nectio n Camera con nectio n Camera con nectio n Cam era co nnect ion Comp uter connec tio n Com put er co nnec t io n Com p ut er co nn ec t i o n Com put er co nnec t io n
Conne c ting t he Camer a to Your Macinto sh HP Photo Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 103 Downloading Ph otos Downlo adin g is the proce ss of t ransfe rring ph otos fro m the c ameraâ s memory ca rd to your com puter. Before you can do wnload ph otos to your co mputer, you need t o install the software o n your Macintos h. See âInstall ing the Softwar eâ on p a ge 101 for det ail s. F or fast d own lo ad ing, it is rec ommend ed th at you u se a memory ca rd read er, su c h as the Sa nDisk Imag eMate (available at www .hpshopping.com ) to save photo f iles on your computer. See â Using a Card R eaderâ on page 106 for more information. Note: T o conserve b attery power, us e an A C power adapt er when yo u are do wnloadi ng photos to your computer. T o down load photos: T o down load photos: T o down load photos: T o down load photos: 1. Connect the camera to your compute r using the USB cable. 2. T urn the camera on and turn the c amera mode di al to PC PC PC PC . 3. Open the HP Phot oSmart C5 00 HP PhotoSmar t C500 HP PhotoSmar t C500 HP PhotoSmar t C500 folder on your co mputerâs hard driv e. Note: If you in stalled the soft ware in a fol der other than t he def ault fo lder, na vigate t o that folder. 4. Open the Dig ita Desk top Digita De sktop Dig ita Desk top Digita De sktop folder, then dou ble -c li ck Digita Deskto p Digita Des ktop Digi ta Desktop Digita Des ktop .
Conne c ting t he Camer a to Your Macinto sh HP Photo Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 104 5. Click Connec t Connec t Connec t Connec t . 6. Choose Digita C amera (US B) Digita C amera (USB) Digita C amera (USB) Digita C amera (USB) an d click OK OK OK OK . 7. Download the photo s. Only t he singl e phot os in the curre nt window can be down loaded. If you w ant to downlo ad an entire gr oup or series of photos, dou ble-clic k the p hoto that represents th e group or seri es and display the grou p or seri es in a new wi ndow. If you want to d ownlo ad all the phot os from your c amera: ⢠First, downloa d the si ngle ph otos in t he cur rent win dow. Select Copy All Im ages to D isk Copy All Im ages to D isk Copy All Im ages to D isk Copy All Im ages to D isk from the View View View View menu. ⢠Then, do wnload each of the Burs t, Tim elapse, and grou ped ph otos. O p en eac h group or series, one at a time, by d ouble- click i n g on th e phot o that r epres e nts the g roup or serie s. Selec t Copy All I m ages to D i sk Copy All I m ages to Di sk Copy All Im ages to Di sk Copy All I m ages to Di sk from the View View View View menu. If you want to d ownlo ad only s elect ed phot os from yo ur ca mera: ⢠Press th e Sh i ft k ey on your k eyboard and c lick on the ph ot os you w an t to d own lo ad. S el ect Copy Selected Copy Selecte d Copy Selecte d Copy Selecte d Imag es to Disk Imag es to Disk Imag es to Disk Imag es to Disk from the View View View View menu. ⢠T o select p hotos within a group or se ries, dou ble-c lick the photo t h at rep resents th e gro up or se ries to display the photo s in a n ew window and then sel ect photos for downloading . 8. Choose a fo lder w here you want th e photo s to be s aved. C lick Sele ct Select Select Select . The photos are sa ved on your c omputer.
Conne c ting t he Camer a to Your Macinto sh HP Photo Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 105 Printing Photos Y ou can use t he Digita softwa re for printi ng thum bnai ls or fu ll-s ized co pies of yo ur photos, or c opies o f sever al photos o n an al b um p age. I f yo u nee d to p ri nt you r p hoto s in other size s, o r i f yo u need to manip ul at e you r ph ot os, use cr eative p hoto p rinting software. T o print photos: T o print photos: T o print photos: T o print photos: 1. Connect the c amera to yo ur c omputer us in g the USB c able. Se e â Conn ect in g the Camera t o Y our Macint oshâ on page 101 for detai ls. 2. T urn the camera on and turn the c amera mode di al to PC PC PC PC . 3. Start the Digi ta Deskto p soft ware. 4. Click Connec t Connec t Connec t Connec t . 5. Choose Digita C amera (US B) Digita C amera (USB) Digita C amera (USB) Digita C amera (USB) an d click OK OK OK OK . 6. Select the photos you want to print .
Printi ng Photo s Without a Co mput er HP Photo Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 106 7. Print the p hotos. ⢠If you wa nt to p rint th umbna ils of your photos, sele ct Print Print Print Print from the File File Fil e File menu. ⢠If you wa nt to pr int a full-sized photo, doubl e-click o n the photo, th en se lect Print Print Print Print from the File File File File menu. ⢠If you wa nt to pr int several diffe rent photos on a n album page, select Print Album Print Album Print Album Print Album from the File File File File menu. ⢠Choos e the nu mber o f rows and col umns, and s elect Fine Fine Fine Fine quality for the best quali ty prints . ⢠If you do not want the fil enames to app ear bel ow the p hotos, d eselec t Sh ow Filena mes Show File names Show Filena mes Show File names . ⢠Click Print Print Print Print . 8. Choose the prin t setti ngs, and the n click Print Print Print Print . Printing Photos Without a Computer If you r printe r has a slot for a Co mpactF lash me mory card, such as t he HP Phot oSmart P1000 /P1100 pri nter d oes, you ca n print your phot os dir ectly from the m emory card. See your p rinterâ s docu mentat ion f or detail s. The HP Pho toS ma rt C500 Digita l C ame ra lets you create Di gi ta l Prin t Order Forma t (DPO F) fi les to pre-s el ect which photos t o print and how many c opies you n eed. Using a Card Reader If you have a Co mpactF lash memor y card read er, su ch a s the SanD isk Imag eMate (a vaila b le at www.hp shoppi ng.c om) you can view an d save p hoto fi les on your com puter . Conne ct the card r eader t o your computer, and in sert the me mory card i nto the card rea der. Y ou can use the memory c ard just a s you would use a floppy disk. See your c ard r eaderâ s documen tation for detai ls.
Usi ng a Dig ita l Pr int Orde r Forma t (DPO F) Fi le HP Photo Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 107 Using a Digital Print Order F ormat (DPOF) File A DPOF fil e is a fi le that you create usi ng your digita l came ra. It i s stored on the memory ca rd and co ntains inform atio n such as wh ic h p h oto s a re sel e c ted a nd ho w m a ny of e a ch p hoto is to b e p r in ted. F or example, w h en you gather wi th fa mily a nd friend s to v iew your ph otos, you coul d create a DPOF fil e con taining re ferences of photo s they wan t to print. Some printe rs can read a DPOF file fro m the memo ry card so th at you do not h ave to re-sel ect the photos t o print. Note: If you delete a photo t hat is referen ced in a DP OF file o n the memory ca rd, you need t o recrea te the DP OF file befo re print ing the photos directl y from the memo ry card. T o create a D POF file: T o create a D POF file: T o create a DPOF file: T o create a D POF file: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e DPO F DPOF DPOF DPOF menu. Y ou can cho ose to: ⢠Add cu rrent Add current Add current Add current - add the cu rrent ph oto t o the DPOF file . ⢠Add a ll Add all Add all Add all - add al l the ph otos s tored on the mem ory car d to the DPOF file. If you h ave mark ed your ph otos (see â Markin g Photos â on pa ge 70), you can: ⢠Add marked Add mark ed Add mark ed Add mark ed - add mark ed photos to t he DP OF file.
Usi ng a Dig ita l Pr int Orde r Forma t (DPO F) Fi le HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 1 08 4. Use the 4- way ar row button to scrol l to th e optio n you wan t to sele ct. 5. Press the Sele ct Select Sele ct Select button (l eft soft k ey). 6. Use the 4- way arrow button to se lect the nu mber of copies yo u wa nt to print . 7. Press the Add Add Add Add button ( left s oft k ey) . 8. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) to exit the menus . T o del ete a DPOF file: T o del ete a DPOF file: T o del ete a DPOF file: T o del ete a DPOF file: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way arrow butto n to scroll to th e DPOF DPOF DPOF DPOF menu, the n scr oll down to Dele te form Delete fo rm Delete form Delete fo rm . 4. Press the Sele ct Select Sele ct Select button (l eft soft k ey). 5. Press the Delet e Delete Delete Delete button (left soft k ey). 6. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) twice to save t he setti ngs and e x it the m enus. Tip: If you wa nt to see t he file structur e of your memo ry card, yo u can use a memory card reader just as you would a remov able di sk dr iv e to v iew or co py the co nt ents of a memor y c ard. See â Us ing a Card Readerâ on page 106 for more infor m ation.
JetSendi ng Ph oto s HP Photo Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 109 JetSending Photos HP JetSe nd allows for fas t, wi reless tran sfer . Y ou can t ransf er ph otos from the camer a to any Je tSend cap able d evic e. If your p ri nte r s up port s H P JetSen d i nf ra red, su c h as the HP PhotoSm a rt P 10 00/P 1100 printer, you can t ransfer your photo s direct ly from the ca mera to the printer. See your pri nterâs docum entat ion fo r more i nforma tion. If you tran sfer B urst, T ime lap se, or grouped pho tos, c lose or coll apse the gr oup or serie s to tr ansfer all the photos . I f the gr oup or serie s is open or ex panded , only t he cu r rent ph oto wi l l be tr a nsf er red. T o JetSend the curren t pho to: T o JetSend the curren t pho to: T o JetSend the curr en t photo: T o JetSend the curren t pho to: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev or Play Pla y Pla y Pla y . 2. Use the 4- way ar row button to sc roll thro ugh your ph otos un til the photo (or group) yo u want to tra nsfer is disp layed. Note: Fo r info rmatio n on c reating a group of pho tos, see âGroup ing Pho tosâ o n page 75. 3. Set your pri nter or other de vice to recei ve phot os. See t he devi ceâs doc umenta tion for details . 4. Set t he camera and ot her device ab out on e foot a part a nd aim the ca meraâs infrar ed senso r at the deviceâ s infra red sen sor.
JetSendi ng Ph oto s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 110 5. Press the Shar e Share Share Share button. OR Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button and use th e 4-way arr ow but ton to scroll to t he JetSen d JetSen d JetS end JetSen d menu. ⢠Choose to Jet Send the Current Current Current Current phot o or group, or All All All All photos on the memory card. ⢠Pres s the Start Start Start Start button ( left soft key). Infrare d se n so r Share button
JetSendi ng Ph oto s HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 111 The HP Ph otoSm art C500 D igital Ca mera i mmediat ely sta rts a JetS end sess i o n, sear ches f o r a comp atible receivin g dev ice and sends the curre nt photo or group o f photo s. While th e conne c tion i s being e stablish ed the c amera âs color LCD says Looking fo r JetS end device Looking fo r JetS end device Looking fo r JetS end device Looking fo r JetS end device . Chec k the other device for not ification that comm uni ca tion ha s be en e sta b li she d . While co nnec ted, a t ransf er st atus ba r displ ays on the c ol or LCD. During th e trans fer, the Photo Quality dia mond ic ons fla sh on the status L CD, and t he red li ght next to the v iewfinde r on the back of the camera blinks. Y ou can cancel the transfer at any ti me by pressing t he Stop Stop Stop Stop bu t ton (center sof t k ey). 6. When you have finished trans m ittin g photo s, press the Exit Exit Exit Exit button (right soft key). HP Phot oSmart P100 0/ P110 0 Color Inkjet Printer HP Phot oSm art C500 Digital Came ra
Transm itting P hotos Between Two Cam eras HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 112 T ransmitting Photos Between T wo Cameras Y ou can use t he HP PhotoSmart C500 Di git al C amer a in fra red port to t ra nsf er photos between you r H P P ho toS mar t C500 Dig ital Camera and anot her H P PhotoS mart (o r oth er comp atibl e) dig ital cam era. T he othe r digi tal ca mera must u se the sta ndar d Digita transm it prot ocol. See the other ca mera âs docu mentation for details. T o se nd photos from y our HP PhotoSm art C500 Digital Ca mera to another camera: T o se nd photos from y our HP PhotoSm art C500 Digital Ca mera to another camera: T o se nd photos from y our HP PhotoSm art C500 Digital Ca mera to another camera: T o se nd photos from y our HP PhotoSm art C500 Digital Ca mera to another camera: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Use the 4- way ar row button to sc roll thro ugh your photo s until the photo (or group) you want to tra nsmit is disp layed. 3. Press the Menu Menu Menu Menu button. 4. Use the 4- way arrow button to scroll to the Tr a n s m i t Tr a n s m i t Tr a n s m i t Tr a n s m i t menu. 5. Press the Send Send Send Send button (lef t soft k ey). The color L CD dis plays the message Receiv ing C amera Read y? Recei ving Ca mera R eady ? Receivin g Camera Read y? Recei ving Ca mera R eady ? 6. Set the other camera to re cei ve ph oto s. See the HP Ph ot oS ma rt C5 00 Digit a l Cam era âs pro ced ur e be low (or see the oth er cam eraâs docume ntatio n for details) . 7. Line up the i nfrared s ensors on the t wo ca meras s o that t hey are f acing ea ch oth er, and set the c ameras about one foot apart.
Transm itting P hotos Between Two Cam eras HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 113 8. Press the Contin ue Conti nue Continue Conti nue b utton (left soft key). The HP Ph otoS mart C5 00 Digita l Camera loo ks for a c ompat ible c amera a nd begi ns to tra nsmit photos. 9. When you have finished trans m ittin g photo s, pr ess the Do ne Done Done Done button (rig ht soft ke y). 10. Press the Ex it Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) to exit the menus . T o r eceive photos sent fro m another cam era: T o r eceive photos sent fro m another cam era: T o receive ph otos sent from anot her camera : T o r eceive photos sent fro m another cam era: 1. T urn the camera on and turn th e came ra mode dial to Rev Rev Rev Rev . 2. Press the Men u Menu Menu Menu button. 3. Use the 4-way ar row button to sc roll to th e Tr a n s m i t Tr a n s m i t Tr a n s m i t Tr a n s m i t menu. 4. Press the Receive Receive Receive Receive button (cen ter sof t k ey). The color L CD dis plays the message Waiting for connection W aiting for connection W aiting for connection W aiting for connection . 5. Line up the infr ared s ensors on the two camera s so tha t they a re fac ing each oth er, and set the camera s abou t 1 foot apart. 6. Send th e phot os from t he ot her cam era. S ee the ot her cameraâs d ocumen tati on for deta ils. 7. When all o f the ph otos ha ve been recei ved, pr ess th e Do ne Done Done Done button (rig ht soft ke y). 8. Press the Exi t Exi t Ex it Exi t button (r ight sof t k ey) to exit the menus .
Using Digita Scripts HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 114 Using Digita Scripts Y our HP PhotoS mart C5 00 Dig ital Camer a comes with Fl ashPoin t T echnol ogy Incor porated âs Dig ita opera ting system. Whenev er you acce ss the men us on the color L CD, you are using the Digita operating syste m. Advanc ed camer a users can downloa d Digita script s to run on the c amera. Thes e scrip ts allo w you t o customi ze the camera âs setting s. T o dow nload D igita sc ripts v isit Fl ashPoi ntâs w eb site at www. fl ashp oi nt .c o m www. fl as hpoi nt .co m ww w. flas hp oi nt .c o m www. fl as hpoi nt .co m .
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 115 Chapter 6 - T roubleshooting and Maintenance Problems and Solutions Prob lem Prob lem Prob lem Probl em Solut io n Solutio n Solutio n Solutio n The ca mera is on bu t when I press a butto n, it does not r espon d. ⢠The camera may b e in sl eep mode to c onserve battery pow er. Try pressing the fla sh or ph oto quality b uttons on the t op of th e camera. ⢠Try turn ing the camera off and then on again. ⢠Try unplug ging th e AC powe r adapt er and remo vin g th e N iMH ba tt erie s, and t hen re in stal li ng them. ⢠Try removi ng all of the power so urces, i nclud ing the coin ba ttery. I am t rying to name a grou p but the ca mera is not r esp ondi ng . ⢠Try using a different group name. The camera does not ac cept gro up nam es that begin w ith BR or TL (regardle ss of lan guage) becaus e these lett ers ar e reserved f or identifyi ng Burst and Timelapse photos on the memory card. T here is an 8 charac ter limi t o n grou p names.
Gettin g Assi stance HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 11 6 Getting Assistan ce When ther e is a prob lem, you hav e several reso urces for finding a solution. Resources in clude H P PhotoSma rt on the Intern et, He lp, an d HP Cu stomer C are. HP PhotoSmart on the Inte rnet Y ou can get pr oject ideas a nd trou bles hooting assi stance, acces s the co mmun ity for um, and g et any updates to softwar e from HP âs PhotoSmart W eb site. Go to www.photosmart.com www.photosm art.com www.photosm art.com www.photosm art.com , and clic k Support Support Support Support . I am searc hing throug h photos by date, and hav e selected the find dates, b ut the c amera is not responding. ⢠Make sure that the Fr om From Fr om From date is prio r or eq ual to the To To To To date. The sta tus LCD is displ aying an error messa ge. ⢠If the ca mera does n ot turn itsel f off, pr ess th e on/of f on/of f on /off on/of f button to turn the c amera of f and t hen on again. The main batteri es are charged but the came ra is not r esp ondi ng . ⢠Check that y ou do no t have an AC power adap ter attach ed to th e camer a. Even if it is not c onnected to a pow er sourc e, the c amera will no t use battery power . Prob lem Prob lem Prob lem Probl em Solut io n Solutio n Solutio n Solutio n
Gettin g Assi stance HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 117 Help If you h ave instal led th e software that came with your HP Ph otoSmar t C500 Dig i tal Camer a, you c an use the Help syst e m for as sist an ce. T he Help c ontain s âho w- toâ i nf orm at ion a s w ell as t roubl eshoo ting s u ggest ions. T o acces s Help on a P C: T o acces s Help on a P C: T o acces s Help on a P C: T o acces s Help on a P C: 1. Start t he HP Ph otoSmart Photo Imaging so ftware . 2. From the ma in windo w, cl ick Help Help Help Help . T o acces s Help on a M acintosh: T o acces s Help on a M acintosh: T o access Help on a Macinto sh: T o acces s Help on a M acintosh: 1. Double- c lick the HP Ph otoSma rt C5 00 Digita l Cam era Hel p folder on the desktop. 2. Double- click the bro wser versi on of Help. Contacting HP Cu stomer Care HP Custom er Care On line Click you r way to a grea t solut ion! Th e HP Phot oSmart W eb site, www.photosmart.co m www.photosmart .com www.photosmart .com www.photosmart .com , is a great plac e to s tart for answers to qu estions about your HP p roduct s. Y ouâll get insta nt acce ss to helpful tips and tr icks, d ownlo adabl e driver s, an d the la test pro duct an d soft ware up datesâ24 hours a day, 7 da ys a week. All a t no charge t o you.
Mainte nanc e HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 118 HP Custom er Care by P hone Lik e most HP customers, youâll probably never ne ed to call us. But if you do, youâll be co nnected t o a servi ce techn ician who spec ializes in your produc t and can he lp you find the answe rs you need. I n an indust ry thatâs known to k eep custome rs waiting, weâre prou d of our quick response timeâm ost cal ls are c onnect ed in u nder thr ee minute s. North Am erica HP Ph otoSm art Custo mer Care: (20 8 ) 376- FO T O (208) 376- FO T O (208) 376- FO T O (208) 376- FO T O (3686) Fo r phone numbers in other cou ntries, go to the HP Ph otoSma rt W eb site, www. photosm art.com www.ph otosm art.com ww w.phot osmar t.com www.ph otosm art.com , an d click th e Assist ance Assist ance Assist ance Assist ance button on th e navigati on bar. Maintenance K eeping th e lens cl ean will hel p you to tak e sharp, c lear ph otos wi th the best pos sible focus. ⢠Using a dry, soft, lint -free clot h, gently w ipe the lens , and stat us an d color L C Ds to clea n off any fin gerprint s and dust .
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 119 Appendix A - Safety, Regulatory , and W arr anty Info rmation Safety Information Using Batte ri es The HP Pho t oSma rt C500 Dig i tal Ca mera co mes wit h th ree AA N iMH batteri es. Do n ot mix old a nd ne w batter ies or bat teries of differ ent types. Follow the battery manufa cturerâs s afety instruc tions. Recycl ing Batte ries Foll ow the bat tery man u f acture r âs disp osal in struct ions o r t he guid eline s reco mmende d for yo ur a rea. Do not incinera te or pu ncture batt eries. Using an AC Po we r Adapt e r Use only an AC power adapte r t hat ha s be en appr oved by H P f or use wi th this came r a. Failur e to do so could c ause dam age or de s troy the c amera and caus e a fi re .
Regulatory Notices HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 120 Regulatory Notices U.S.A. This devi c e com pli es with Part 15 of th e FC C rules. Operat ion is subjec t to the fol l owi ng tw o conditions: (1) t his de vi ce may no t caus e ha rmful inte rferenc e, an d (2) thi s dev ice mu st a ccept a ny in ter ference recei ved, incl udi ng in terfere nce that may cause undesi red opera tion. Canad a This digita l appara tus doe s not exceed the Class B limi ts for radio n oise em issio ns from digital appara tus as s et out in the i nterferenc e-causin g equipment sta ndard e ntitled ìDigita l Apparatus ,î ICES-003 of the Depa rtment of Commu nicati ons. Cet ap parei l numà rique re specte les li mites d e brui ts rad ioÃlect riques a ppli cable s aux ap pareil s num Ãriques de Class B p rescrite s dans l a norme sur le matÃrie l brouill er: ìAppar eils Numà riques, î NMB-003 ÃdictÃe p ar le mini stre de Com munica tions .
Hewlett-P ackard Limited Warr anty Stat ement HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 1 21 Hewlett-Packard Limited W arranty Statement A. Extent of Limited Warran ty 1. Hewl ett-Pa ckard (HP) warrants to the end-user custo m er th at the HP p roducts specif ied above w ill be f ree from defect s in mater ial an d work manship for t he durati on spec ified above, which d uratio n beg ins on the date of purcha se by the custom er. 2. For softw a re pr odu c ts, HP âs l i mi te d warranty appli es onl y to a fa i lu re to e x ecute pr ogramming inst ru ct ion s . HP does no t warra nt that the op erati on of an y produc t will be uninte rrup te d or er ror f re e. 3. HPâs limit ed wa rr an ty co vers only those d efec ts w h ich a ri se a s a res u lt o f no rmal u se o f the p rod u ct, an d do es not cover any othe r probl em s, inclu ding t hose wh ich ari se as a r e sult of : a. Improp er maint enance or modification; b. Software , me dia, p arts, or suppl ies not p rovided or supported b y HP; o r c. Operation ou tside t h e prod uctâs specif icatio ns. 4. For HP pr inter pr oducts, the use of a non-HP ink ca rtridge o r a refilled i nk cartr idge d oes not a ffect either t he warr anty to the cus tomer or any HP suppo rt cont ract wi th the cus tomer . Howev er, if prin ter fai lure or da mage is attr ibut able to the use of a no n-HP or refil led i nk cart rid ge, HP will cha rge it s s tan dard time and mat e ri als charges to se rvi c e the printer for the p articu lar fai lure or damage . 5. If HP rec eives, duri ng the applica ble warranty pe riod, notice of a defect in an y product whic h is covered by HPâ s warranty, HP sh all eith er rep air o r repla ce the d efec tive pr oduct, at HPâs opti on. HP Pro duct HP Pro duct HP Prod uct HP Produ ct Duratio n of Li mited Warranty Duration of Lim ited W arranty Duration of Lim i ted W arran ty Duration of Lim ited W arranty HP Photo Imaging soft ware 90 Days HP PhotoSma r t C500 Di git al Came ra 1 year CompactFl ash memory card 1 year
Hewlett-P ackard Limited Warr anty Stat ement HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 122 6. If HP is unabl e to rep air or rep lace , as applic able, a de fectiv e produc t which is cover ed by HPâs wa rrant y, HP shall , with in a reas onable time a fter bei ng notifi ed of t he defect , refu nd the pu rchas e price for the pro duct. 7. HP shall h ave no obliga tion to repair, repla ce, or refu nd un til the custom er ret urns the d efecti ve produ ct to HP . 8. Any replacemen t produc t may be eith er new or li ke-new , provi ded that it h as funct ionality a t least equal to that of th e produc t being re place d. 9. HP produc ts may contai n remanu fact ur ed part s, comp onent s, or ma t erials equival ent to new in performa nce. 10.HPâs limit ed war ran ty is v alid in any co un try where t he co ver ed HP p roduc t is d istri bute d by HP . Co ntrac ts for a dditi onal warran ty serv ices, su ch as on-site service , are avail able from any auth orized HP serv ice fac ility in c ountri es where the produ ct is di stribu ted by HP or b y an a uthoriz ed impo rter. B. Limita tion s of Warr anty 1. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, NEITHER HP NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLI ERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND , WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE HP PRODUCTS, AND S PECI FICAL LY D ISCL AIM T HE IM PLIED WARR ANT IES OR COND ITIONS OF MERC HANT ABIL ITY, SAT ISFACT ORY QUALITY, AND FITNES S FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. C. Limitati ons o f Li abilit y 1. To t he extent a llow ed by loc al law , the rem edies pr ovide d in this Warran ty Statem ent are t h e cust omerâs so le an d exclusive r emedies. 2. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL L AW, EXCEPT FOR THE OBLIGATIONS SP ECIFICALLY SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT, IN NO EVENT SHALL HP OR ITS THIRD P ARTY SUPPLIERS BE LIA BLE FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTA L, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRA CT, TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY AN D WHETHER ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMA GES. D. Local La w 1. This Warran ty Statemen t gives the cust omer spec ific lega l rights. The cu stomer may al so have other rights which vary from state to state in the United Sta tes, from prov ince to provin ce in Can ada, and from countr y to country el sewhere i n the w orl d.
Hewlett-P ackard Ye ar 2000 W arranty f or Consumer Products D istributed Thro ugh Autho rized Rese llers HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 123 2. To th e exten t that this W arran ty Statem ent is inconsistent with local law, this Wa rrant y Statem ent sha ll be deemed modifi e d to be c o nsis t ent wi th s uc h lo ca l la w. Und e r suc h loc al l aw , c ert ai n di scl aim er s an d l imi ta tion s of this Wa r ra nty Statement may n ot apply to t he customer. Fo r example, some s tates in t he United S tates, as well as some gov ernments outsid e the Un ited Sta tes ( inclu di ng pro vinces in Canad a), may : a. Preclu de the di sclaimer s and limitations in this Warrant y Statem ent fro m limiting the statu tory righ ts of a c onsumer (e.g . the U nited Ki ngdom ); b. Otherwise restrict the ab ility of a man ufacturer to enf orce s uch disc laime rs or li mitati ons; or c. Gran t the customer addit ion al war ranty r ights , sp ecify the dur ati on of implied warr antie s which the manufac turer canno t discla im, or not all ow l imitatio ns on the dur ation o f impl ied warr anti es. 3. FOR CONS UMER TRANSACTIONS IN AU STRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND, THE TERM S IN THIS WARRANTY ST ATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT, OR MODIFY, AND ARE IN ADDITION TO, THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THE HP PRODUCTS TO SUCH CUS TOMERS. Hewlett-Pack ard Y e ar 2000 W arranty for Consumer Products Distributed Through Authorized Resellers Subjec t to all of the terms and lim itatio ns of the H P Limite d Warrant y Statement provi ded with this HP Pr oduct, H P warran ts that this HP Pr oduct wi ll be able to ac curatel y proc ess date d ata (inc luding, but not l imited to , calcu latin g, comparin g, and s equencing) from, into, a nd between the tw entieth a nd twe nty-first ce nturies , and t he years 1999 and 2000, i ncludin g le ap year calcula tions , when used in acc ordan ce wi th t he Prod uct do cument ation provid ed by HP (incl uding a ny instr uction s for instal ling patche s or up grad es), pro vided th at al l other prod ucts (e.g . ha rdware, softwa re, firmw are) used in comb ination w i th such HP P roduct( s) pro perly exch ange da te data with it . The duration of the Y ear 2000 wa rranty exte nds th rough January 31, 200 1.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 124 Appendix B - Ref erenc e Menu Structure This section lists t h e ava ilable m enus a nd thei r option s. Th e menu options are e xplaine d in d etail t hrough out th is Userâs Guide . If you want to acce ss a pa rticula r menu option, use th is tab le to loca te the option quickly. Record (Rec) Mode Menu Menu Menu Menu Opt ion Option Option Option Setting Settin g Se tting Setting Cho ices Choice s Choic es Choice s Default Default De fault Default Media Sett ings St ill Resolution High, Medium, Low High Compression High, Medium, Low Medium Color Full, B&W (Black and White) Full Burst Resolut ion High, Medium, Lo w High Compression High, Medium, Low Medium Color Full, Black an d White Full Burst Rate 1-3 FPS (Frames per seco nd) 2 FPS
Menu St ruc ture HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 125 Menu Menu Menu Menu Opt ion Option Option Option Setting Settin g Se tting Setting Cho ices Choice s Choic es Choice s Default Default De fault Default Media Setti n gs (cont .) Timelapse Resol u tion H igh, Medi u m, Low High Compression High, Medium, Low Medium Color Full, Black an d White Full Int erva l 1, 2 , 3 , 4, 5, 10, 20, 30, 50 mi n, 1, 2, 3, 4, 8 , 12, 24 hr 1 min # Images 2-1 000 10 Phot o Assi st Exposur e EV -1.5 - 1.5 (0.3 in crements) 0 AE Method Matrix, Spot Matrix White B alan c e Auto Auto Daylight Fluorescent Tung sten Flash
Menu St ruc ture HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 126 Menu Menu Menu Menu Opt ion Option Option Option Setting Settin g Se tting Setting Cho ices Choice s Choic es Choice s Default Default De fault Default Preferences LCD Brightness Set Brig ht ness 1-7 4 Capture Eye Start On, Off On Instant Review On, Off Off Flash Auto, On, Off, Red-Eye Auto Self Timer 3, 5, 10, 20, 30 (secon ds) 10 Hand Held On, Off On Coun ter R eset O n, Of f Off Meter Conti nuous AE C ont inuou s AE Auto Exposur e Lock Date & Time Set Date & Time Forma t Depend s on l angua ge Camera Name Enter Camera Name HP C500 General Beep On , Off On Auto Sh uto ff On, Off On
Menu St ruc ture HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 127 Review (Rev) Mode Menu Menu Menu Menu Opt ion Option Option Option Setting Settin g Se tting Setting Cho ices Choice s Choic es Choice s Default Default De fault Default Edit Delete Group Create/Add Groups that you have created Protect JetSe nd Current /Mar ked All DPOF Add current/marked Add to DPOF 1 -50 Add all Add to DP OF 1-50 Delete f orm Transmit Camera to Camera Send Recei ve Find B y Da te Sele ct Dat e Curr en t dat e By Cate g or y Select Ca te go r y Landsca p e, Vacat ion , Friends, Family, Pets, Work, Triangle, Square, Circ le Preferences Language Select La nguage E nglis h, Fra nçais, Italiano, Españo l, Deutsch Depend s on whe re you boug ht the came ra
Menu St ruc ture HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 128 Play Mode Menu Menu Menu Menu Opt ion Option Option Option Setting Settin g Se tting Setting Cho ices Choice s Choic es Choice s Default Default De fault Default Play Setti ngs Slide show Con tent All, Category All Dura tion 3 0, 45 , 60 s ec 3 0 sec Loop On, Off On Playba ck Rate Ti melap se 30, 45 , 60 sec 30 se c Burs t 30, 45 , 60 s ec 30 sec Gro up 30, 45, 6 0 s ec 30 sec Vid eo Video O ut PAL, NTSC De pend s on w here yo u boug ht the came ra
Icons HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 129 Icons Color L CD Mode Mode Mode Mode Icon Icon Icon Icon Meanin g Meaning Mean ing Meaning Location Loca tion Loc ation Loca tion Rec (Re c or d) S till The se m edia se ttings i cons ap pear on the lef t of the lower overlay b ar. Only one of th e three icons appe ars at a time, de pending on whether yo u are tak ing a Still, Burst, or Timelapse photo. Bur st Timel aps e Self- timer The Self- timer an d Mac ro mo de ic ons a ppe ar in the center of th e lower overl ay bar. If th e i cons appea r in color, th e sett ing is active. If th ey appear in gray , th e setting is inactive. Mac ro mod e Digi ta l Zoo m This icon ap p ears o n the ri ght of th e uppe r overl ay ba r . The i con only app ear s if you have a ct iva ted d ig ital zoom . Memory Card Status This icon appears on the left of t he upper overlay bar and i ndica t es how mu ch s pa c e is av aila b le on th e memory card.
Icons HP Phot o Smart C500 Di git al Camera Us er â s Guide 130 Mode Mode Mode Mode Icon Icon Icon Icon Meanin g Meaning Mean ing Meaning Location Loca tion Loc ation Loca tion Rec (con t.) Memor y Card In ser ted These ic ons app ear at t he top of th e Statu s menu . With the camera in Rec mode, pres s the Statu s b ut t on (right soft k ey) to s ee the Status m enu. Coin Batt ery Media Sett ings menu These icons a ppear when you press the Menu button. They indica te the menu s that are available . Phot o As s ist menu Prefere nces menu Rev (Revie w) Still These medi a settings ico ns appear in t he photo information. On ly one of the icon s appears a t a time, depending on whethe r the pho to you are vie wing is a Stil l, Burst, or Timelap se photo, o r a photo r eprese nting a grou p of phot os. Grouped Imag e s Bur st Timel aps e
Icons HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 131 Mode Mode Mode Mode Icon Icon Icon Icon Meanin g Meaning Mean ing Meaning Location Loca tion Loc ation Loca tion Rev (cont .) Find The Find i con appea rs in the p hoto information to indi cate that th e phot o you are viewin g is th e r esult of a search by date and time , or by ca tegory. Prot ected The P r otect ed icon appear s in the p h oto i nf orma ti on to indi cate that th e ph ot o you are viewi ng is prote cted. DPOF T he DPOF icon appears in the photo info rmatio n to indi cate that there is a DPO F fil e on th e memo r y car d. Edit menu These icons appear when y ou press the Menu button. They indica te the menu s that are available . JetSend menu DPOF m enu Transmit menu Find menu Prefere nces menu Play Play Sett ings menu This icon appears when yo u press th e Menu butt on. It indi c ates th e menu th at is a vaila ble.
Icons HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 132 Categories Icon Icon Icon Icon Meaning Meaning Me aning Meaning Location Location Locati on Location Landscape These ico ns appear in the photo informat ion to in dicate th at the ph oto you are viewing is par t of a category. Vacat ion Friends Family Pets Work Triangle Square Circle
Icons HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 13 3 Status L CD Icon Icon Icon Icon Meaning Meaning Me aning Meaning NiMH ba tteries empty NiMH ba tteries ful ly charge d NiMH batteries partially charged Autom atic flas h No flash Flash Automat ic flash with red-eye r eduction E-mail ph oto quality Basic ph oto qua l ity Fine ph oto quality Super -fine phot o qu ali ty Memory card installed No me mory ca rd in stal led
Error M essages HP Phot o Smart C500 Di git al Camera Us er â s Guide 134 Error Messages Color L CD Status L CD Camera err or messages numbered Ec0-9, Eca, a nd Ed0-6 a ppear on the s tatus L CD. If the camera d oesnât turn off: 1. T ry turnin g the ca mera of f and th en on again. 2. T ry unplugg ing the A C power ada pter or removing the NiM H batt eries, a nd then reinstal ling th em. 3. If the erro r p ersis ts, co ntac t H P Cust omer Ca re. Mess age Mess age Messag e Mess age What you shou ld do What yo u should do What yo u should do What yo u should do Not Read y Wait un til the message disa ppears. No Flash Card Inse rt a memory card. No Space On Card I nse rt a new memory card or delete pho tos from the current memory card. Processing Pictures Wait until the message disappears. Slow Shut ter Inc r e ase light on the su bje ct or turn on t he f l ash , o r turn Hand Held off . Or u s e a tripod with the camera, or hold the ca mera steady. No Focus Zo om out, mov e the came ra fa rt her away from the s ubj ect, or increa se the a mo unt of li ght on the sub ject.
Camera Spec if icatio ns HP Phot o Smart C500 Di git al Camera Us er â s Guide 135 Camera Specifications Resolu tion Resolu tion Resolu tion Resolu tion 2 megapi xels (160 0x1200 pixel s) Exposure Exposure Exposure Exposure ISO 80 Memory card Memory card Memory card Memory card 16 MB C ompactF lash Lens syst em Lens syst em Lens system Lens syst em Wide: F2.8 /F6.3 Tele: F4 .6/F 9.0 6.9mm to 20.7mm focal len g th (equivalent t o 38mm t o 115mm format) Fe at u r e s Fe at u r e s Fea t ur e s Fe at u r e s Co lor 2-i n LCD ; 3x op tical zoom, 2x digita l zoom ; fas t autof ocus; b urst m ode; accep ts 37m m lens filt ers and lenses Inte rface Inte rface Inte rface Inte rface HP JetS end, USB, Serial Power supply Power supply Power supply Power supply 3 AA Ni MH recha rgea ble batt eries an d batte ry rech ar ger, or AC adap ter (optio nal); coin ba ttery inclu ded in camera Dimens ions Dimens ions Dimension s Dimens ions 6 x 3.4 x 2.7 in (153 x 85 x 64 mm) Wei g ht Wei g ht We i g h t Wei g ht 0.82 lb (370 gm) withou t batte ries
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 136 Glossary 4-way arro w button A 4-way controll er used to scrol l through and mak e selecti ons from th e color LCD me nu option s. AC pow er adapte r An adapte r that co n nects you r camer a to a power source (s uch as a wal l outle t or powe r stri p) to co nserve battery power. Onl y use an AC power adap ter that has been approve d by HP for use with this camer a (adapter par t number C7315A). Auto exposure The camer a auto ma ti c ally adj u sts the expo sure for di ffer e nt lighti ng condit ions. T here a re two A E me thods, M atrix a nd Spot. M atrix ca lcul ates the exposure b y takin g the av erage of se veral points of light in the photo . Spot calculates the exposure by r eadin g the light f rom one sm all spot in the cent er of the photo. Auto foc us The cam era au tomati cally adj usts th e focus of the c amera when you p ress the shutt er but ton 1/ 2 way dow n. Burst ph otos A seri es of ph otos take n in r apid suc cession when you press a nd hold th e shutte r but ton down. You c an take up to f our photo s at a rate of one to th ree frames per s econd in this mod e. Camer a mode d i al The control us ed to s el ect on e of the f our came ra mode s âRec ( Record ), Rev (Review) , Play, and PCâth at d etermin e which f eatures and men u options are availabl e.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Di git al Camera Us er â s Guide 137 Coin battery A small batte ry shaped like a coin whi ch is u sed to reta in the c amer aâs date a nd time in format ion. Color LC D The Liqu id Crys tal Dis play (LCD) screen on the ba ck of the camer a that displays your photo s and the camer a me nus used to se t pre fere nces and s elect opti ons. Color LC D on/ off but ton Th e butto n on th e back o f the ca mera u sed to tu rn the color LCD on a nd off. Compa ctFlash m emory c ard The type of memo ry card used by the H P PhotoSmart C5 00 Dig ital Camer a. See also â Memory card.â Com press ion A techn ique of cond e nsin g color an d deta il infor mati on to de crea se the s ize of a photo file and sav e space on the m emory card. Compu ter c onnect ion A port u sed to conne ct the d i gital camera by a cable to a co mputer . Digital z oom A type o f zoom used to d igitall y crop o r frame the photo by enla rging th e center p ortion of th e image au tomati cally in the ca mera . Exposure Valu e A number repre senting the available c ombinations of shutter speeds and apertures t hat give t he same expos ure effect und er simila r scene brightn ess and light ing co nditio ns . Eye Start A featur e that b rings th e cam era out of sle ep mode and star ts adjustin g the exposure whe n your eye is close to the viewfi nder. Eye Sta rt uses two sensors locate d nex t to th e vie wfind er. Flash A brig ht burs t of li ght from t he camera whic h illu mina tes a su bject w hen th e surroun ding light is to o dim t o take a quality photo. Flash bu tton The bu tton on t he top of the ca mera u sed to change the fla sh setti ng.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Us erâ s Guide 13 8 Flas h with red-ey e red u ction A flash s ettin g that reduce s the oc curr ence of red-e y e in pho tos of pe ople or animal s. It does thi s by fla shing t wice. Infr ared s ensor An infr ared t r ansmi tter a nd rece iver on the fr ont of the c amera th at is used to send or receive photos b etwee n your di gital c amera and ano ther camera, or a printe r wi th H P Jet Send capa bility . JetSend HPâs fa st, wirel ess te chnolo gy that a llows yo u to tra nsfer ph otos f rom your camer a to a c ompat ible p rinter o r compu ter usi ng infra red tr ansmi ssion . LCD Liquid C rystal D ispla y. See âC olor LC Dâ and â Statu s LCD.â Lens One or more pieces of optical gla ss used for formi ng a shar p image. Macro A mod e used for taking close-up pho tos of a subjec t. Main batteries The pri mary source of power for you r digital camera wh en it is not p lugged int o a wall o utlet w ith an AC pow er ada pter. Th e HP PhotoSm art C500 Digit al Came ra uses three AA Nick el Meta l Hydri de (NiMH ) batter ies. Memory c ard The s torage me dium in a digital camer a that hold s the photos you ha ve tak en. It is analogo us to the fil m in a re gular camera. T he HP P hoto Smart C5 00 Digital Camera takes o nly Type 1 Compa ctFlash cards. Menu A list of options from whi ch you can ma ke select ions to cha nge the wa y your camer a opera tes. The HP PhotoSm art C5 00 Digit a l Camera co ntains severa l menus th at orga nize option s by func tion. Menu bu tton T he on/o ff butto n used t o displ ay or hide the cam era me nus on t h e colo r LCD.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Di git al Camera Us er â s Guide 139 Mode The s electe d stat e of the c ame ra that de termines what t ype s of acti vities you can c urrentl y perfor m and which menus you ca n acces s on the colo r LCD. T he HP Pho toSmart C 500 Digita l Cam era has f our modes: Recor d, Review , Play , and PC. NTSC A video forma t general ly used i n coun tries su ch as US A, Can ada, an d Japan (standa rd devel op ed by th e Nati ona l Tele vi si on Sta nd ar ds Co mm i tt ee). On/off butt on The button t hat tu rns the camera power on and off. Opti cal zo om A type of zoo m that c hang es the fi eld o f view and magn ifi cat ion of the l ens by using the zoom cont rol to m ove differ ent lens group s withi n the lens t o cha nge its o verall focal leng th. Overlay b ars Bars that ap pear a t the to p an d bottom o f the color LC D to pro vide you with informa tion ab out th e camer a settin gs and tel l you the functions of th e soft keys. See al so âSof t key s.â PAL The vid eo forma t (short for Pha se Altern ating Li ne) gen erally use d in coun tries in Europe . PC mode The cam era mo de to s elect when you connect the camera to a computer. Photo qua lity butt on The butto n us ed to cycl e throu gh the four phot o quality settings. Play mod e T he camer a mo de used t o view you r pho tos on the col or LCD or a telev ision screen a nd to cr eate sli de shows. Record mo de The cam era mo de us ed to take photos. Red-eye reduct ion See âFlas h with re d-eye red uction. â
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 140 Resoluti on The number of pixel s that ma ke up t he photo . A hi gher reso lution setting captures more i nformatio n (more pixels) when a photo is take n. Review mode The camer a mode u sed to v iew your photos on the color LC D or a tel evision scree n. Self -time r A timer that de lays the re lease of the shutte r by a sp ecif ied numb er of s econ ds so tha t you ca n take a photo of your self or i nclud e yourself in a p osed gr oup photo. Self-tim er light A l ight on the fron t of the c ame ra that indic ates the self-tim er is o n and the shutte r wil l release au to m at ic ally aft er th e spec if ie d amount of time ha s elapsed. Share button The bu tton that star ts tra nsmi ttin g photos via infr ared f rom yo ur di gital cam era to a rece iving device su ch as a prin ter. S ee also âJe tSen d. â Shutter b utton The 2-stage b utton yo u pr ess to release t he cam eraâs sh utter a nd a djust the focus and expos ure bef ore ta king a p hoto. Status LC D The displ ay screen on the t op of th e camer a that shows the camera âs statu s, including the battery level , memory card status, number of photos remaining, and cu rrent p hoto qu ality a nd flash sett ings. Still ph otos Single photos taken ea ch tim e you p ress the shutter button . Timelap se pho tos A se ries of p hotos ta ken a t preset time inter vals when you pre ss the sh utter button. You can specify th e numbe r of pho tos you wan t the ca mera to take, a s well as the am ount of ti me betw een phot os (fro m 1 minute to 24 hou rs ). Tripod mount Connec tion po int on the b ottom of the cam era for at tachi ng a trip od.
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 141 Video ou t A port used to conne ct the d igital camera to a televisi on with a cabl e. Viewfin der The w indow you look th roug h to f rame you r subj ect w hen taki ng a photo. White bala nc e T he a mou nt of adjustme nt m a de by th e c a me ra to th e co lo r balance to ma ke a true whi te in different lighting condi tions. Zoom To incre ase or dec rease the size o f an obj ect as i t appe ars in the viewfi nder (o r chan ge the ap parent distan ce of a n objec t) be fore taki ng a p hoto. T he HP PhotoS mart C5 00 Digita l Camer a has t wo type s of zoom : optic al and digital .
HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 142 Index A AC powe r ad apte r using 2 9 Adapter for PAL TV connect 91 Assist ance 117 Auto shut off 64 turn in g on an d off 6 5 Automa tic e xposu re adjustin g 57 B Batte ries and the color LCD 20 chargi ng 11 checkin g the level of charge 9 instal ling 7 replac ing 7 , 8 safety i nformatio n 119 saving by using an AC pow er adapter 29 what ki nd to us e 7 , 8 Beep 65 Black a nd whi te photos 42 Brightness of co lor LCD 20 Burst ph otos changin g the settings 38 collaps ing 81 expanding 80 not enou gh memo ry 37 taking 36 viewi ng 86 C Camera adjusti ng the se ttings 42 auto s hutoff 64 beep 65 changing the language 27 chec king t he stat us 32 cleani ng 11 8 connec ting to a Macin tosh 102 connec ting to a PC 95 connec ting to a televis ion 91 exposure 56 Eye Start 62 flash 43
Index HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 143 hand h eld 62 langua ge 27 menus 23 modes 17 parts 3 photo qu ality 45 self- timer 53 setting up 5 specif icatio ns 1 35 turn in g on an d off 1 5 viewf ind er indi cator light 18 warra nty 121 whit e b alanc e 58 wri st str ap 5 zoom 50 Card reader 106 Categori es addin g photos to 73 using to searc h for pho tos 82 Chargi ng the ba tter ies 1 1 Cleani ng th e c amera 11 8 Closing groups 80 Coin b attery checking the level of charge 10 instal ling 8 Collaps ing burst ph otos 81 timel apse p hotos 81 Color LCD adjust in g the brightn ess 20 battery power 20 chec ki ng th e camer a stat us 33 cleani ng 11 8 icons 1 29 meanin g of status infor m at ion 34 overla y bars 21 Review mode 69 using 19 Compress ion photo qua lity settin g 45 Connectin g camera to a Ma cin tosh 1 02 camera to a PC 95 camer a to a te levi sion 91 Counter rese t 63 Custom er Care 117 D Date setting 24 using to sea rch for ph ot os 81
Index HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 144 Dayli ght adjusti ng white bal ance fo r 59 Dela y sett ing fo r a uto s hutoff 64 setting for the s elf-tim er 55 Dele ting photo s in Revi ew mode 71 using grou ps 77 using Pl ay mode 89 Digital Print Order Form at. Se e DPOF f iles. Digita l zo om compar ed to opt ical zoom 50 using 5 1 Downl oadi ng photos t o a Mac intosh 103 photos t o a PC 96 DPOF files creatin g 107 delet ing 108 E Error mess ages 134 Expanding burst p hotos 80 timelaps e photos 8 0 Exposure 56 Eye Start 62 F Findin g photo s 81 Flash changin g the sett ings 43 Fluoresce nt li ght adjust ing whi te balan ce for 59 Format setting for da te and tim e 24 Format memory cards 14 G Groups adding photos 78 closin g 80 creat ing 76 dele ting ph otos 77 openin g 79 removing 76 using to o rganiz e photos 75 viewi ng 86 H Hand he ld 62 Help 117
Index HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 145 HP Ph ot oSma rt Customer Care 117 Inter ne t addr ess 116 I Icons on th e c olor LCD 129 on the s tatus LCD 133 Inca nde sce nt light adjusti ng white bal ance fo r 59 Infrared rece iving p hoto s from a nothe r camer a 113 send ing photos to another c amera 112 send ing to an other device 109 Instal ling batte ries 7 memory card 11 softwar e on a M acintosh 101 soft ware o n a PC 95 Instant Review 6 0 turn in g on an d off 6 0 using 61 using when taki ng a ph oto 36 using with bu rst pho tos 37 using with tim elapse photos 40 Intern et addres s for H P PhotoS mart 116 Interval setting for ti melap se phot os 41 J JetSend 109 L Language changi ng 27 LCD brightness 20 color 19 , 33 stat us 32 Lens cleani ng 11 8 Lens cover attachi ng the l eash 5 Lighting adjusti ng expo sure for variat ions i n 56 adjust ing whit e balance f or vari ation s in 59
Index HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 146 M Macint osh connec ting the camera to 102 down loadin g photos to 103 instal ling s oftwa re 101 printin g photos 105 system requiremen ts 101 Macro mode 52 Marking ph otos 70 Matrix m ethod for automa tic exposu re 57 Media Settings menu Burst 38 Timelapse 4 0 Memory card rea der 106 Memory card s checking the status 13 formatti ng 14 instal ling 11 print ing photos from 106 Menus overview 23 Play mode 128 Record mod e 12 4 Review mode 127 Modes 1 7 N Not enough memory when ta king B urst ph otos 37 when ta king Timelap se pho tos 39 NTSC sele cting th e video o utpu t format 90 using to c onnec t to a te levi sion 91 when to use th is setti ng 91 O Opening gro ups 79 Optical zoom compare d to di gital zoom 50 using 51 Organizi ng phot os using categories 73 using groups 75 Overlay bars icons 1 29 location on col or LCD 2 1 using 21 Overview taking pho tos 30 viewin g photo s 67
Index HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 147 P PAL sele cting th e video output fo rmat 90 using to con nect to a tele vision 91 when to use th i s se tt ing 9 1 PC connec ting the camera t o 95 downlo ading photos to 96 instal ling s oftwa re 95 printin g photos 98 system requiremen ts 94 PC mode color LCD 20 overview 17 Phot o As sist menu Exposure 56 White Ba lanc e 59 Phot o Im aging sof tware warra nty 121 Photo qu al i ty adjusti ng the setti ngs 45 Phot os black and white 42 categ orizin g 73 collaps ing burst an d tim el apse 81 dele ting grou ped 77 dele ting in Review m ode 71 dele ting usi ng Pl ay mode 89 downloa ding to a Ma cint osh 103 downloa ding to a PC 96 expanding burst and time lapse 80 findin g 81 grouping 75 JetSending 109 marking 70 overvi ew of how to ta ke 30 playing back 86 printi ng from memo ry card 10 6 printi ng us ing a Macin tosh 105 printing us ing a PC 98 protecti ng 72 searching by c ategory 8 2 search in g by da te 81 sele cting in Revie w mode 69 sharing 93 taking 30 transm i tti ng be tween cameras 112 viewi ng on a t elevi sion 92 viewing using Play mode 84 zooming in on while vi ewing 85 Play b ack setting th e rate 86 using to v iew a s lide show 86
Index HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 1 48 Play m ode color LCD 20 color LCD icons 1 31 compared t o Review mo de for viewi ng photos 68 menus 128 overl ay bars 22 overview 17 viewin g a si n gle p h oto 84 Powe r camera âs sle ep mode 16 turn in g the ca mera on and o f f 1 5 using an AC adap ter 29 Prin ti ng phot os from a memory card 106 using a Ma cintosh 105 using a PC 98 via JetS end 109 Prote cting phot os 72 R Record mod e color LCD 20 color LCD icons 129 menus 124 overl ay bars 22 overview 17 Regula tory noti ces 120 Replacing batterie s 7 , 8 Requir ements batterie s 7 , 8 Macint osh 1 01 PC 94 Resolution photo qua lity settin g 45 Review mode categor izing ph otos 73 color LCD 20 color LCD ic o ns 130 compare d to Play mode for viewi ng pho tos 68 dele ting ph otos 71 marking ph ot os 70 menus 127 overview 17 sele cting photos 69 unmarkin g photos 71 using 69 Reviewing ph ot os Instant Review 36 using a television 92 S Safety i nformatio n 119 Scripts for the camer a 114
Index HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 149 Sear chi ng for ph ot os 81 Sele cting p hotos i n Revi ew mode 69 Self-t imer setting the delay 55 using 5 3 Setti ng th e date an d tim e 2 4 Setti ngs adjustin g 42 auto shut off 64 beep 65 black and white 42 counte r rese t 6 3 exposure 56 Eye Start 62 flash 43 hand h eld 62 Instant Review 6 0 photo qu ality 45 self- timer 53 whit e b alanc e 58 zoom 50 Setup camera 5 Shutof f automat ic 64 Sleep mod e overview 16 setting th e auto sh utoff times 64 using eye start 62 Slide show s creating a nd play ing 87 Small obj ects using mac ro mo de 52 Soft k eys 23 Soft ware accessing help 117 instal ling on a Mac intosh 101 install ing on a PC 95 Spec ificat ions 1 35 Spot me thod f or auto matic ex posur e 57 Status chec king 3 2 on the color LCD 33 Status L CD 32 batter y icon s 9 cleani ng 11 8 flash icons 43 icons 133 Still ph otos taking 35 using the self-t imer 53
Index HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 150 System requi rements Macint osh 101 PC 94 T Taking p hotos burst 36 Instant Review 3 6 of smal l obje cts 52 overvi ew 30 still im ages 35 timela pse 3 8 Technical s upport 117 Television connec ting the camera 91 using NTSC 91 using PAL 91 viewing p hotos 92 Time setti ng 24 Time lapse p hoto s changin g the sett ings 40 collaps ing 81 expanding 80 how man y to take 41 interval 41 not enou gh memo ry 39 taking 38 viewi ng 86 Transm itti ng photos to another camera 112 Trouble shootin g 115 U Unmarki ng pho tos 71 V Video outpu t forma t 90 Viewfinder i ndicator light 18 Viewing ph otos burst, ti melap se, and g rouped 86 using a television 92 using Play mode 84 using Review mode 69
Index HP Phot o Smart C500 Digit al Camera Userâ s Guide 151 W Warra nty 121 White ba lanc e setting 5 8 Wri st str ap attac hing 5 Z Zoom digi tal 5 1 opti cal 51 using 5 0 using while viewing your photos 85